
































01ass__'?Z3 

Book. . M 84-^Vl 

Gojjyright N? 


COPYRIGHT DEPOSrr. 












































































































\ 









. 














l 



. 

■ 











































I 






























































































































- 


. 







I 
















\h%^ 


THEUBRARY OF 

CONGRESS, 

Two Copiee Received 

)UL.'26 1902 

COPYRIGHT ENTRY 

7- i» - v\ 0 

CLASS Du XXc No. 

3 S % o k 

COPY 8. 


Copyright, 1902, 

by 

THE 

Bbbe^ press 


• < 
<• i) 

o 

4 . 


<1/ 
W L. 

<, C 



C K. 
< < 


LC C t ((( 

t < l t 
O C fts f 
< t t t 

<■ <■ C t Q <. 


cot 



J 


Contents 


CHAPTER PAGE 

I. The Plot and Arrest 5 

II. The Trial 16 

III. The Escape 33 

IV. Jack Finds Carlo and Builds a Raft 57 

V. Jack Builds a Cabin Tent 72 

VI. Jack Finds a Secret Cipher 82 

VII. Taken Prisoner by the Savages 89 

VIII. Jack Finds Nellie 98 

IX. Condemned to Death 127 

X. Bamboozling the Savages 139 

XI. The Pirates’ Den , 156 

XII. Jack Takes Nellie to “ Meeting ” 178 

XIII. Attacked by Pirates 193 

XIV. The Hidden Treasure 215 

XV. Rescued 237 

XVI. Jack and Nellie are Married 247 

XVII. Jack Evens Up Things with Seers , 254 

XVIII. Conclusion 263 



















































- 











































































“ 

/ 





































i 


























■ 
















HAPS AND MISHAPS OF JACK 
HASELTON. 


CHAPTER I. 

THE PLOT AND ARREST. 

“WEED, Hal, we’re in a pretty mess.” 

“I really don’t know what I’m to do, George.” 

“How much did you lose?” 

“Over two thousand dollars.” 

“And I lost twenty-five hundred.” 

“The worst of it is, George, this was not my own money. It 
belongs to the company,” said Hal, “and I’ll have to make it 
good or stand the disgrace of exposure, and perhaps imprison- 
ment,” continued he. 

“That is awful rough, old man, and I can’t help you any, 
although I lost my own money, I lost my pile, all my savings 
since I have been in the bank,” said George. 

There was a short silence, then George continued : 

“Did you lose it all on the Firefly?” 

“Yes, all in one pile,” said Hal. 

“And they said it was a straight tip,” said George. 


5 


6 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“Yes, they are all a lot of swindlers. I depended on that tip. 
They said it was straight, and that the jockey was in it, and I 
was sure to win, and now I’m disgraced for life,” said Hal, 
mournfully. 

“When do you have to make it up?” asked George. 

“Oh, it may come out at any time. It was given to me yester- 
day by the cashier of our company to hand over to Mr. Warring- 
ton at Albany, and take his receipt, and now it's gone, and Mr. 
Warrington may inquire for it at any time. And what am I to 
do?” said Hal. 

“Well, you’re in a bad fix, old man, and I’m awful sorry, but 
I don’t see any way out of it. I guess this will be a lesson to us 
to leave horse-racing alone,” said George. 

“Yes,” said Hal ; “but it all comes too late for me. You see,” 
he continued, “I’m already done for.” 

There was a long silence between the two friends. George 
seemed to be thinking deeply. It was Saturday afternoon, and 
a half holiday, and they were sitting in the smoker of a train 
speeding along the banks of the Hudson towards New York. 
They had been attending the races, and had both lost more 
money than they could afford. One of them at least had 
ventured money that did not belong to him, and had lost, and 
was now placed in a very embarrassing position. 

“Well, good-bye Hal,” said George as they parted at the 
depot. George was to take another train, while Hal was to 
stop over in New York until the next day. “I’ll see you again 
Monday evening. There may be a way out of this mess, old 
man,” he continued. 

“Mr. Seers, one of the members of our bank, dropped a hint 
to me the other day. I don’t know just what he was driving at, 
but I think he wants to take advantage of my little trouble with 
Haselton, our cashier, to advance his own purpose someway, 
and hinted that there was considerable money in it for me. I 
don’t like Mr. Seers; he does little mean things, and I don’t 


The Plot and Arrest. 


7 


believe he would hesitate at anything, however dishonorable, 
if it would only further his own interest. I think I’ll give him a 
chance to make his proposal, whatever it might be, and see if 
there is money enough in it to help you out of this difficulty. 
Anyhow, I’ll see you again Monday evening,” continued he. 

George Hampton was employed as one of the bookkeepers 
of the banking firm of Broughman, Seers & Co., a private bank 
of one of the Eastern cities. Jack Haselton was cashier of the 
same establishment. Jack had been raised in a little Western 
town by an aunt, his mother having died during his infancy. 
His father had kept the village store, with a miscellaneous stock 
of goods, where anything could have been bought, from a quart 
of thick molasses to a dress-pattern. Seers at that time was a 
clerk in this store, but having appropriated to his own use some 
money that did not belong to him, was discharged. Through 
the disgrace which followed he lost the affections of a very 
estimable young lady to whom he was engaged to be married, 
and vowed he would have revenge upon the elder Haselton, but 
before the opportunity occurred Haselton, Sr., died, and Seers 
then transferred his revengful feelings to the son, and vowed that 
he would ruin and disgrace Jack at the first opportunity. Soon 
after this Seers came into possession of considerable money 
through the death of a relative and went East and engaged in the 
banking business. After Haselton, Sr., died, and his affairs were 
settled up, there was very little left. Jack managed to finsh his 
college course, but came out well-nigh penniless, but with a good 
education, good, well-developed muscles, and an undaunted 
spirit he had no fear of making his way. He had immediately 
come East to look for employment, believing that here was a 
better opportunity for an energetic, reliable young man. 

Seers was the means of Jack becoming employed in the bank, 
and for no other purpose than to bring about his ruin. Jack, 
from an inferior position in the bank, through his energy, in- 
dustry, ability and undoubted integrity, soon won his way to a 


8 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

responsible position, and at this time, at the age of only twenty- 
two, was the cashier of the establishment. Now was the time for 
Seers to exercise his petty, malignant spirit, and bring about his 
long-deferred revenge. 

It was on the following Monday evening, soon after George 
Hampton had left the bank, that he was overtaken by Seers. 
“Well, have you been thinking over what I said to you the other 
day?” asked Seers. 

“I don’t know what you want me to do, Mr. Seers.” 

“Well, I don’t care about saying anything about it, unless you 
would be willing to do what I want,” said Seers. 

“And how am I going to promise what you want before I 
know what it is ?” asked George. 

“You can at least promise to keep your mouth shut if you 
don't take up with the idea,” said Seers, 

“Oh, yes,” said George, “I can promise that much.” 

They walked along in silence for a short distance. 

“You are still at outs with Haselton, aren’t you?” 

“There is no real trouble between Jack and me,” said George. 
“He misunderstood me in a little personal matter, and I wouldn’t 
take the trouble to explain, and so there is a little coolness 
between us, that’s all.” 

“Wouldn’t you like to see him ruined, and lose his place?” 
asked Seers. 

“Not through anything that I might do,” said George. 

“Well, if you don’t want to do this work, there is no use in 
saying any more about it,” said Seers. 

“But what is it that you want me to do?” asked George. 

“Will you promise not to mention what I say to you, except 
to your friend Hal Sheldon?” asked Seers. 

“Is Hal in it too?” asked George. 

“Yes, we can do nothing without him,” said Seers. 

“Well, I promise,” said George. 

“Will you swear to it ?” asked Seers. 


The Plot and .Arrest. 


9 


“Yes, if you’re so particular.” 

“And will you make Hal do the same?” 

“Yes, I’ll ask him to,” said George. 

“Well,” said Seers, “I want to ruin Haselton, curse him! I 
want to down him, to disgrace him forever. I want to smirch 
him so with the mire, that when I get through with him he’ll 
never hold up his head again.” 

“Say, Mr. Seers, that’s going it pretty strong.” 

“He’ll find out that I’ll do all and more than I say.” 

“But what do you want me to do ?” asked George. 

“Hal is still employed by the New York Central Railroad, isn’t 
he?” asked Seers. 

“Yes.” 

“And has charge of the baggage car on the last train out Wed- 
nesday evening?” 

“Yes, that’s his run,” said George. 

“Well, Jack Haselton goes on that train. He starts then on 
his two weeks’ vacation. I simply want Hal to open his trunk 
and put something in it. He can open any ordinary trunk with 
the keys he carries. If he can’t let him break it open and say 
it broke in the handling,” said Seers. 

“What do you want him to -put in it?” 

“Merely a small package,” said Seers. 

“Where will he get the package?” asked George. 

“You will hand it to him.” 

“And where will I get it ?” 

“You will take it out of the safe at the bank.” 

“Money?” asked George. 

“Yes, a package of ten thousand dollars which I received 
Saturday from the Western part of the State, but I have not yet 
handed it over to Haselton. I will do so to-morrow at noon, 
just as he is about to start for lunch, when he will in all proba- 
bility simply place it in the safe, after giving credit for it on his 
books,” said Seers. 


io Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“I will be sure,” he continued, “that some of the other clerks 
are aware that I hand him the package.” 

“And you want it to be found in his trunk, and make it appear 
that he stole it?” 

“Exactly,” said Seers. 

“When am I to abstract it from the safe?” 

“Just before closing. You have access to the safe and can 
do that at any time necessary.” 

“Then,” continued Seers, “you are to hand it over to Hal to- 
morrow evening.” 

“He may have use for this money during the afternoon. At 
any rate, it may not be in the original package at the closing 
hour.” 

“Then you are to take any other package that you can lay 
your hands on. The larger the amount the better. You see, 
the bank won’t lose anything for the package will be recovered,” 
said Seers. 

“This is an awful dirty business, Mr. Seers.” 

“Well, it’s not exactly the kind of a thing that is taught in the 
Sunday schools,” said Seers ; “but I’ll make it pay you and Hal 
pretty well.” 

“How much?” asked George. 

“I’ll give you five thousand dollars to divide with Hal,” said 
Seers. 

“And will you give that much to ruin Haselton?” 

“Yes — curse him! — I would give more than that, if necessary, 
to see him disgraced forever,” said Seers. 

“Well, I don’t know, Mr. Seers. This is an awful dirty busi- 
ness ; but Hal is in a mighty tight place just now and might possi- 
bly take this matter up, but I very much doubt it. I’ll see him 
to-night. By the way,” continued George, “when could you pay 
the money over? You see, if it is to do Hal any good he will 
have to have it soon.” 


The Plot and Arrest. 


1 1 

“If you secure the package to-morrow, come to my hotel with 
it, and I’ll have the money ready for you and Hal,” said Seers. 

“Well, I’ll see Hal to-night,” said George as they parted at 
the street corner. 

George passed on down the street shaking his head. “I don’t 
like such dirty work. I wish I could see some other way out of 
it for Hal. I don’t believe he’ll do it, anyway ; it’s not like him. 
Poor Hal, it’s awful for him either way, and I’m just as much in 
it as he is. It’s awful hard all around.” 

When George called that evening at Hal’s boarding-house, he 
found him in the very depths of despair. 

“Well, how are you, old man?” said George as he entered the 
room where Hal was sitting at a table with his head resting on 
his hand. 

“Oh, George,” said Hal, turning his woe begone face towards 
him, “I’m just about crazy.” 

“Oh, you mustn’t give up that way, Hal. Cheer up, old fellow ; 
maybe things won’t turn out so bad for you,” said George. 

“They couldn’t be any worse, for even if the amount was 
larger, the disgrace is all the same. Just think, George, what’s 
before me. If it was all over and everything known, perhaps I’d 
feel better. Anyhow, I couldn’t feel worse. If I wasn’t such a 
coward I’d commit suicide,” said Hal. 

“Oh, it’s only the cowards that do commit suicide,” said 
George. “But, Hal,” he continued, “I came around to-night to 
tell you Mr. Seers’ proposal. There is a way out of this busi- 
ness, but you’ve got to drag yourself through the mire ; and the 
worst of it is, the filth will stick to you for the rest of your life. 
But if you want to do this thing, it will help you out of your 
present trouble.” 

“What do you mean?” said Hal. “What did Seers propose?” 

And then George told Hal what Seers had proposed, and the 
part that each was to perform. Hal sat and listened, with wide- 
open, hollow eyes, until he had finished. 


12 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“And he wants me to do such mean, treacherous work as 
that ! I wouldn’t stoop to it ; I would die first,” said Hal. 

“Yes, it’s awful business,” said George; “but it’ll help you 
out.” 

“And put another man — and an innocent one — into my place,” 
said Hal. 

“Yes, that’s what it would do, Hal.” 

“Oh, how could I, George?” 

“Well, I told Seers that I did not believe that you would do 
it,” said George. 

“It is such an awful, low-down, mean trick,” said Hal. 

“Yes, but it would help you out,” said George. 

“Yes — but oh, how could I ?” 

Hal was walking the floor by this time. 

“Have you seen Warrington yet?” asked George. 

“Yes, and I told him the money was locked up in the safe at 
the office, and that I would bring it on my next trip,” said Hal. 
“O God, what am I to do?” continued he in despair. 

“I’m sure I don’t know, Hal ; but I’m willing to do my part in 
this dirty mess to help you out, though how I can ever look 
Haselton in the face again afterwards I don’t know.” 

Hal was still walking the floor, looking pale and haggard, and 
t>ervously kicking over the things that came in his way. 

“How much does he propose to pay for this thing?” asked he. 

“Five thousand dollars between us,” said George. 

“Oh, heavens !” said Hal, “how much I need that money. If 
there was only some other way of getting it,” he continued. 

“But there is no other way,” said George. “It’s either this or 
a prison cell, old man ; that’s about the truth of the matter.” 

“I’d probably receive the money too late anyhow,” said Hal. 

“He said that if we would promise to do the work he would 
have the money for us to-morrow night,” said George. 

“And then I could pay Warrington. Oh, heavens, what a 


The Plot and Arrest. 


13 

temptation ! But could I ever hold my head up again ? Could 
I ever look in the glass without cursing the reflection there ?” 

“Well, Hal, what will I tell him?” asked George. 

Hal was standing with his back to George, looking out of the 
front window. He did not answer for a time. Finally he turned 
his haggard face around. “My God, George, I’ve got to do it,” 
said he. “I’ve got to do the most dastardly thing a man was 
ever called upon to do. I’m going to send an innocent man to 
prison that I may go free. I’m going to do this most deplorable 
act. I’m going to do all this and then move about among 
my fellow beings as if I was a man. A man ? A brute — a beast, 
rather — worse. A dog would prove faithful and honest, even 
unto death. And yet, George, I’ve got to do it or go mad.” 

“Well, Hal, I know it’s awful rough, and I wish there was 
some other thing to do ; but the fact is, that the part I do is just 
as bad, so there are two of us,” said George. 

“But the part that you do is not so bad, quite, for you simply 
sacrifice one friend to save another, while I do it to save myself,” 
said Hal. “I don’t suppose,” said Hal, “that I would have to 
appear in court.” 

“Of course not,” said George. “What would you be supposed 
to know about it?” 

“Well, I’ll do it, George,” said Hal, “and may God have mercy 
on my miserable soul.” 

“All right,” said George, rising. “I’ll do my part, and have 
twenty-five hundred dollars for you to-morrow night. So good- 
bye, old man. Try and keep a stiff upper lip, and take it more 
easy.” * 

Everything come about as Seers had predicted. The next 
noon as Haselton was putting on his coat preparatory to going 
to lunch, and while several of the other clerks had turned from 
their desks and stood quietly chatting, Seers handed Haselton 
the package containing the ten thousand dollars, at the same 
time calling his attention to its importance. 


14 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

Hazelton took the package, casually turning it over in his 
hands, then turned to his books and giving the proper credit, 
placed it unopened in the safe, swung the inner doors to, and 
went out to lunch. 

The hours of the afternoon passed slowly. It was getting on 
to time for closing the bank. George Hampton had been in 
and out of the safe several times on errands connected with his 
duties, and had recognized and located the package, and so knew 
just where to put his hands upon it. Entering the safe for the 
last time before closing, he slipped the package into the inside 
pocket of his coat and returned to his desk, lounging about until 
he heard the inner doors of the safe closed. Then the great out- 
side doors were shut with a bang, the combination turned and 
the time lock set, and George knew that the safe could not be 
opened until a certain hour in the morning, and he breathed a 
sigh of relief, as the first act in the dastardly business was thus 
successfully performed. 

Seers was true to his promise, and when George called upon 
him at his hotel and showed him the package, Seers handed 
him the five thousand dollars, to be divided with Hal. 

George next called upon Hal and gave him the package to 
place in Haselton’s trunk, together with his share of the pay. 

Hal took the package, turned it over mechanically and said : 
“My heavens, George, but this is nasty business. But I suppose 
I’m in for it now.” 

“I guess we’re both in it now,” said George. 

“This is the night for your usual run, isn’t it?” asked George. 

“Yes. I must start pretty soon.” 

“Will you see Warrington this trip?” 

“Yes. I’ll make it a point to see him. I want to pay over 
this money and get rid of it,” said Hal. 

“Well, so long, old man,” said George, rising to go. “I hope 
we’ll come well out of this.” 

“Oh, we’ll come out of it all right,” said Hal sarcastically. 


The Plot and Arrest. 




“No doubt about that. It’s the other man that has to walk the 
floor now. Well, good-bye, old fellow, ,, shouted Hal after 
George, who was going down the steps two at a time. 

Jack Haselton was arrested the next day at Albany, where he 
had stopped over before resuming his journey. He was re- 
turned and committed to jail to await his trial for grand larceny. 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 


16 


CHAPTER II. 

THE TRIAE. 

The jury was impaneled and sat waiting. 

The judge was in his place, and was also waiting. 

The prisoner, with his counsel, occupied seats at a table im- 
mediately in front of the judge. 

The witnesses, scattered here and there, and occupying seats 
just behind and inside the semi-circular railing, were also 
waiting. 

The court-room was crowded. Some were personal friends 
of Haselton; some were entire strangers drawn hither by 
curiosity; some were the usual court loungers. All who were 
fortunate enough to obtain seats occupied the chairs placed in 
rows across the room, the others standing in the passages in the 
rear. All were waiting. The silence was almost oppressive. 
All eyes turned instinctively to the prisoner and watched his 
every motion. Haselton sat erect in his chair and looked 
straight before him. 

The prosecuting attorney stood at a table a little to the right 
arranging his papers. Having finally got things to his satis- 
faction, he straightened himself up, looked around at the audi- 
ence, at the witnesses, at the prisoner, at the judge, and finally 
at the jury. Then turning again to the judge, he said : “If your 
Honor please, this is case No. 1410: The State vs. John A. 
Haselton for larceny. ,, 

The judge, after looking over a great book that lay on the 
desk before him, addressed the prisoner, asking him to arise. 

Jack stood up and looked him square in the eye. The judge 
continued : 


The Trial. 


17 


“Mr. John A. Haselton, you are accused of taking a package 
containing, or said to contain, the sum of ten thousand dollars 
out of the safe belonging to Broughman, Seers & Co., and 
appropriating it, or intending to appropriate it, to your own use. 
Are you guilty or not guilty ?” 

“Not guilty,” said Jack, firmly. 

“Mr. Horten,” asked the judge, addressing Jack’s counsel, 
“are you ready for trial?” 

“All ready, your Honor,” answered the counsel. 

“Let the trial proceed,” said the judge. 

The prosecuting attorney arose. “If your Honor please, and 
gentlemen of the jury,” bowing first to the judge and then to the 
jury, “this is a simple case of larceny. We are going to prove 
that the prisoner, Mr. John A. Haselton, was a trusted employee 
of the banking firm of Broughman, Seers & Co. ; that he held the 
responsible position of cashier of that institution; that on Tues- 
day, the 20th inst., a package said to contain the sum of ten 
thousand dollars was handed to him by Mr. Seers, a member of 
the said firm in the presence of a number of witnesses ; that Mr. 
Haselton took the package, and after examining the inscription, 
placed it in the safe ; that the package was afterward abstracted 
by him and placed in his trunk, where it was found, at the time 
of his arrest, at Albany, whither the prisoner had gone, and 
from whence he had intended to take a train on that same even- 
ing for the Northwest. The first witness I will call,” he con- 
tinued, “is Mr. James D. Seers.” 

“James D. Seers,” cried the clerk. 

Mr. Seers stepped forward and was sworn to tell the truth, 
the whole truth, and nothing but the truth. 

“Now, Mr. Seers,” said the prosecutor, “please tell all you 
know about this matter.” 

“On Saturday, the 17th inst., this package was paid over to me 
by the firm of W. D. Brown & Co., on some personal notes of 
theirs that became due. This firm is doing business at Spring- 
2 


1 8 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

dale, a small town in Pennsylvania. I turned this package over 
to Mr. Haselton on Tuesday, at about noon, and saw him deposit 
it in the safe, and thought no more about it until Wednesday 
morning when on looking over his books, and examining into 
the cash, I found a shortage of ten thousand dollars. I at first 
naturally thought of the package containing just the exact 
amount that was missing. I looked into the safe, but it was not 
there. I looked through the waste-basket, where the wrappings 
of such packages are usually thrown, but could not find the wrap- 
pings of this particular package, so it looked very much as 
though the package had been taken intact. I made inquiries of 
the other clerks, and they said ” 

“That will do, Mr. Seers,” said Mr. Horten. “We do not wish 
to hear what the other clerks said.” 

“Well,” continued Mr. Seers, “the package was gone, and 
after consultation with Mr. Broughman, I thought it best to 
arrest Mr. Hazelton. I telegraphed to a detective agency at 
Albany, giving a description of Haselton, and ordering his 
arrest.” 

“Is that all you know of the case?” asked the prosecutor. 

“That is about all I know personally about the case,” said 
Seers. 

“You saw Mr. Haselton place the package in the safe?” asked 
the prosecutor. 

“Yes, sir,” said Mr. Seers. “After crediting the amount on 
the books, he placed the package in the safe.” 

“That is all,” said the prosecutor. 

Mr. Seers was about to step down from the stand. 

“Wait a moment, Mr. Seers,” said Mr. Horten. “May I ask 
you, Mr. Seers, how long you have been connected with this 
banking firm ?” 

“For about ten years — ever since its organization.” 

“Who are the other members of this firm?” 

Mr. S. H. Broughman, who is president, and Mr. D. C. War- 
ring.” 


The Trial. 


l 9 


“What position does Mr. Warring hold in the bank?” 

“He holds no position in the bank. He has capital invested, 
but has no active duties.” 

“A kind of silent partner, then ?” 

“I suppose so.” 

“And what position do you hold, Mr. Seers?” 

“I am vice-president.” 

“And what are your duties as vice-president ?” 

“Well, they are of a miscellaneous nature. I have a sort of 
superintendency of the affairs of the bank, and often take the 
place of any clerk who happens to be absent for any cause,” con- 
tinued Seers. 

“Who did you say that you collected this money from, Mr. 
Seers?” 

“W. D. Brown & Co., of Springdale, Pa.” 

“What was the money paid to you for?” 

“For certain notes that we held of theirs.” 

“Is it a usual thing for you to collect money in this way from 
persons or firms whose notes you hold?” 

“It is done sometimes. Generally collections are made 
through the banks,” he continued. 

“How large a place is Springdale?” 

“It’s a small place, only of a few thousand inhabitants.” 

“Is not ten thousand dollars a rather large amount for a firm 
in such a small place to have standing out ?” 

“Yes, sir ; if they were in a business that depended simply upon 
the inhabitants of such a place for support.” 

“And was not this firm thus dependent ?” 

“No, sir.” 

“What was the business of this firm, then?” 

“They were contractors for bridge-building, and had business 
anywhere they could procure it.” 

“So they were bridge-builders, were they ?” 

“Yes, sir.” 


20 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“Now, Mr. Seers, will you please tell us what especial reasons 
you had for personally collecting this money from this firm?” 

“Well, the report got out somehow that they were shaky, and 
I thought it was a matter that I had better attend to personally. ’ 

“Was this report true?” 

“I don’t know.” 

“Did you have any trouble in making your collections ?” 

“No, sir.” 

“Mr. Seers, how do you know that this package contained ten 
thousand dollars ?” 

“Because I counted it before it was put into a package.” 

“When did you say you received this money?” 

“On Saturday, the 17th.” 

“And when did you pay it over ?” 

“Tuesday, the 20th inst.” 

“Now, Mr. Seers, why did you keep this package for three 
days before paying it to the cashier ?” 

Seers’ face flushed, and he looked somewhat embarrassed. “It 
was a matter of no especial moment,” he said. “I hadHhe money, 
so that it was safe enough.” 

“Do you not think that it was a little strange, Mr. Seers ?” 

“How strange?” asked Seers. 

“Did you not have plenty of opportunities of paying this 
money over to your cashier before Tuesday, three days after 
you had come in possession of it ?” 

“Oh, there were opportunities enough to pay it over, I sup- 
pose, but I simply neglected it.” 

“Are you in the habit of neglecting things of importance in 
this way, Mr. Seers?” 

“Oh, it was of no especial importance as to the exact time 
that I turned the money over. I had it in my possession, and 
so was satisfied that it was safe.” 

“Well, I say it seems very strange to my mind. There must 
have come a great relief to your mind when this money was paid 


The Trial. 


2 1 

over to you, after the doubts that you had in regard to the relia- 
bility of this firm, doubts of such a character as to cause you a 
special trip into Pennsylvania. Then, notwithstanding this great 
relief that you must have felt, to think that you should so soon 
forget all about it, and neglect to pass it over to your cashier 
and give this firm the proper credit for it on your'books. I say 
all this, Mr. Seers, seems a little strange.” 

“There is nothing very strange about it,” said Seers. 

“How long has Mr. Haselton been employed by your firm?” 

“About five years.” 

“Did you not always find him capable and industrious?” 

“Yes, sir.” 

“And strictly honest?” 

“Yes, sir; up to this time.” 

“Did you ever before even have cause to suspect his honesty 
in the least?” 

“No, sir.” 

“Then, upon missing this package, why did you immediately 
suspect him of taking it?” 

“I made inquiry of the other clerks first, but none of them 
knew anything of it.” 

“How large was this package? Could it have been put in 
one’s pocket easily?” 

“Yes, sir. It consisted of only a few bills, for they were all 
large ones.” 

“Do the other clerks have access to this safe?” 

“Yes, sir. It’s a depository for the books as well as for the 
money, and the books are always put away and locked up every 
night, and so most of the clerks have access to it.” 

“How did you come to miss the package in the first place?” 

“There was a shortage in the cashier’s books to that amount.” 

“How did you know that?” 

“Because I took upon myself his duties while he was away on 
his vacation,” 


22 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“Well, but how did you find out so soon about the missing 
package ?” 

“Why, the very first thing that comes natural to a clerk that 
takes another’s place where money is handled, is to balance the 
cash and see if the amount on hand tallies with the account in 
the books.” 

“And you found this shortage ?” 

“Yes, sir.” 

“Then Mr. Haselton had given credit on his books for the 
money contained in this package ?” 

“Yes, sir.” 

“I ask you, Mr. Seers, if Mr. Haselton intended to steal this 
money, if it would not be more likely for him not to have given 
this credit, and consequently not to make this shortage to ap- 
pear.” 

“I do not know what Mr. Haselton might be likely to do, or 
not to do, under certain circumstances.” 

“That is all,” said Mr. Horten. 

Seers stepped down, apparently very much relieved. 

“I will next call H. D. Hammond,” said the prosecuting attor- 
ney. 

Mr. Hammond took the stand and was sworn. He was a 
young man of frank countenance and pleasing address. 

“Mr. Hammond,” said the prosecutor, “please state all you 
know about this case.” 

“I know very little about it, sir,” said he. “I saw Mr. Seers 
band the package to Mr. Haselton, and heard him say that it 
was from Brown & Co., and saw Mr. Haselton look it over, and, 
after making an entry in his books, deposit it in the safe with- 
out opening it, and that’s the last I saw of it.” 

“Did you look for it afterward ?” 

“Yes, sir. Mr. Seers asked me on Wednesday morning if I 
had seen it. I told him I had not. I then went into the safe with 
him to help look for it, but it was not there,” 


The Trial. 


23 


“That is all,” said the prosecutor. 

“Mr. Hammond,” said Mr. Horten, “I’ll ask you what Mr. 
Haselton’s general reputation was about the bank?” 

“The very best, sir.” 

“Wasn’t he known as being industrious, capable and strictly 
honest ?” 

“Yes, sir.” 

“Never a breath of suspicion against him before?” 

“No, sir.” 

“That will do.” 

Harry Wilson, James Collins, and George Hampton corrobor- 
ated the above testimony in each particular. 

“I now call James Stubbs,” said the prosecutor. 

James Stubbs, being sworn, turned to the prosecutor to be 
questioned. 

“What is your business or profession, Mr. Stubbs ?” 

“I am a detective, sir.” 

“Where and by whom are you employed?” 

“By Wells, Hennegar & Co., private detective agency, at 
Albany.” 

“Please state, Mr. Stubbs, what you know about this case.” 

“Mr. Wells called me to him on Wednesday morning about 
ten o’clock, and said that he had just received a telegram from 
Broughman, Seers & Co., calling for the arrest of one John A. 
Haselton, an employee of theirs, and stated that he had stopped 
over at Albany. It also gave a description of him. I first com- 
menced to make a round of the hotels, and questioned the clerks 
about the arrivals of the day before. I did not depend much 
upon the name given me in the telegram, for I expected to find 
him under an assumed name, and so I was somewhat surprised 

to find him at the B House, registered in his proper name. 

The telegram also stated when I found him to search him, both 
his person and his trunk, for a small package containing money 
pf a considerable value, and that a search-warrant would be sent 


24 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

if necessary, but not to give him time to secrete anything. He 
seemed surprised when I arrested him, but I took no stock in 
that; they all act that way. I told him what I wanted, and he 
appeared perfectly willing that I should search anywhere for 
what I was looking for. I thought in fact by his actions that I 
was too late and that he had already made way with the package. 
And so I was again surprised when I found it in his trunk. And 
he also appeared really surprised, or in fact dumfounded, when I 
told him I had what I was looking for. I also told him anything 
he said would be testimony against him ; but he looked awfully 
cut up, and only said that he had nothing to say. I then brought 
him back here and turned him over to the authorities.” 

“And that is all you know of the case ?” asked the prosecutor. 

“Yes, sir.” 

“That is all.” 

“Mr. Stubbs,” said Mr. Horten, “you say that the prisoner 
here was perfectly willing to let you search for this package ?” 

“Yes, sir. He gave me the key to his trunk and seemed per- 
fectly willing that I should search for the missing package, and 
that was the reason that I was so much surprised when I found 
it.” 

“That is all,” said Mr. Horten. 

“If your Honor please,” said the prosecuting attorney, “the 
prosecution here rests its case. We may have some testimony 
in rebuttal when the defense is through, but this is all we care 
to offer now.” 

Then Mr. Horten arose. 

“If your Honor please, the defense also rests its case here. 
We have no witnesses to call, for unless we can prove how the 
package was abstracted from the safe and put into my client’s 
trunk, it would be useless to call any witnesses, only so far as 
to prove the heretofore irreproachable character of Mr. Hasel- 
ton, and we do not think that; is necessary for we are willing to 
believe that every gentleman on this jury is willing to concede 


The Trial. 




that fact. When all his fellow clerks, who although from a sense 
of duty are apparently bound to testify against him in this case, 
when all these, without exception, are not only willing but glad 
to also testify to the good character that he has has always held 
among them, we do not deem it necessary to take up your 
Honor’s time, and worry the patience of the gentlemen of the 
jury with a long string of needless witnesses. 

“We are then ready to hear the arguments of the counsel,” 
said the judge. 

The prosecuting attorney arose, looked over his notes on the 
table, looked around the court-room, stepped out in front of the 
table, turned to the jury, straightened himself up and thus began 
his argument : 

“Gentlemen of the jury, we have here a very simple case of 
larceny, and I do not purpose to take up much of your time. We 
think that we have proved our case without the shadow of a 
doubt. This man was a trusted employee of this banking firm. 
He was holding the responsible position of cashier in this estab- 
lishment. He was thus trusted, because up to this time he had 
undoubtedly never done anything to bring suspicion upon him. 
He had carried himself honestly and uprightly among his fellow 
clerks, and before his employers. He had performed his duties 
in a thorough and conscientious manner. He undoubtedly was 
a model clerk. But, gentlemen of the jury, it’s only from the 
greatest height that there can be the greatest fall. When a man 
is down, he cannot fall very far. But, in social, religious or 
moral life, the higher a man succeeds in climbing, the greater 
distance is he in danger of falling. 

“Just one little slip, one misstep, one mistake, and down he 
goes to irreparable ruin. He has lost in a moment what it had 
taken a lifetime to gain. It is rather sad, gentlemen, that a 
man may spend nearly all his life in building up a good char- 
acter, not a reputation gentlemen, but a character, which is the 
inner life, the true self, guided by a consciousness of right-doing, 


2 6 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

and so obtain a high eminence either socially, religiously or 
morally, or all combined, and then in one weak moment to fall 
down, down, down into inconceivable depths of everlasting ruin 
and disgrace. But such it is, gentlemen, and that one moment 
of weakness has undone all the efforts of a former life. A man 
can never fully recover after such a fall. He will never be the 
same man again. He may repent the act that caused his fall, he 
may do penance in long years of imprisonment, he may come out 
of prison and strive, by an upright life, to regain what he had 
lost by his fall, and to a certain extent may seem apparently to 
succeed, and his fellow-men may take him by the hand, and to 
all appearances seem to have forgotten his one mistake made in 
a weak moment, but, gentlemen, away down in their hearts they 
can’t help but remember, and the man himself remembers. We 
have before us to-day, gentlemen, a case in point. Here is a 
young man who up to this time has been all that even a mother’s 
heart could wish ; a good, moral, conscientious young man, and 
all that an employer could desire; a faithful, industrious and 
capable clerk of the strictest integrity ; yet in one weak moment 
he has fallen. We do not know what the temptation was. It 
may have been very great. It may have been a matter of life or 
death. We do not know, gentlemen, what the cause. We only 
state the facts in the case. Here is a faithful, honorable clerk, 
who is given a package containing ten thousand dollars. He 
was seen to take it in his hands and deposit in the safe. This 
package is afterward found in his trunk in a distant city, whither 
he had gone and from whence at the very day of his arrest he 
was to continue his journey. It is true, gentlemen, no one has 
been found who actually saw him abstract the package from the 
safe, but, gentlemen, that has no bearing in the matter. Would 
he not take particular pains to be sure that no one did see him 
when he did this thing? 

“When a man is going to take anything from another that does 
not belong to him, does he generally wait until there is a crowd 


The Trial. 


27 


around that can testify to that fact, or is he liable to do it when 
no one is liable to see him? And then think of the oppor- 
tunities he had to secrete this package about his person ! Why, 
he had access to the safe at any and all times. In and out of it 
at all hours of the day. But the most damaging testimony is 
that it was found in his possession. Taken from his trunk with 
which he was traveling way off to a distant part of the country. 
Gentlemen, the thing is too plain. This young man has fallen 
from his high estate and is guilty of this theft. You can agree 
upon no other verdict. You may feel sorry for him, but your 
pity will not save him. You have sworn to do your duty. You 
must abide by the law and the evidence, and may God give you 
a clear conscience in the discharge of your duty. I thank you, 
gentlemen, for your attention.” 

The prosecuting attorney again resumed his seat, and every- 
body drew a long breath, as though of relief from the tension in 
which their minds had been strained for the last half hour. 

Mr. Horten then arose and addressed the jury. 

“Gentlemen of the jury,” he said, “I stand in your presence 
to-day to plead for an innocent man. That he is innocent of 
this crime I am just as well convinced as I am that I stand here 
before you. What has been proven against him? First, that 
he received this package of money from Mr. Seers, and de- 
posited it in the safe. Is there any crime in that? Was not 
that all in connection with his regular duties? Yes. So that 
he has committed no crime thus far. What next is proven? 
That he went as far as Albany, where he was arrested. Is there 
any crime in that ? Was it not by permission of his employers 
that he had started on a vacation of two weeks? Yes. So 
there is no crime in that, and he is thus innocent. What next is 
proven? That this package is found in his trunk. ‘Ah/ you 
say, 'there is the crime.’ But, gentlemen, is it a crime unless he 
put it there ? And who among you dare to say positively that 
my client here put that package in his trunk? Did he act like 


0,8 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

he knew it was there when he gave Mr. Stubbs his keys to 
examine his trunk? Is that the act of a guilty man? Such an 
act, the detective said, surprised him when he found the package 
was in the trunk. Surprised him because he did not expect to 
find it. He is a man in the habit of arresting criminals almost 
every day in the year, and yet this man was surprised when he 
found the package. He was nonplussed at such an easy 
solution of the matter. When this man was put upon the case, 
and told to find this man, he naturally supposed that the man 
was guilty, and began to look for him, and expecting to identify 
him by the description sent him, hiding somewhere under an 
assumed name. But how did he find him? In hiding? No. 
Under an alias? No. In some obscure locality? No. But 
he found him registered at a prominent hotel in his right name, 
like any other honest man. He says this was also a surprise to 
him. He was not used to finding those kind of criminals. He 
was used to something more intricate. And then, when he was 
handed the keys and told to search the trunk and found the 
package, he was surprised again. 

“Why was he surprised, gentlemen? I ask you, why was he 
surprised ? Because he was in the presence of an innocent man. 
He expected to find guilt, but found innocence, and so was sur- 
prised. He was in the presence of a man who did not know that 
the package was in the trunk. 

“Do not all my client’s actions prove his entire innocence? 
Does he not act all through like a man naturally would who 
knew that he was innocent of any intentional wrong? And 
when the package was found, how did he act? The detective 
says he acted as though he was surprised. Nay, he was dum- 
founded. Is not that the action of an innocent man? Gentle- 
men, my client is no play-actor. Look into his frank and open 
face. Look down into his truthful eyes and you will know that 
he cannot act only in accordance with his natural feelings in all 
things. But you say the package was there. How do you 


The Trial. 


29 


account for that ? Somebody must have put it there. I 
acknowledge all that, gentlemen, and I am sorry to say I don’t 
know. If I only knew that point and could prove it, my client 
would walk out of this room a free man. It is true the package 
was found in his trunk and must have been put there by some 
one’s hands. It certainly could not have crept into the trunk of 
its own accord. You may say that the person who put it there 
was the person who expected to profit most by it ; and I say 
that that would be a right conclusion ; for the person who did 
this thing never intended that my client should profit by it, but 
that he did it for his own purpose — a purpose to bring about 
just such a state of things as exist at this moment ; a state of 
things that would dishonor and disgrace this man in the eyes of 
the whole world. 

“But who has done this thing, and for what reason? I answer 
again, gentlemen, I don’t know. But there is something you 
may be assured of; there is some one watching this trial with 
glaring, gloating eyes ; who is more than interested, and who is 
watching every point, and with bated breath, is only waiting for 
the end. Are you incredulous, gentlemen ? Did this thing 
never happen before? Gentlemen, did you never hear of an 
innocent man being sent to prison. Is it altogether an unheard- 
of thing? I say no. Although it may not be a common occur- 
rence, it is sometimes done. And I say it’s a shame, a shame, 
gentlemen. Will you stop for a moment to think what it means 
to the man himself? Just think one moment, gentlemten. A man 
wrongly accused and sent to prison for a term of years. Let it 
come home to you, gentlemen. 

“Imagine it to happen to yourself. And why not to you as 
well as any other innocent person? I say again, gentlemen, 
that it is a shame, a crying shame, that in this enlightened coun- 
try, and in this intelligent age, that any innocent man, at any 
time, should be sent to pay the penalty of a crime that he did 
not do. Why is it necessary ? I say, gentlemen, it aught never 


30 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

to happen. In this age of intelligence and progress, when 
rapid strides are being made in every other direction, why is the 
detection of criminals at a standstill? Why, gentlemen, if the 
proper progress was made in this direction, there never would 
be a crime go unpunished — not by picking up some scapegoat to 
appease an angry public, but by a punishment of the real 
criminal. But there is the trouble, gentlemen. When there is 
a crime committed, there is a great hue and cry for some one to 
pay the penalty. Justice has been outraged, rights have been 
trampled on, and somebody must suffer for it, and the com- 
munity is not satisfied until it is known that some one has paid 
the penalty. Generally, I admit, it is the right one, the one who 
ought to be made to suffer. But sometimes they make mis- 
takes, and I say, gentlemen, that there should be no mistakes of 
this kind. It is altogether too serious a matter to allow to be 
open to mistakes. Now, gentlemen, I ask you in all serious- 
ness, are you going to make one of these mistakes to-day? 
Look into this man’s face. Do you find guilt written there? 

“Perhaps some of you have boys of about this man’s age. 
Put them for a moment in his place, and then remember that 
he is somebody’s boy, that he once knelt at a mother’s knee, 
that he was the pride of a father’s heart, and do not, gentlemen, 
I beg of you, have upon your conscience for the rest of your 
lives the sad thought of having sent an innocent man to prison. 
Gentlemen, I thank you.” 

Mr. Horten resumed his seat, and another sigh went up from 
the audience, and then there was a slight stir through the room, 
as the audience sought a momentary relief from strained posi- 
tions and stiffened bodies ; but all were anxious to hear the 
judge’s charge to the jury which was brief and to the point. 

The judge’s charge to the jury: 

“Gentlemen, the prisoner at the bar is accused of the crime 
of larceny. This crime must not be confounded with that of 
embezzlement. In law the line is drawn very finely but dis- 


The Trial. 


3 * 


tinctly between the two crimes. Larceny is the act of taking, 
with the purpose of appropriating to the use of one's self, the 
property of another. Now, legally a person cannot take from 
another person what that person is not in possession of. It 
must not only belong to him, but he must be in possession of it, 
then, again, to be in possession of it, he does not really have 
to have it in his hands or about his person ; but it may be 
deposited in his home, in his cash-drawer, in his safe, or at 
his office, or anywhere that he is likely to keep valuables. Now 
to explain : If a trusted employee was sent out to collect 
a bill by another, and after collecting the amount was to ap- 
propriate it to his own use, that would be embezzlement ; but 
if he returned the amount and placed it in the cash-drawer 
and then abstracted it, even after a short time, that would 
be larceny, because during that short time that it was in the 
drawer, it was in the possession of the rightful owner. The 
prisoner at the bar is on trial for larceny. You must find him 
guilty of larceny or bring in a verdict of not guilty. It is not 
necessary that he should have proved his 1 innocence. 

“A man legally is always innocent until he is proven guilty. 
If, on the other hand, you are satisfied in your own minds, 
beyond a reasonable doubt, that this man abstracted this pack- 
age from the safe with the purpose of appropriating it to his 
own use, you must bring in a verdict of guilty. It is not abso- 
lutely necessary that any one should have actually seen him take 
this package. 

“But, gentlemen, if from all the evidence submitted to 
you, you are satisfied, beyond a reasonable doubt, that he did 
so, that is all that is necessary. Then, gentlemen, you are to 
repress all feelings that you may have for him. You may pity 
him, you may feel never so sorry, but you must put all feelings 
from you and carefully consider the law and evidence, and bring 
in the verdict that you conscientiously believe to be right, and 
may God help you so decide. 


32 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“You will now retire to the jury-room, gentlemen, and de- 
liberate upon your verdict, and when you have reached an 
agreement the Court will be ready to receive it.” 

The jury was out something over half an hour, when they 
sent word that they had reached a verdict. 

They soon filed in again and resumed their seats. Jack 
looked closely into the face of each as he passed, and tried to 
read what might be his fate, but without success. 

“Well, gentlemen,” asked the judge, “have you agreed upon 
a verdict?” 

“We have, sir,” answered the foreman as he passed a folded 
paper to the judge, who passed it on to the clerk. 

The clerk took the paper, opened it out, arose at his desk and 
read : 

“We, the jury, find the defendant guilty ” 

There was a low murmur heard throughout the room, but 
the gavel of the court officer came down upon his desk as he 
called “silence !” 

“The prisoner will please stand up,” said the judge. Jack 
arose, pale but firm, and stood erect, looking straight at the 
judge. 

“Have you anything to say before sentence is passed upon 
you?” asked the judge. 

“There is nothing to say, your Honor, only that I am innocent 
of this charge,” said Jack. * 

“You have been found guilty by twelve of your peers, and 
nothing now remains for me but to pass sentence upon you. 
You will be taken back to the county jail and there await the 
convenience of the sheriff, when you will be taken to the State 
prison, and there kept in close confinement for the term of ten 
years,” said the judge. ^ 


f 


CHAPTER III. 


THE ESCAPE. 

Jack had passed one year of his sentence, when he made up 
his mind to try to escape. This had been a long year to Jack, 
the longest that he had ever known. He had made friends with 
the officials, and more especially with his particular jailers or 
keepers, whom he often tried to keep as long as they would 
stay with him, if for no other reason but to break the monotony 
of his weary existence, and so would often laugh and joke with 
them, and they became very friendly, and often did little favors 
for Jack. In fact, they would do anything for him that would 
come within the restrictions of their duties. Then during this 
long year Jack, for the sake of having some one to talk to, fell 
in the habit of talking to himself, calling himself Jack, as if he 
was some second person. This habit grew upon him so that 
he often held long arguments between himself and Jack, and 
would even find himself sometimes becoming irritable when 
he could not bring Jack around to his way of thinking. 

But now had come the time when Jack was determined to 
escape. He had fully made up his mind to make the attempt. 

“Yes, Jack,” he said, “you can’t stand this thing any longer. 
You are here to pay the penalty of some other fellow’s wrong- 
doing, and it isn’t right, old boy, to treat you so. You must 
escape at whatever cost. Yes, Jack, you must get out of this. 
You must vamoose, skedaddle, make yourself scarce. This is 
not a healthy place for you, old boy. You’ve got to make the 
attempt anyhow, whatever comes of it. If you should be shot 
in the attempt, old boy, I should feel sorry for you, but am 
3 33 


34 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

afraid I couldn’t help you any. But anyhow, Jack, death would 
be better than to go on living in this hole. Now, that’s my 
honest opinion. Just consider the thing a moment. You have 
been here one year, one year, Jack, just think, and you’ve got 
nine more years to serve. Jack, these fellows have been fooling 
you. They haven’t told you the truth about this at all. You’ve 
been here more than a year. You’ve been here a century, old 
boy, that’s what you have, and you’ve got nine more centuries 
before you. 

“Do you think you can stand that, Jack? No. I thought I 
would bring you around to my way of thinking before I was 
done with you. And so you think death would be better than 
staying in this hole for nine more centuries? All right, then, 
we’ll get out of it; you and I, Jack, can manage it some way. 
But whatever happens, old boy, we must stick together, through 
thick and thin, for better or worse, in sickness and in health, 
until death do us part. Isn’t that the form of it, old boy? 
Well, something like it, anyhow. But how are we going to do 
this thing, Jack? You’ve got to help me to think this thing out. 
Now, there’s the door, and there’s the window. Do you think 
we could manage to get out of either of these places, Jack? 
Now, to go through the door, we’ve got to overpower the 
jailer. I believe we could do that, Jack, you and I together, for 
I remember what a fine athlete you were at college, and could 
get away with any of the fellows in most things. But that 
might mean bloodshed, Jack, and we would rather avoid any- 
thing like that. We might manage somehow, Jack, to remove 
one or two of those iron bars across the window up there, and 
make a hole large enough to crawl through one at a time, old 
boy, don’t you think. I wonder what’s on the other side. No 
I know you’ve never been able to see, because you ain’t tall 
enough. I wonder why they can’t make windows where they 
ought to be, so a fellow could see out of them without simply 
looking up into the sky; but then, Jack, we’d have the same 


35 


The Escape. 

trouble there about bloodshed, for there’s a guard underneath 
that window, old fellow, I’ve heard his tramp, tramp, tramp, so 
much that it seems to have eaten into my brain, and if we did not 
kill him, he would surely kill us, and we don’t want to die yet, 
if we can help it, but we want to escape with our lives, as the 
saying goes; but how we could escape very well without our 
lives, is clear beyond me, old boy. What do you think, want 
to have your life when you escape don’t you, old fellow? Then, 
Jack, we could never get through that door in the absence of 
the jailer, its too strongly bolted and barred. 

“And then if we got past the door our troubles would be just 
commenced. We would only be jumping out of the frying-pan 
into the fire, old boy, and fire burns you know when it’s too 
hot, and I rather guess it would be too hot for us out there, don’t 
you think? Well, Jack, if we can’t go through the door, nor 
through the window, how are we going to get out, for get out 
of here, we must. 

“You know, we’ve already decided that point. There is only 
one other way that I know of, and that’s through the wall. 
Now let’s consider that point a moment Jack, for that is our 
only hope. The first thing to do is to try and locate our cell. 
Now, Jack, if you remember when we were brought in here, we 
did not climb any stairs ; that means that we are situated on the 
ground floor. Yes, Jack, ‘we were let in on the ground floor,’ 
as the schemers say when they want to scheme you out of your 
wealth. 

“Well then if that is a fact, if we went through above, we would 
probably only get into another cell, and the same thing 
would probably happen if we went through either of these 
side walls. So, Jack, it looks like our only chance would be 
through the floor. 

“I wonder what’s underneath us Jack. Have you any idea? 
The only way to find out is to take up one of these large stones, 
but how are we going to do that. Now if you only had a knife 


36 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

in your pocket to dig out the cement we might loosen one of 
them. Haven’t got a knife, what kind of a boy are you, Jack, 
not to carry a knife. You haven’t been half raised. But then 
come to think of it, how could we ever raise it if we got it clear 
of the cement. We couldn’t get any purchase on it, old fellow, 
we’d have to have a crowbar, or a lever of some kind. Haven’t 
got a crowbar in your pocket either, have you? Well, Jack, 
I’m afraid you’re no good. You ain’t a bit of help in this busi- 
ness, and that’s a fact.” 

In the meantime he had been giving the floor as thorough 
examination as possible under the circumstances. He had 
tapped here and there and listened to hear if it would give back a 
hollow sound. He tested the cement with his fingers and found 
it very hard. He examined the side walls along near the bottom 
of the cell. 

“Well Jack,” he said, finally, “it looks like a hard case, and I 
don’t know but what we would have to give it up, if we hadn’t 
already decided to escape, and having decided that point we’ll 
have to go through with it. Now, old boy, among all the things 
that are against us, there is just one little thing in our favor. 
I don’t know what’s underneath, it all sounds solid everywhere, 
but perhaps that is only the thickness of the stone. 

“But Jack if you will notice the first layer of stone next to the 
floor, you will see that it is only about six inches in width. 
Now if we could get one of these out, and then loosen the large 
one on the floor next to it, we could then lift it out, for we 
could get our hands under it. 

“Don’t you see that, old boy, now why didn’t you think of that 
yourself. But, Jack, there is one thing we must have, we can- 
not get along without it, and that’s a knife. Now I’m going to 
let you attend to that, old boy, I can’t do everything; besides 
you’re just cut out for it. 

“Don’t you remember all those slight of hand tricks you used 


37 


The Escape. 

to perform for the amusement of your young friends. Well 
you can put some of them into practice now, where it will do 
some good. 

“It would be a pity, old fellow, with all the juggling you can 
do, if you can’t juggle a knife out of that half-witted jailer. So 
I’ll leave that to you, and you better attend to it as soon as 
possible, for we may have a long hard job before us, and the 
sooner we get at it the better.” 

The jailer in furnishing meals for the convicts, always left 
with each one, during the time allowed to consume their vituals, 
a knife, fork, plate, spoon and tin cup. And in gathering them 
up after the meal, he always carried a large flat-bottomed basket, 
with a handle across the middle. By the time he reached Jack’s 
cell, he usually had this receptacle half filled with empty utensils 
gathered from the other prisoners. 

When he first come to Jack’s cell on this particular evening, 
he deposited before him a plate, containing meat and vegetable, 
a piece of rye bread, a cup of black coffee, together with a knife, 
fork and spoon. 

“Say Hogan,” said Jack, “you’re going to let me keep this 
knife this time, aren’t you.” He had often joked before with 
him that way. 

“Oh, come off, Jack, you know better.” 

“Oh, but I’m going to keep it this time.” 

“Yes, in my eye you are,” said Hogan. 

“Say Hogan, honestly, you might let a fellow have a knife.” 

“Couldn’t do it, Jack.” 

“Come Hogan, show a fellow a chance,” said Jack, as he com- 
menced his supper. 

“Oh, Jack, you couldn’t never get out if you had a dozen 
knives.” 

“Well you’re just afraid to try me,” said Jack. 

“No, and I wouldn’t be, if I had my way you might have a 


38 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

knife and I’d simply laugh at you,” said Hogan. “No one has 
ever got out of this place till they walked out the front door 
when their time was up,” he continued. 

“All right, if you won’t give me a knife, I’ll get out any way,” 
said Jack, as the jailer went out and locked the door after him. 
I believe I could work right under his nose thought Jack, he has 
such confidence in his stronghold. 

After twenty minutes the jailer returned, with the basket half 
filled with empty utensils, and gathered up Jack’s things, but 
there was no knife. 

“Now Jack give me the knife,” said he. 

“I did give it to you,” said Jack. 

“Come, come, Jack, I haven’t the time.” 

“But I tell you I gave it to you,” said Jack, coming up to him. 
“But you didn’t put it in the tray, you put it in your side coat 
pocket,” continued he, reaching in and taking it out of the 
jailer’s pocket. 

“There’s your knife now just where you put it,” and as the 
jailer reached out for it, again it disappeared. This time Jack 
took it from the back of the jailer’s neck, and the next time out 
of his shoe, then finally gave it up. “Oh well take your knife 
then, if you won’t give a fellow any show at all.” 

“Oh, it wouldn’t do you any good, Jack my boy,” he said, 
“besides its against the rules.” 

“Well, so long, Hogan,” said Jack, as the jailer again dis- 
appeared. 

“I thought I could juggle Hogan out of a knife,” said Jack, as 
he shook one out of his sleeve, that he had slipped in there from 
the tray. 

“It’s got a good strong blade too,” he continued. “Now he’ll 
take his last rounds in about two hours and that’ll give me 
about eight hours for work to-night. I’ll go to sleep now and 
get a little rest while I can.” And so he lay down, and was 
soon sound asleep. But was awakened by the jailer in making 


his last rounds for the night. Tome, wake up, Jack, it’s time 
to go to work,” he said, as the sound of the jailer’s footsteps 
grew faint in the distance. “I tell you we’ve got a big contract 
on hand, old boy, so rub the sleep out of your eyes, and give me 
a hand here now.” He took the knife, and looked around for 
the best place of attack on the hard cement that held the stones 
in place. 

‘'I think, Jack, the best place to begin this work will be 
behind the bed, where it is least likely to be seen. So we’ll 
move the bed out a little and begin there. We’ll try and get 
out one of these smaller stones in the side wall first, next to the 
floor, you know as we agreed upon.” And suiting the action to 
the word, he moved the bed out far enough to give him ample 
room to work behind it, and commenced digging vigorously 
into it. 

“I tell you, Jack, this cement is awful hard stuff,” he said, 
after working at it a while ; “but it comes out a little at a time,” 
he continued. At the end of two hours he had loosened the 
cement all around the smaller stone, but it seemed still to be 
imbedded firmly in its place. So he lay down upon his back on 
the floor and placing his feet against it succeeded after several 
efforts, in jarring it loose. He then worked it slowly out, little 
by little, by working the knife blade around it as a lever. 

“Well there is so much done Jack, now we’ll tackle this larger 
one, I’ll let you get that one out now. You used to be good at 
tackle, you know.” 

In three hours more he succeeded in removing the cement 
from ttie large stone in the floor, and then jarred it loose with 
the smaller stone. Then getting his hands under the edge, 
turned it back on the floor of his cell. 

“Well, Jack, we’ve found out one thing, we know now what’s 
underneath, at least. Looks like solid earth, old boy, I guess 
we’re in for a long, tough job of tunneling. Do you think 
you’re equal to it. But there’s just one thing that bothers me 


40 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

more than anything else, and that is, what in the world will we 
do with all the dirt that we take out. Can’t you think of some 
way to get rid of it, Jack, you’ve often heard fellows digging 
tunnels before, what did they do with the dirt. Can’t you re- 
member that either. I’m afraid your no good in an emergency, 
old boy. Sorry to hurt your feelings, but that’s a fact. 

“What’s that you say, give it to the jailer? Now that is a 
bright idea isn’t it. To give ourselves away like that. Oh you 
want to tell him we found it in the food. Well there might be 
something in that, only there is just one thing in the way. 
There is too little food, you see. If we had anything like a 
square meal three times a day, we might possibly work that 
racket, and maybe the proportion of dirt wouldn’t be so very 
far out of the way, but I’m afraid you’ll have to think of some- 
thing else old boy. But I guess we won’t do any more to-night. 
It’ll be daylight in two or three hours and it’s most too late to 
do anything at digging, so we’ll put the stones back, and get a 
little sleep and to-morrow we’ll try and think of something.” 

It was Sunday, and they held services in the corridor for the 
benefit of the prisoners, which Jack attended as usual. In the 
afternoon he managed to get a good sleep, after which he felt 
ready again for his night’s work. After the jailer had made the 
rounds for the last time he set to work. 

He first lifted the two stones from their places, and sat think- 
ing what was best to be done. The moon was shining bright, 
and gave ample light through the window near the ceiling for 
such work as he had to do. 

“Well Jack,” he said, “Have you made up your mind yet what 
you intend to do with this dirt ; what, you haven’t ? After having 
all day to think it over. I believe you’re no good, old boy. I 
believe you’ve been asleep most of the time. Well we’ll com- 
mence and get it out anyhow. What we get out for the first 
few nights we can stow away under the bed.” 

The dirt was not hard, being composed largely of sand, and 


4i 


The Escape. 

with the use of his knife he could scoop up large handfuls, which 
he piled around the hole he was digging. In the course of an 
hour he had dug into it about two feet, when he struck some- 
thing solid. 

“Hello Jack, IVe struck hard-pan. Do you know what hard- 
pan is, old fellow. Well whatever it it, IVe struck it anyhow.” 

He kept digging the dirt away from solid substance, that soon 
begun to take shape. 

He soon saw it was composed of brick tightly cemented 
together, and was of a cylinder shape. 

“Holy gee, Jack, IVe struck a sewer, old boy, what do you 
think of that. Don’t you know what that means. Why it 
means that some one has been so kind as to have dug our tunnel 
for us. Not only that, but they were so nice about it, that they 
even walled up the sides, so that it wouldn’t cave in on us. Now 
don’t you call that friendly, old fellow.” 

He had been digging into the cement between the bricks 
while communing thus, and soon was able to take out a few 
bricks. In a short time he had a hole large enough to let him- 
self through. 

“Now Jack, we’ll let ourselves down into our ready made 
tunnel and go on a tour of inspection, and see where it leads to. 
I suppose, old boy, it must eventually empty its contents into 
the river, don’t you think? And then Jack you must keep your 
head cool, this may be only a branch, and we may have to make 
several turnings, so you don’t want to get lost, and wander 
around under the streets of the city for a week or two, that 
wouldn’t be pleasant you know, and then if a heavy storm 
should come up we might be drowned like a rat in a trap, and 
then you know, Jack, you wouldn’t be escaping with your life, 
as we agreed to do. 

“Now have you touched bottom yet, well how much water is 
there. Just a few inches, that’s good. Now see which way 
it is running, we want to follow the current, you know, so we’ll 


4 * 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

come out where it empties. Isn’t that the racket, old boy. 
Why we Can stand up straight too. Now that’s the kind of a 
tunnel to have. Well forge ahead now and mind you don’t 
bump your head. It’s awful dark though, Jack, I think they 
might have put a few electric lights in while they were 
about it.” 

So he felt his way along carefully in the dark, bumping his 
head occasionally, and sometimes barking the skin on his 
elbows. Once he felt something cross his foot, and he jumped 
with so much energy that he struck his head so hard, that he 
saw stars glancing before his eyes, and soon raised a lump as 
big as a walnut. 

“Gee Wilikins, Jack, but that was a hard crack.” 

“Seems like my head was still going round.” 

“There must be rats in this place, I suppose that’s what run 
across my foot, and nearly frightened the life out of me.” 

So he continued to cautiously feel his way along until he 
probably had gone some six hundred feet, when he was brought 
to a full stop. 

“Well what are you running up against now Jack? Gee 
Wilikins, iron bars, good heavy ones too. Why didn’t you think 
of that. What you going to do about it. Going to get past 
them are you, well not without the knife, and I bet you left it 
in the cell. Just as I thought, Jack you’re the biggest fool that 
ever I met. Didn’t you have sense enough to expect some- 
thing of this kind. Now you’ll have to make your way back 
again after it. What you don’t have in your head you must 
have in your heels, as the old saw goes.” 

He made his way slowly back to the cell, and found the knife 
on the floor where he had left it, and returned again to where 
he had come across the obstruction. 

In half an hour he had cleared the cement away from one 
end of a bar, then taking hold of the bar, and working it back 


43 


The Escape. 

and forth, soon loosened the other end. Taking out this bar, 
and using it as a lever, soon removed two more. “That’s 
enough, we’ll leave the short one at the top and bottom, Jack, 
now then crawl through, old fellow, and see what’s on the other 
side. Well, I guess we’re in the main sewer now, what you 
think. You see how much larger it is. 

“Well don’t stpp there gaping. See which way the water is 
running. We turn to the left then, when we return, this open- 
ing, we have made, we’ll be on our right. You’ve got sense 
enough to understand that, haven’t you. Well come along 
then, get the knife this time. Oh I thought maybe you hadn’t 
any more sense than to leave it in the bottom of the sewer. 

“Better bring one of those bars along too. We don’t know 
what we may need in this place.” He stumbled along in the 
darkness, feeling his way carefully with one hand outstretched 
against the wall on one side. He came to several more branches 
that opened into this one, but kept on following the current of 
the little stream of water in the bottom. 

“I wonder how much further we’ve got to go Jack,” he said, 
after making his way slowly along for half an hour. When 
on making a short turn, he saw the moon shining into the end of 
the sewer. 

“Hurrah, Jack, we’ve struck daylight, or rather moonlight. 
We’re free old boy, did you know that. Hold on though, we’re 
a little too previous. Here are some more of these confounded 
bars. We’ll soon make short work of them though.” 

After loosening and taking out three of these, he stepped out 
into the moonlight, a free man. 

“Free, free, Jack, old boy. Do you understand that. Don’t 
you know what freedom means after a whole century of a prison 
cell. Ah Jack, don’t that air taste good. Did you ever breathe 
such air before, and look at that moon. Did you ever see such 
a moon before. Ah Jack, you and I together did it. We said 


44 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

we would, don’t you remember, and now we’re free. But only 
for a little while, old boy ; so fill up your lungs with this delicious 
air of freedom, and then we’ll crawl back again. 

“You want to stay out while you are out. No it won’t do 
Jack. It’s too near morning, and you’d soon be caught in those 
prison togs, and returned to prison, and put in another cell, and 
it would be where there would be no friendly tunnel already dug 
and walled for you. When you make your escape, it must be 
on some dark night, early in the evening, so that you can have 
a good start. Too bad, old fellow. I’m sorry, but we must 
go back.” 

So he made his way slowly backward, and reached his cell 
about an hour afterward, and dumping all the bricks and extra 
dirt into the sewer, and replacing the stones, threw himself 
down upon his bed, and was soon fast asleep. He was awakened 
by the jailer coming in with his breakfast. 

“You sleep late this morning, Jack.” 

“Yes, I didn’t sleep much in the night.” 

“Lay awake, planning to escape.” 

“That’s what,” said Jack, “but you won’t leave me a knife.” 

“No, harping on that same string,” said the jailer. “By the 
way, Jack, there is a knife missing, the count was short, night 
before last, and I was accused of carelessness, and reprimanded. 
The warden says some prisoner has kept one out, and is going 
to have a thorough search made.” 

“That must have been the knife that I kept,” said Jack. 

“The knife that you kept. The knife you tried to keep you 
mean. No I was sure of your knife, that’s the reason I told 
you about it. I knew you hadn’t any knife to hide, Jack, as bad 
as you wanted one.” 

“Say Hogan, what day of the month is this ?” 

“This is the fifteenth of June.” 

“Can’t you get me an almanac, that’s a good fellow.” 

“What do you want with an almanac ?” 


45 


The Escape. 

“I want to keep the run of the days, it’s kind of company for 
a fellow, you know. I can check the days off as they pass, and 
so always know the day of the month.” 

‘‘What good will that do you?” 

“Oh it’s a good thing to know whether it’s the fourth of July 
or Christmas. I might forget to hang up my stockings, you 
know.” 

“Ho, ho, mighty little good that’d do you.” 

“Well get me one any way, Hogan.” 

“I’ve got one in the office, you can have, I don’t see as that 
can do any harm. You can’t saw through these bars with an 
almanac, Jack.” 

“No, you’re afraid to leave me a knife though,” laughed 
Jack. 

After the jailer returned, and took Jack’s dishes, he brought 
him the almanac from the office. Jack waited until the sound of 
his footsteps ceased. 

“Jack, old boy,” he said. “Did you hear what the jailer said? 
They’re going to search for that knife, and it mustn’t be found 
here. No, sir, they’ll never find it here. But they might have 
done so, if the jailer had not been quite so fond of talking.” 

And taking out the stones, he threw the knife into the 
excavation. He then took several handfuls of the sand and 
laid it on the floor. After replacing the stones, he carefully 
filled the cracks with the sand, and sprinkled over all some of the 
dust scraped from the floor, giving it about the same appearance 
as the rest of the stonework. 

Sometime before noon, the officers appeared and began the 
search ; they searched his clothing carefully, then the bed clothes, 
then all parts of the bed, then under the bed, looked in the 
drawer of the little table, turned it around, upside down, thumped 
it all over, examined the bars of the window carefully, and found 
— nothing. 

After his dinner Jack began to examine the almanac. “You’ll 


46 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

have to wait about two weeks before the dark of the moon, 
Jack. I’m sorry we can’t go sooner, but, you see, old boy, it 
won’t do to run any risks, we’ll just have to wait. You see 
we’ve got to have everything in our favor that we can possibly 
bring about. There’ll be enough against us, old fellow, and you 
mustn’t forget it. You mustn’t think you’ve got a picnic in this 
escape business for you haven’t, not a little bit.” 

The time during the next two weeks dragged heavily, and 
Jack found it hard to wait patiently. He joked with the jailer, 
and tried to feel and appear as usual, but he was on a nervous 
strain, and he thought the time would never pass. He watched 
the moon through his window, as well as he could, and thought 
it never did change so slowly. He saw it finally begin to wane, 
and then to grow less and less, until finally a night came when 
there was nothing left but a small crescent, and Jack knew his 
time had come. He would make the attempt the very next 
night. 

And this last day, was the very longest day yet, it seemed as 
though the sun would never set, and night would never come. 
But it came at last, and as soon as the jailer had made his last 
rounds, Jack, full of energy, attacked the stones. He had some 
difficulty in removing them without the aid of the knife ; but 
with patience and perseverance, he finally succeeded. He found 
the knife again, and put it in his pocket. Then made his way 
without special incident out to the month of the sewer on the 
river bank. The night was very dark, and he could see nothing. 
He could hear the water in the river running past just below 
him, but he could see only a few feet from him. 

“Well we’re free again, Jack, and for good this time I hope, 
and yet just how we’re going to retain our freedom I don’t 
know. Well what do you say, old boy; what’s the next thing 
on the program? How are we going to get away from here, 
and get far enough away to avoid recapture in the morning? 


47 


The Escape. 

Well while we’re considering this thing we’ll move on down the 
river, no use standing here. Now Jack there is one thing that 
must not happen, if you don’t want to go back to jail. No one 
must see you even for a little minute with those prison togs on. 
You comprehend that, don’t you? Well then that forces you 
to do just one of two things, old boy; you’ve either got to 
change those togs, or else you’ve got to go into hiding. You 
see that also, don’t you? Well if you go into hiding what will 
happen, provided you could find a place to hide? You’ve got to 
come out again ; or starve to death, and what better off would 
you be than now. And then, on the other hand, how can you 
change your clothes when you haven’t anything to make the 
change with ; or how are you going to secure a change without 
showing yourself in your present togs. It looks like, you was 
up against it, as they say in the jail slang. I guess you’re in a 
pretty 'tight place, Jack, and that’s a fact.” 

He went on, however, feeling his way along the river bank. 
He left the city behind him, and had proceeded probably a mile 
beyond, when he saw a light out upon the water which seemed 
to be approaching the shore. He heard the oars creaking in the 
locks, and knew a boat was being propelled toward him. 

“Now if we only had a boat, Jack, that would be just the 
ticket, don’t you think. We could make good progress and 
keep out of sight too, at least until daylight, then we might hide 
until night again; but how to obtain food, old fellow, I don’t 
just exactly see. But the time hasn’t come for that yet.” 

In the meantime the boat had reached the shore, and a short 
distance in front of Jack, who stopped, not wishing to be seen 
by the man who had been propelling it. This man now arose 
and picking up the oars in one hand, and the lighted lantern in 
the other, stepped ashore. 

He fastened the boat with a long chain to a tree on the bank 
locking it with a padlock. He then picked up the lantern and 


48 Haps and Mishaps of Jack HaseJton. 

the oars, and proceeded up the hill a short distance to a cottage, 
and Jack saw him enter the yard, and after placing the oars in 
the corner of the porch, enter the house and close the door. 

“Now, Jack, here’s a boat already to our hand, it’s just what 
we want, and necessity knows no law, old boy.” 

And going up the bank to the house, he found the oars, and 
felt his way back to the boat, broke the lock with a stone, got 
in, and rowed out into the stream. 

“I’m sorry that I had to take that man’s boat, Jack. Perhaps 
we can make it right with him sometime.” 

Jack swung the oars lustily, endeavoring to get as far away 
as possible before daylight. He had learned the business 
thoroughly while at college and so made good time. Hour after 
hour passed and still he kept on. 

“Well Jack, old boy, daylight can’t be very far away now, and 
we’d better begin to look a little out.” 

He turned in the boat and looked ahead. He saw by the 
many lights ashore that he was -approaching some large city. 
As he drew nearer he found a large wharfage with many 
steamers tied up. Some appeared to be getting up steam, 
preparing to depart, when a new thought struck him. 

“Jack if we can get into the hold of one of those steamers, 
old boy, we’ll be right in it. Don’t you see ; we’ll be in hiding, 
at the same time that we are being carried away off, to some 
distant country perhaps. We’ll make a try for it anyway,” said 
he. And approaching nearer, he glided from one boat to 
another; it was still very dark. Coming to one presently that 
seemed to be making preparations for departure, he allowed his 
skiff to float alongside until he approached a small square 
window in the side, when standing up cautiously, he grasped the 
edge of this window, kicked the boat from beneath him, and drew 
himself up and climbed in and found himself in — darkness. 

“Well we’re in anyhow, Jack,” he said; “but just what we’re 
in, is pretty hard to tell.” 


49 


The Escape. 

He commenced feeling around in the dark. There seemed 
to be great stacks of miscellaneous freight piled all around him. 

Among many other things there was a large quantity of new 
wooden buckets, telescoped in bundles and tied with strong 
hemp cord. 

“Jack, old boy, that puts me in mind of something. You see 
this steamer is probably bound for a long ocean voyage, and if 
we are to go along as passengers, we will want a supply of fresh 
water, so I think we had better fill some of these buckets while 
we’ve got the chance; don’t you see. Yes of course, after I’ve 
explained it all. , ’ 

And cutting the cords that bound them he slipped out a half a 
dozen buckets, and set them in a row near the window. Then 
making several folds of the hemp cord, knotted them into a 
strong rope, and tying one of the buckets to the end, proceeded 
to draw water from the window and fill the buckets he had pre- 
pared for the purpose. 

He had filled five of them, and was about to continue his task 
when he heard a man’s voice from above, say: 

“Who is down there in the water, what are you trying to do.” 

Jack looked up; it was still quite dark, and he knew the man 
could not see him, so he commenced to whine like a dog in 
distress. 

“Somebody’s dog overboard,” continued the voice. “Well, we 
can’t look after people’s dogs, we take good care of our 
passengers, but they’ll have to see to their own dogs,” he still 
continued to some one who asked what the trouble was. 

Jack concluded he had enough water, and thought the best 
thing he could do, was to try and get some sleep; so making 
himself as comfortable as possible, he was soon sound asleep. 
He awakened after some hours, rather stiff from his hard bed, 
to find the vessel in motion, and that he was somewhere upon 
the vast ocean, with nothing in sight, but sea and sky. 

“Well, Jack, this is something like. I guess they won’t catch 
4 


jo Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

us now in a hurry; you see our names are not even on the 
passenger list, old boy. I wonder what old Hogan thought this 
morning when he brought us our breakfast. I’d give a good 
deal to see the expression on his face. I expect he’s scratching 
his head trying to think how we got out with the use of that 
almanac. That reminds me, old fellow, let’s see what day of 
the month it is. By the way, Jack, we must keep a correct 
record of the days, I’ve got it all right up till now. But be sure 
you put me in mind to punch a little hole over the day each 
morning, so we can always tell exactly. This is the first of 
July. How do you intend to celebrate the fourth, Jack. We 
might fire off some fire-works out of the window here, providing 
we could find any among all this stuff ; wouldn’t they open their 
eyes on deck, but I guess they don’t carry such combustible 
stuff in such a manner. My, what a lot of stuff there is here, 
and anything almost you could think of. No danger of 
starving here Jack, just look at the stacks of food of all kinds. 
By the way, old fellow, I don’t know how you feel, but I’m 
getting hungry; so I intend to tackle some of this food. 

“Now what’ll you have for breakfast, Jack? Not particular. 
All right we’ll open a case of this canned beef, and another case 
of peaches. That’ll make a pretty good breakfast, don’t you 
think.” 

He looked around for something to open the cases with, but 
could find nothing better than an axe handle, of which there 
were great bundles. 

' After some trouble he managed to get the lids off, and then 
with the aid of the knife, succeeded in getting at the contents 
of the cans. 

“There now, Jack, there’s your spread all ready for you. 
Don’t want anything better than that do you? Coffee? Don’t 
mention such a thing, they don’t furnish coffee at this hotel. If 
you want something to wash it down with, you must stick your 
head down into one of those buckets, for the waiter even forgot 


5 1 


The Escape. 

to leave us some cups. So pitch in, old fellow, and quit your 
grumbling. They’ll be putting you down as a kicker first thing 
you know.” 

Jack ate heartily for he hadn’t eaten anything since the night 
before, and was hungry. After his late breakfast, he proceeded 
to examine his surroundings a little more closely. 

“Jack we must see if we can’t find a more comfortable bed. 
Our bed last night was just a little hard; it didn’t have quite 
enough feathers in it, and so we’ll see if we can’t improve it. 
I don’t like to complain to the landlord for I don’t like to be 
called a kicker, however you may feel about it.” 

He climbed up on top of the freight, and began looking it over 
as well as he could. Peering over it, and peeping in through 
crevices, he finally espied a lot of mattresses done up in rolls, 
and wrapped and corded in shipping order. 

“That’s just the thing, Jack, though I don’t see how we can 
ever get one of those mattresses over here, through all this stuff. 
But if the mountain won’t go to Mohammed, Mohammed must 
go to the mountain; Isn’t that the way they say it, Jack? Well 
something like it, so we’ll have to go over there and make our 
bed.” 

He climbed over the freight, and squeezed himself in between 
boxes and barrels, until he finally reached the mattresses. After 
some trouble and much tugging, puffing and blowing, he suc- 
ceeded in stretching one over the top of the freight, but could 
only partly open it out ; but enough so to enable him to crawl 
in and stretch out. It was really better so, because he was pro- 
tected by the sides which curled up, from tossing and pitching 
much even in the roughest weather. 

“There, Jack, is a bed fit for a king; you’re rising in the 
world, old boy. You’ve got now a bedroom and dining-room. 
You’re not used to such luxuries ; you’ve quite a palace, I assure 
you. There is only one difficulty, I’m afraid you haven’t been 
fortunate in your selection of housekeeper. The fact is, she 


52 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

keeps your hall-way too much littered up, with things too, that 
you don’t exactly need, but I wouldn’t say anything about it. 
Don’t learn to be a kicker, Jack, whatever you do, try to take 
things patiently as they come. 

“Now you ought to be contented. You have a good place to 
sleep, plenty to eat and drink, and you’re traveling away off to 
some foreign country, where no one knows you, and where 
you’ll have a chance to begin your life over again. You’re 
young yet, my boy, and you may have a chance in this world 
yet, though you have got such an unlucky start ; I wonder who 
could have served you such a dirty trick, Jack. But there, old 
fellow, we’ve thought about all these things so often before and 
could come to no conclusions, so we’ll try and forget all 
about it.” 

After another meal, which included some ship’s biscuit, a 
case of which Jack found and opened, he sat at the window for 
long hours looking out over the ocean. 

“I wonder Jack what’ll the captain say when he finds an extra 
passenger aboard his ship ; be pretty mad, don’t you think. And 
then in these togs, too, perhaps he’ll take the trouble to take us 
all the way back. Bnt we won’t go without a struggle, Jack; 
we’ll never go back there if we can help it, old boy. I wonder 
where this ship is going to any way. From the direction of the 
sun, I should think we were traveling southeast.” 

Thus Jack sat ruminating, and sometimes communing with 
himself until the ship’s shadow grew longer and longer, and 
then dimmer and dimmer, until all disappeared in complete 
darkness. Then feeling his way back over boxes, and barrels, 
he found the bed he had prepared, and crawling in was in a 
moment fast asleep. He awoke about daylight feeling much 
refreshed after a real good night’s rest. After eating his break- 
fast he stood looking at the water in the buckets. 

“Jack,” he said, “that water is beginning to taste bad. I 


S3 


The Escape. 

could hardly stand ft last night, I’ll fix it, old boy.’’ And taking 
a slice of peach on his knife, he drank all the water he could 
without stopping, and then with the last swallow gulped down 
the peach. 

“There, that’s better isn’t it, old fellow? Didn’t taste the new 
wood that time.” After his breakfast he sat at his window a 
long time, looking out at nothing apparently. 

“Heigh ho, Jack, this is wearisome business. It’s awful lone- 
some, old fellow. I wish some of the other guests would come 
in. They don’t seem very sociable at this hotel. And then 
there ought to be a reading-room with the morning papers 
spread out, not very accommodating; my, Jack, wouldn’t we 
like to have a morning paper. It’s been a long time since we’ve 
seen one. We don’t know what’s going on in the world any 
more.” 

He sat in silence a long while, listening to the chug, chug, of 
the engines, and feeling the quaking, and shaking, and upheav- 
ing of the vast timbers of the ship as she was propelled through 
the water by her powerful screws. 

“I wish we were well out of this Jack,” he said. “It seems that 
our life is in a terrible muddle some way, and not by our own 
bringing about either. 

“I wonder,” he thought again as he had done many times 
before, “who could have put that package in my trunk, and what 
could his object have been. His object no doubt was to ruin 
me, but why I wonder. I don’t remember of having injured 
any one, at least not intentionally. I’d rather be in my shoes 
than his anyway. I’ll have to commence all over again I suppose 
in some new country. But it’s hard to be compelled to do this 
from no fault of your own.” 

So he sat all that forenoon thinking the sad thoughts that 
would come to him sometimes in spite of himself. These times 
were scarce and far between, for he generally tried to throw off 


54 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

such feelings, or hide them beneath a jovial exterior, and in the 
nonsense he often indulged in forgot his wrongs, but way down 
in the depths of his heart, Jack was a very sad man. 

The next morning as Jack crawled out of bed and made his 
way through the “hall” to the window, he noticed that the sea 
was a little rough, and a good fresh breeze was blowing. The 
ship was rolling a little, but that did not worry him, for Jack 
was a good sailor. 

“Well, Jack, what are you going to have for breakfast. Now, 
Jack, you mustn’t begin to blow up the waiter the first thing 
because it isn’t quite ready. You ought to have the instincts 
of a gentleman, don’t you know that? You ought to always 
treat the waiter kindly, old fellow. You might be a waiter.your- 
self sometime. 

“Above all things you must never swear at him for any 
negligence. But you must be very good to him. Now to prove 
that fact, see what a nice breakfast he has brought you. No, he 
didn’t bring you any coffee, he says they’re out of coffee this 
morning, and I guess that is so, for if you’ll look around you’ll 
see that none of the other guests have any. So you’ll have to 
do the best you can. They must be short of dishes too, Jack. 
You even have to eat with a knife, which shows very bad 
manners, but perhaps no one else will notice it, so I wouldn’t 
mind it, old boy ; and get along the best I could, and say nothing 
about it.” \ 

Jack spent most of the long hours of this day also, sitting at 
the window. His thoughts running away back into his child- 
hood. He could not remember his mother, for she died during 
his infancy, but he very distinctly remembered his father and 
the store, back in the little western town, with its miscellaneous 
stock of goods. He remembered Seers as a young clerk there, 
and that he had done some wrong; Jack had never known 
exactly what. Then there had been some trouble between his 
father and Seers, and Seers had left, and Jack had lost all trace 


55 


The Escape. 

of him, until he met him at the bank. He wondered then if Seers 
remembered him. He never mentioned old times to Jack, and 
Jack did not know what he might think. 

Then he thought of his school life, and the little sweetheart 
that he used to ride to school on his sled. And wondered what 
had become of her, and if she read in the papers of his arrest t 
and trial, and if she thought him guilty. 

Then he wondered if all his friends thought him guilty. And 
iLthe time should ever come when he should be vindicated. And 
he tried to think again of what his future life would be, and he 
could not imagine for he did not even know to what part of the 
world he was bound. 

So he spent most of the morning, and also the after- 
noon, sitting at the window thinking all kinds of thoughts, 
and remembering things that had been forgotten for years, until 
the sun went down, and it began to grow dark ; when after a 
hasty supper he crept to. his bed, and went to sleep. 

He awakened gradually to the consciousness that he was 
lying in water, and when thoroughly awake began to realize 
that his mattress was almost afloat, for there was several feet of 
water in the hold. He saw a great part of the freight about him 
was already afloat, then fully realized that something had 
happened to the ship. Just what he could not tell, but something 
undoubtedly of a serious nature. And even as he got up to 
investigate, the stern of the vessel began to sink very rapidly, 
while the bow seemed to be going up in the air. 

“I wonder, Jack, what the dickens can have happened now. 
Come we must be getting out of this, or we’ll be drowned like 
that same old rat in the trap, after all. There surely couldn’t 
have been a collision in the night, or the shock would certainly 
have awakened us. But something’s wrong sure, or the bow 
wouldn’t be climbing up into the air like that. I guess she’s 
sprung a leak in the stern, but why don’t she settle altogether 
and go down. I think I know how it is, old fellow. The bow 


jf Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

has run upon a reef of some kind, perhaps a coral reef, and the 
stern in hanging over. 

“Well we must get out of here, old boy; you’ll have to change 
your hotel again. Perhaps to the bottom of the ocean this 
time.” 

While speaking thus, Jack had been making his way, the best 
he could, towards the window, and his only outlet. The ship 
had settled at an angle that made progress rather difficult. But 
Jack reached the window which he found nearly submerged; so 
without more ado, he waded through the water, and climbed out 
of the window into the sea. Swimming along until he reached 
where the deck met the water, he climbed aboard, and crawled 
up towards the bow, and looked around. There did not seem to 
be anybody on board, and looking out over the sea, he could 
just see little dark objects bobbing up and down, away off 
towards -the horizon, which he knew must be the ship’s boats, 
with her passengers and crew. 


CHAPTER IV. 


jack Finds cardo and builds a raft. 

Jack stood there on the partly submerged deck, looking out 
at the boats, now mere specks upon the horizon, in a sort of 
dazed manner. Then he pulled himself together. He first 
looked over the ship to see if there were any boats left. But 
they had taken them all. 

“Well, Jack, I guess they have deserted you. 

“Couldn’t hardly blame them though when they didn’t know 
you was aboard. 

“Hully gee, what in the name of conscience is that,” as an un- 
earthly howl sounded through the ship. 

Jack couldn’t just locate the sound. 

“There it is again,” he said. “I wonder if some of those 
sailor men have escaped without their lives, and left their ghost 
behind?” 

As the sound went forth for the third time, Jack started for 
the cabin, and kicked in the door, and out bounded a large fine 
mastiff. 

“Hello here, old fellow, did they desert you too? Wouldn’t 
they take you in the boat with them? Come here old fellow, 
and let’s see what your name is. I see you carry your card with 
you in the shape of a collar around your neck. So it’s Carlo is 
it? Hello Carlo, old fellow, shake hands.” 

Carlo sat back on his haunches and put up his paw which Jack 
shook heartily. 

“That’s to eternal friendship, Carlo. You’ve ,got speaking 
eyes, you can do everything but talk with them. And what you 

57 


58 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

can’t speak with your eyes, you can thump out with your tail. 
Isn’t that it old fellow? 

“But come along let’s see if we can find something to eat, 
Carlo.” 

And going to the ship’s kitchen Jack found a plentiful supply 
of boiled ham, and tongue and ship’s buscuit, and many other 
things that he hadn’t tasted for a long time. Both he and Carlo 
had all they could eat, and then Jack began to look around and 
see what was to be done. 

“The ship seems to be stranded on something and doesn’t 
seem to be sinking any further. But she might go to pieces at any 
minute, and I don’t see anything to do, but to make a raft. 
Here’s a whole chest of tools, that the carpenter left, and plenty 
of timber. 

“We’ll make a raft, Carlo, that’s what we’ll do. We’re not 
dead yet old fellow, not by a long sight, and where there’s life 
there’s hope they say. And we’re not going to drown if we 
can help it,” Although there was a considerable slope to the 
deck, it was not really difficult to get about. 

“I suppose the carpenter brought these tools up to try and 
stop the leak. Or perhaps he intended to take it in the boat and 
they wouldn’t allow it.” 

There were a number of large empty casks floating around in 
the hold. They appeared sound and tight, and Jack proceeded 
to get some of them out on deck. He cut two pieces of heavy 
timber about twenty feet long, and two pieces fifteen feet long. 
He laid the longer pieces parallel and nailed the shorter ones 
across at the ends. He then bound the large casks firmly to the 
underside of this frame, putting six on each side. He tied a 
strong rope, to each end of the frame now, with plenty of slack, 
and pushed it into the sea, and drew the lines taut fore and aft, 
and thus drew it up close to the ship’s side. Then cutting a 
number more pieces long enough, he nailed them on this frame 


Jack Finds Carlo and Builds a Raft. 59 

crosswise and thus covering the whole space, and making a 
raft about twenty feet by fifteen. He now made a rudder, and 
placed it in position, and held it there by a large bolt taken from 
a spliced spar. He cut down the flag staff, and made a mast 
for the sail. He made the sail out of some of the deck awning. 
He then cut some more plank and made a raised platform about 
sixteen by twelve feet, to keep everything as dry as possible. 

“Well Carlo, what do you think of it; think it will carry us to 
the land of promise? Now we’re ready to load up, old fellow. 
But I guess we’ll have some dinner first. I feel kind of hungry. 
How do you feel? You hungry too, all right, come on we’ll get 
some dinner.” 

After dinner, Jack, began to load his raft. As the raft was 
large and would carry a good load, he was determined to put on 
plenty of everything. He got out of the hold great quantities of 
all kinds of canned goods. There was canned beef, peaches, 
corn, soup, tomatoes, then there were large boxes of biscuits, 
jars of fruits, three large cans of ground coffee, half a barrel of 
sugar, and a keg containing salt, a box containing mixed spices, 
three cases containing matches, several boxes of candles. He 
fastened several casks tightly to the raft, and filled them with 
fresh water from the water butts. He took the carpenter’s 
chest with all kinds of tools, together with an axe, shovel and 
spade, and a full supply of cooking utensils. He also took a 
supply of dishes, and a box of soap. 

He took also several large tarpaulins, and several coils of 
rope, and a keg of nails, and several other things not necessary 
to enumerate. In fact, he took anything that he thought he 
might at any time need. He went into the cabin and secured 
a large strong trunk. Into this he put half a dozen good suits 
of clothes, together with several pair of shoes, three hats, two 
dozen shirts, the same of socks, half a dozen suits of light under- 
wear ; also a shaving outfit, including a mirror hanging in the 


60 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

cabin. Also a large quantity of fine cigars. He took a mattress 
from one of the bunks, and carried that to the raft, and laid it 
out across some of the boxes. 

Going below again he changed his prison suit for a nice check 
suit, and seeing a revolver, together with a box of cartridges 
some one had left in their hurry, he put them in his pocket. He^ 
also put the almanac in the pocket of his new suit, after having* 
dried it in the sun. He then rolled as many bed clothes together 1 
as he could carry, called Carlo and went aboard the raft, cut the 
ropes holding it to the ship, seized the rudder and brought the 
strange craft around before the wind, and sailed away in the 
gathering twilight. 

“Well, Carlo, old fellow, we’re off for the land of promise, 
wherever that may be. Are you hungry again? Well the sun 
is getting low, so I guess we’ll have our supper.” 

After supper, Jack, remembered that he hadn’t marked the 
day of the month, which he usually did the first thing in the 
morning. 

“Why, Carlo, did you know this was the Fourth of July? The 
greatest day in the year, and we haven’t done anything to cele- 
brate. I couldn’t help it old fellow, I’ve been busy, but you had 
plenty of time to celebrate. Why haven’t you been raising Cain 
all day, or making a rumpus of some kind? Well it isn’t too 
late yet, so let out a howl any way, out with it Carlo. Speak, 
louder, louder yet. Very well, old boy, you’ve done your duty 
like a good patriotic dog. You speak a good deal with that 
tail of yours, Carlo. Or rather you thump out with your tail, 
what your eyes speak. Is that it, old boy? Or is it the 
emphasizing of the words that you speak with your eyes. Is 
that it? Maybe it’s the kind of a way that dogs have of using 
swear words when they not only want to tell you something, but 
want to make it doubly strong. But you mustn’t get into that 
habit, old fellow. It’s a bad practice, and besides you won’t go 


Jack Finds Carlo and Builds a Raft. 6 1 

to the dog heaven when you die. That would be pretty rough, 
don’t you think?” 

Jack stretched himself out upon the mattress, for he was very 
tired, after his unusual exertions. He had tied the rudder in 
place to keep the raft before the wind, and lay there thinking, 
and sometimes talking to himself, and sometimes to the dog. 

“I wonder what will be the outcome of this strange voyage ?” 
he said “We might beat about upon this vast expanse of waters 
for weeks and perhaps months. We’re not rigged for tacking, 
and so are at the mercy of the winds and waves. I don’t sup- 
pose such a cumbersome craft could be made to do much tack- 
ing anyway. It is just as well perhaps, for we have no compass 
and chart, and so could not tell in which direction to go any- 
way. So we can only go on being blown about, changing our 
course with every change of the mind, until we starve, go to the 
bottom or land — somewhere. 

“Well, Carlo, what do you think about it by this time? Oh 
you needn’t have disturbed yourself, why didn’t you keep your 
bed? I wonder who your master was, old fellow, and why he 
deserted you? Wouldn’t they let you in the boat with them? 
Well we found room in our boat for a dog, didn’t we? And 
now we’ll stick together through thick and thin. Yes, we will 
that,” as Carlo gave a joyful bark. 

“We’ll stick together to the last. We’re going to live or 
die, sink or swim, survive or perish together, old fellow. You’re 
perhaps the only friend I’ve got in the world anyway, and I 
suppose that I’m the only friend you’ve got. So let’s shake 
hands on it once more, that’s right, that binds it good and 
strong. 

“But we’ll get ready for bed now. It’ll soon be dark ; gets 
dark pretty quick after the sun goes down in this latitude.” 

Jack slept soundly all night, but awoke as the sun appeared 
above the horizon, and proceeded to get breakfast. 


/ 


62 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“Now if we only had some way of cooking some coffee this 
morning Carlo, we’d be right in it. Would you like a cup of 
coffee for breakfast, old boy ? Don’t like coffee, rather have 
meat, well we’ve got plenty of meat anyway. ” 

Jack stretched himself out upon the mattress to let the weary 
hours go by. The sun soon become very hot, but he avoided 
the worst of the heat by shifting his mattress to keep in the 
shade of the sail. Once he sighted a ship away off on the 
horizon, but his craft lay too low in the water to attract atten- 
tion at that distance. He was glad of it as he told Carlo. 

“It would not do, old fellow, to be picked up by that ship.. 
She’s going in the wrong direction. She might land us where 
we’d be recognized and sent back to that cell. Wouldn’t like 
to be shut up in a cell, would you, old boy? No, neither would 
I, I’d rather take my chances with old ocean, with nothing 
between me and the bottom than a rough craft like this. So 
we’ll let her go, old boy, and wish her bon voyage and a safe 
landing.” 

Thus the day wore away, and the night, and many more days 
and nights, without bringing any change to our two strange 
traveling companions. The wind still continued to carry them 
southward, only blowing a little fresher at times. So they 
bowled along at about the same rate of speed from day to day. 
’The weather had become very warm, and Jack suffered a good 
deal from it during the day, but managed to rest comfortably 
through the night, and altogether was doing very well, consider- 
ing all things. 

But one morning Jack awoke to find the raft almost 
stationary. There didn’t seem to be a breath of air stirring. He 
looked around ; there was scarcely a ripple upon the ocean. The 
sail hung limp against the mast. 

“Hello, Carlo, we’re becalmed, old fellow ; what do you think 
of that ? What are we going to do now, swim for it ? Do you 


Jack Finds Carlo and Builds a Raft. 


6 3 


think we coulcl swim to shore? Well I guess we won’t try that 
anyway. I guess we’ll get some breakfast instead, that’ll be 
better won’t it, old boy?” 

They had plenty of provisions still, great stacks of it, but the 
water had become nauseous and hard to swallow. Jack never 
drank it only when he became very thirsty, and could not do 
without it. And even Carlo did not seem to fancy it very much, 
and would not drink very much of it. 

“Don’t like it do you Carlo,” said Jack. 

“Well I don’t blame you, but it’s wet anyhow, old fellow, 
that’s the main point after all.” 

After breakfast Jack stood looking out over the quiet waters. 

“I wonder how long this calm is going to last anyway? It 
would be awful tough, broiling out here in the hot sun, day after 
day. I believe I’d feel better for a good bath.” 

Slipping off his clothes, he jumped into the sea. 

“Ah, that feels good, old boy, better come in and have a swim.” 

Carlo stood at the edge of the . raft, looking at Jack, and 
whining piteously. He did not quite understand this new move 
of Jack’s, and apparently did not altogether approve of it. But 
after some coaxing he too jumped in, and swam around after 
Jack. 

“Isn’t this delicious, old fellow?” said Jack. 

“Don’t it cool your hot skin? I hope there are no sharks 
around looking for breakfast though. They’d make mince 
meat of you and me. And I suppose they’re very fond of mince 
meat. I don’t know though, perhaps they’d make sausage meat 
of you. Would you like to be made sausage meat of, old boy? 
Well we’ll swim around a bit and then crawl out. Come on, 
Carlo, here we go.” 

After making a circuit around the raft two or three times, 
they climbed back on the raft, and Jack began to pull on his 
clothes. Looking down at the water, he saw a large fin cutting 


6 \ Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

through it, and rapidly approaching the raft and not more than 
a few feet distant. He watched the shark maneuver around, 
seeking for the prey it had lost, for a while. 

“Too late that time, my fine fellow,” said Jack. “You didn’t 
come to breakfast when the first bell rang. You’ll have to get 
up a little earlier, and rub the sleep out your eyes, or you’ll get 
left every time. See that fellow, Carlo. He wanted us for 
breakfast, but we fooled him that time.” 

Carlo looked and growled. 

“Don’t like that do you, old fellow. Well it was a little risky. 
I guess we’d better not try it again.” 

The calm continued from day to day, until life on the craft 
became almost unendurable to Jack. It was different when in 
motion, for then, no matter how long and weary the hours, he 
knew, at least, that he was making progress, and going 
somewhere. But to arise each morning, and know that you 
were just where you were on yesterday morning, and in all 
probability would still be the same place to-morrow, was to say 
the least disheartening. 

“Wouldn’t you like to take a swim this morning, Carlo? 
Wouldn’t it feel good to get into the water, old boy? But I’m 
afraid it’s rather too risky. I guess we’ll have to do with a 
good wash instead.” 

After washing and dressing he picked up the hatchet, and 
taking some nails, went over the raft thoroughly, strengthening 
any weak places, that might have been caused from the strain it 
had borne. After he had made everything as secure as possible, 
he stood looking out over the deep blue, solid mass of water. 
Not a thing in sight, in any direction; nothing but sea and sky. 

“Don’t you believe, old fellow, that you could whistle up a 
breeze, if you should try? That’s the way the sailors do, you 
know. What, never tried to whistle? You don’t know what 
you’ve missed, old boy. Well never mind I’ll whistle.” 


Jack Finds Carlo and Builds a Raft. 65 

And Jack whistled one tune after another, until finally grow- 
ing tired, he threw the hatchet down on the raft, and lay down 
in the shade of the sail, in utter weariness of it all. 

He lay there quite awhile, and was about going off into a 
doze, when he was aroused by a sharp yelp from the dog. He 
started up instantly and saw a long, slimy, black arm reaching 
up out of the sea, which had seized the dog about the middle of 
the back and was drawing him towards the water. He knew 
instantly what had happened, and picking up the hatchet from 
where he had thrown it, he ran instantly to the dog’s assistance. 
Before he reached the dog another arm had appeared and 
caught him further up nearer the head. The dog was perfectly 
helpless, he could not even turn his head to use his teeth. With 
two quick powerful blows of the hatchet, Jack succeeded in 
severing both these arms. But by that time another arm had 
come up out of the depths, and caught him by the leg. And 
with all his strength, it was as much as he could do, to keep 
from being dragged into the water. Carlo who was now free, 
tried to offer his assistance, and caught the black, slimy arm in 
his powerful teeth, and tugged, and pulled with all his might, 
when he was again seized by still another arm, which tried to 
drag him loose, but he held firm his grip although apparently 
suffering great agony. In the meantime Jack tried to turn so 
as to get in a blow with his hatchet, but was powerless to do so. 
And thus they were both drawn to the very edge of the raft, by 
some powerful unseen monster. And it looked like nothing 
could save them, for both were becoming weak from their exer- 
tions. The dog had bitten clear through the arm of the monster, 
until the teeth met, and still it held firm to Jack’s leg. Just at 
this moment, when to all appearances there was no help for 
them, there appeared upon the surface of the water, a round 
black body, with hideous looking eyes, and two little horns pro- 
truding from the top of its head. No sooner, however, did this 
^5 


66 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

make its appearance, than Jack dropped the hatchet, and reach- 
ing back into his hip pocket, grasped his revolver, and leaning 
as far forward as he dared, fired three quick shots right into the 
body of the horrible, repulsive looking object. The mouth 
gasped several times, the eyes closed, the body collapsed, turned 
over, and sank, but the arms still held their grip by the power- 
ful suction on the end, neither would they yield until Jack 
severed them with the hatchet, when the ends fell upon the raft, 
and Jack kicked them into the sea. 

The dog crawled back whining with pain. Jack suffered severe- 
ly from the sore spot on his leg, where the powerful tentacle, 
with its suction-like terminus, had held him in its tenacious 
grasp. The dog had three of these sore spots, and so powerful 
was the suction, that the blood had been drawn through the 
skin, and settled in clots on the hair. 

“Well, old fellow,” said Jack, after he had partly regained his 
breath. “That was a close call. It seems to me, that you and 
I, will have to look a little out, don’t you think? You see this 
is a new country to us, my boy, and we don’t know much about 
the inhabitants. But it does seem as if there were a lot of 
monsters of various kinds around here awaiting for our car- 
casses. But we don’t want to give them up, old fellow. We 
might want to go home again sometime, and if we didn’t have 
any carcass to go in, well to say the least, it would be rather 
inconvenient, don’t you think?” 

Carlo looked up and whined. 

“Poor fellow,” said Jack. “Did it hurt you much?” 

And stooping down he examined his back. 

“Yes, I know it hurts, old fellow, I can tell by the way my leg 
feels, but we got off lucky. I can tell you the next time a devil 
fish gets a hold of us, perhaps we won’t get off so easy. 

“I wish I had something for these sores, but I haven’t got a 
thing, old fellow. You see when we shipped, you remember, we 
came away without engaging a surgeon with his medicine chest, 


Jack Finds Carlo and Builds a Raft. 67 

and so wed! have to let nature do it all. It’ll come all right, old 
fellow, only be a little patient. I think we will have a little 
dinner now. Don’t you want some dinner, old boy?” 

After dinner Jack changed Carlo’s bed more to the center of 
the raft, so that he would be safe for the future. He then lay 
down again and tried to pass the time in sleep, but it was hard 
work sleeping so much, and the weary hours passed very slowly. 
The next morning when Jack woke up, he felt a slight breeze 
across his face. He immediately sat up and looked around; 
although the sun had arisen and was shining brightly, there was 
a dense bank of black clouds off towards the northwest. The 
slight breeze he had at first felt, grew fresher every minute. 

'‘We’ll soon be cutting through the water at a lively rate now, 
old fellow. Hello, it’s coming fast,” as a slight puff of wind 
struck the sail, then another, then another, growing stronger all 
the time. And soon the unwieldly craft was bowling along 
through the water at an astonishing rate. 

“Hello, old fellow, ain’t we going it now?” said Jack. “What 
do you think of this for sailing? That steamship you came off 
ain’t in it with us, old boy.” 

The wind continued to grow fresher, and Jack was in ecstasy at 
the rate they were going. Soon the water began to be troubled, 
and then formed into waves, which grew larger and dashed 
higher, as the winds increased in violence, until they began to 
look threatening. 

“I tell you what, my boy, we’re going to have a storm, and 
this craft is going to do some tall rolling, so you’ll have to watch 
yourself. But isn’t it delightful, old fellow?” 

Carlo looked like he did not think it was very “delightful.” 
He could scarcely get about, for no sooner would he succeed in 
standing erect, when he would be thrown down again. 

“Here Carlo, lie down, lie down, sir. That’s it old fellow or 
you’ll go overboard.” 

The wind was now blowing a hurricane, and the waves rolling 


68 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

many feet high. The strain on the sail was too much for such a 
lumbersome craft, and the forward end began to dip and the 
waves to wash over it. 

‘Til have to take that sail in,” said Jack. He tried to do so, 
but could not succeed, so he siezed the hatchet and cut the 
ropes that held it and let it down on the raft. This eased up 
matters so that the raft simply rose and fell with the waves, and 
carried herself very nicely. 

“Didn’t I tell you how to whistle up a breeze, old fellow? You 
didn’t believe me, I knew you didn’t. I could tell by the look in 
your eye, but you see you were mistaken. You’d better learn to 
whistle old fellow at the first opportunity. My, but don’t she 
roll?” he continued. “I don’t suppose anything can happen, if 
she only holds together. She can’t sink, and she can’t upset. 
It’s a good thing, too, that I secured everything so firmly, or 
we’d lose some of our stores. I guess we’ll come out all right. 
Hello there, there you go,” he suddenly exclaimed. For Carlo 
had gotten up and was making his way over to Jack, when a 
sudden lurch sent him overboard. As the dog struck the water 
a huge wave took him up and carried him further off. And as 
he turned to struggle back he was carried still further. In fact 
he could make no headway against the waves, which were roll- 
ing in the opposite direction carrying him further and further off. 

“Here Carlo, swim for it, swim hard, old fellow.” 

But Carlo, after doing his best, was only getting farther away. 

“Can’t you make it, old fellow?” 

Carlo turned to him such a pitiful look and so full of despair, 
that it went right to Jack’s heart. 

“Well keep up, old fellow, I’m coming. I’m not going to 
lose the only friend I’ve got, and see him drown before my eyes. 
Besides old boy we promised to sink or swim together, and 
shook hands on it. Don’t you remember that?” 

While speaking Jack was hastily throwing off his clothes. 
Then' seizing a thin but strong coil of rope, he quickly measured 


Jack Finds Carlo and Builds a Raft. 69 

the distance with his eye, and cut an end off with the hatchet, 
allowing- plenty for inistakes. He tied one end quickly to the 
mast, and grasping the other end, jumped into the sea. A few 
powerful strokes brought him up to the dog, for it was easy 
swimming with the roll of the waves. He grasped the dog by 
the collar, and tried to pull them both in by the rope, but having 
only one hand free, he could not succeed. 

“Never mind, old fellow, I’ll fix it, keep up a little longer.” 

Then tying the end of the rope in the ring of the dog’s collar, 
he pulled himself hand over hand to the raft. Then taking the 
rope he easily succeeded in pulling Carlo in. 

“There, old fellow,” said Jack, as the dog lay panting on the 
raft. “Another narrow escape for you. You’ve found out, to 
go overboard now, is not like taking a quiet swim in calm 
water. I’ll just leave that rope attached to you, old boy, so if 
you go overboard again, I can simply pull you in.” 

Carlo thumped his tail against the raft, but the thump was 
very weak, for the dog was nearly exhausted. 

The storm continued way into the night and well on to the 
next morning, and the rain came down in torrents. They were 
wet through and through, and could not become more so, so 
they simply sat and took it. One thing they were glad of, they 
got a supply of fresh water, caught in the hollow of one of the 
tarpaulins. Towards morning the rain ceased, the winds abated, 
and the waves receded to some extent, and Jack crawled under 
the tarpaulin, found the mattress, lay down and went to sleep. 

Jack slept far into the day. When he awoke he crawled out 
into the light, to find the sun shining brightly, the sea almost 
smooth, and the raft thumping gently against a sloping beach. 

“Hurrah, Carlo, we’ve come to land, old fellow. Did you 
know it?” 

They both sprang out upon the land, Jack loosened the rope 
from Carlo’s collar, and tied it to a tree on the bank to hold the 
raft from drifting. 


70 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“Come on Carlo, we’ll explore the country,” said Jack. And 
looking to see that his revolver was in order, he started up the 
beach, followed by Carlo, who was in a perfect ecstasy of 
delight. He was running here and there, poking his nose into 
every hole and crevice, and jumping about with quick little joy- 
ful barks. 

“Hello, you’re happy are you, old fellow? Like this do you? 
You think we’ve reached that dog heaven we were talking 
about. Is that it, old boy? But we don’t know whether we 
can stay here or not. We must see if anybody has a prior claim 
to this place. And then above all things we must have water. 
Come on we’ll see what we can find.” - 

The lower part of the island where they had landed, seemed 
to be a level tract, a few feet above the sea, and about a mile and 
a half across. At about the center of the island the ground 
began a gradual rise, until it ended at the extreme west in quite 
a promontory, which upon examination Jack found to consist 
principally of huge rocks, many of which hung over the sea. 
There were paths down this side, which though difficult of 
passage, were not by any means impassable. In fact, these 
paths appeared somewhat worn as if constantly traversed, but 
whether by human beings or wild beasts, Jack had no means of 
knowing. Upon one of the highest points of this promontory 
there appeared a rounded crest, with concave top, that dipped 
something like a saucer. In the center of this appeared what 
seemed something like a rough idol, made of stone. The upper 
part of this idol, took somewhat the form of a human being, 
but nothing was very clearly defined, and it was a puzzle to Jack 
to understand its meaning. There was not a human being of 
any kind to be found upon the island. 

Over towards the south side there appeared quite a forest of 
trees, consisting mostly of the palm family. They were all sizes, 
from mere shrubs just peeping out of the ground, to trees of 
enormous size. Some reaching the height probably of a hun- 


Jack Finds Carlo and Builds a Raft. 


7 1 


dred feet. Upon proceeding to this side of the island, Jack 
found just at the foot of the rocks, and at the edge of the forest, 
a cool, clear spring of water, which Jack and the dog both 
enjoyed immensely. 

“Well, Carlo, I guess we’ll inhabit the land; we’ll take posses- 
sion, old fellow, put in our claim, and build our house.” 

“We’ll be monarchs of all we survey. How does it seem to 
be a monarch, old boy? Never was a monarch before, heigh 
Carlo? Well you’re a monarch now, old fellow, and don’t you 
forget it.” 


72 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 


CHAPTER V. 

JACK BUILDS A CABIN TENT. 

“WELL Carlo, old fellow, I guess we’ll build our house here in 
the woods, and where it will be handy to the spring. That’s 
the idea, don’t you think?” 

“But then we’ll have to manage to get our raft around on this 
side of the island so as to have things sort of handy. Nothing 
like having things handy, old boy. Just remember that.” 

So he selected a good strong pole from among the debris 
that cluttered the shore, and proceeded to pole the raft around 
the eastern end of the island where the water was shallow, and 
then to the westward, until he reached the woods. 

“Here we are at last, Carlo, already for business, but the first 
thing on the program will be breakfast. Had you forgotten you 
hadn’t had any yet, old boy? And we’ll have a good cup of 
coffee this morning too, just think of that. Oh I forgot, you 
said you didn’t like coffee. Too bad, old fellow, you don’t know 
what you’re missing. You ought to learn to like it. It kind of 
braces you up in the morning, you know. That’s two things 
you ought to learn now. To whistle, and to drink coffee, and 
then if you’d only learn to smoke you’d be right in it. Yes, old 
boy, you’d be right in the swim. By the way, I’m glad I can 
get at my cigars now for I think I’d enjoy a smoke after 
breakfast.” 

While talking all this nonsense to Carlo, Jack had tied up the 
raft, and selecting such things as he needed for breakfast, pro- 
ceeded to make a fire on the beach. Then filling the coffee pot 
with water from the spring, he put it on the fire to boil, When 


Jack Builds a Cabin Tent. 73 

the water boiled he put in the ground coffee, and soon had the 
satisfaction of enjoying a cup of good coffee. 

After breakfast he began to unload the raft, carrying every- 
thing off and piling them in a miscellaneous heap upon the 
beach. 

“Now we’ll see what kind of a home we can build, old fellow.” 

Going into the deepest part of the wood, he looked around 
until he found what he wanted. He selected four trees about 
equal distance apart, and that would leave space enough for a 
good sized room. He then cleared out all the underbrush, and 
with the spade leveled the ground off smooth and even. He 
cut the raft apart and carried the planks to where he intended 
building. He set the casks out on the beach. 

He then took four planks and formed a frame around on the 
trees and about ten feet high, and formed another frame around 
at the bottom of the trees. The planks used for the latter he 
sank in the earth about half their width, to keep out all crawl- 
ing things. He placed one plank edgewise along the top of 
the upper frame to give a slight slope to his roof. He then 
unfolded the tarpaulin, and after proper measurement, cut a 
piece large enough to cover the upper frame. He nailed one 
side of this fast to the frame, and drawing it over the plank 
turned edgewise, drew it taut, and nailed it to the other side of 
the frame, thus forming a sound roof with plenty of slope. He 
then measured and cut pieces for the four sides, leaving room 
on one end for a door. These he nailed to the top and bottom 
frame. He now cut a door a little larger than the opening. 
This he nailed at the top only, but fastened short pieces of rope 
on the inside at short distances, and in such a manner that they 
could be tied, when he retired for the night. 

He now cut two good sized windows, one on each side, and 
made coverings to fasten like the door. As he had plenty of 
plank left he made a floor of them. And when all was com- 
pleted, he surveyed it with much satisfaction. 


74 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“Now, Carlo, old fellow; how do you like it. How does it 
suit your majesty? Is the palace fine enough for the reigning 
monarch? But I guess, old boy, it’s about grub time.” 

After dinner Jack made a bedstead, by driving the posts into 
the ground, then nailing two rails along the sides, and placing 
short pieces across on these. Then put the mattress over all. 
He then carried in all his stores and placed them along the rear 
wall. He placed the chest where it would be handy to get at. 
He drove a row of nails to hang his extra suits on. In hanging 
these up, he noticed a watch chain hanging from the pocket of 
one, and on examination found a fine gold watch attached to it. 

“Well, I guess we’ll be able to tell the time of day, old fellow, 
as well as the day of the month. I’ll wind it up to-morrow at 
noon. Let’s see what else there might be in these pockets,” 
he continued. “Here’s a match safe, four pencils, two 
memorandum books, cigar case, two pen knives, some loose 
change, and a pair of eye glasses which he did not think he 
would need, and put back where he found them. I guess that’s 
about all.” 

He then brought in the looking glass and hung it up near 
the window, and placed the shaving materials where he could 
get at them when he needed them. 

“There I guess we’re about fixed, old boy, don’t you think? 
But you haven’t got any bed, have you? Well we’ll fix that.” 

And going out he soon returned with a quantity of sedge 
grass, which grew in abundance at the edge of the forest, and 
making a bed of it in the corner, covered it with a piece of 
tarpaulin. 

“There, old fellow, you ought to sleep like a Turk. Yes, like 
two Turks, though come to think of it I don’t know just how a 
Turk sleeps.” 

After supper he enjoyed the first cigar he had had for a long 
time. 

“I’m glad I brought a good lot of these along, for a cigar is 
awful good company when a fellow is lonesome.” 


75 


Jack Builds a Cabin Tent. 

As it began to grow dark, Jack went in, drove some nails in 
the top of a box and placed a candle in between, lit it, and lay 
down on the bed. He felt very tired, Carlo lay in his corner 
with his head between his paws, blinking at Jack, who watched 
him for a while with rather a comical expression on his face. 

“Well, what are you thinking about, old fellow, do you like this 
better than the raft? No devil fish here, old boy, and you can’t 
fall overboard either.” 

Soon Jack’s eyes began to droop, so he got up, closed and 
fastened the door, also the windows, blew out the light and went 
to bed. 

When he awoke the next morning, he was surprised to find it 
so dark, until he remembered that he had shut out every particle 
of light. He got up and opened the windows and door, and 
stepped out, and down to the beach, threw off his clothes and 
had a good bath. 

Then he had his breakfast and a cigar, and wondered if he 
couldn’t rig up some sort of fishing tackle, and catch some fish. 
He had no hooks, there was plenty of line in the carpenter’s 
chest that he had used for chalk line.” 

“Perhaps I could file a nail down to the right thickness, and 
bend it to the right shape, for a hook. Of course it will not have a 
barb to it, and I would probably lose some fish, but then where 
they are so plenty I ought to catch some of them.” 

“But to fish properly, I ought to have a boat, and I haven’t 
any, though I suppose I can knock together some kind of a 
tub that will do to paddle around in. There is about plank 
enough left for it.” 

So selecting two straight pieces without flaw, he cut them to 
about twelve feet in length, and rounded one corner of both 
ends. Then he placed them edgewise, rounded side up, about 
three feet apart and parallel to each other, and nailed short 
pieces crosswise the full length. He made some tow from a 
rope’s end, and carefully caulked up all the cracks. He then 


7 6 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

turned it right side up; he also caulked it on the inside. He 
nailed a piece across each end on the top, and one about the 
middle for a seat. He pushed it into the sea, and found it nearly 
water tight. He nailed some short pieces on the side for row 
locks, and found a couple of pieces that were suitable and cut 
them down into oars. 

“That’s all right, Carlo, you know what that’s for. That’s to 
catch fish in. Don’t you like fish, old boy?” 

But Carlo had gone off on a tour of inspection on his own 
account, and Jack now heard him barking and growling back in 
the woods. He called to him, but he would not come. “He’s 
come across something,” said Jack. And he followed the sound 
into the forest. He found Carlo, laboring under intense excite- 
ment, and the cause seemed to be up in one of the trees. Jack 
found it to be a good sized monkey, sitting on a limb about ten 
feet from the ground. He was enjoying the situation immensely, 
and seemed to take particular delight in teasing the dog. He 
would gesticulate frantically, and make the most comical faces 
at the dog. And Carlo wouldn’t stand such indignity, and 
wanted instant revenge. 

“Come, come, Carlo. You mustn’t mind him. He’s one of 
the natural born citizens here, and has all the rights of first 
occupancy, and you are the real intruder, old fellow. And you 
don’t want to molest him. Besides, he might give you the worst 
of it in a fair fight. He could give you a pretty good tussle any- 
how ; so come along, Carlo, we’ll not interfere with him. Come 
on.” 

Carlo obeyed, but he didn’t like it a bit, and he kept looking 
back and growling every few feet until he was entirely out of 
the woods, when he seemed to forget all about his late 
antagonist. 

Jack took one of the wire nails and with file and pinchers 
fashioned it into a sort of fish hook. Taking some of the line 
from the chest, he got into the boat, and rowed around to the 


Jack Builds a Cabin Tent. 


77 


west, where the water was deep and clear. He took with him 
some of the canned meat for ba-it. He enjoyed the sport 
immensely for the fish seemed plentiful, and, although he lost 
some, he found he could land them fast enough to keep the 
sport interesting. He caught quite a number of a species 
belonging to the mackerel family. They had a greenish back, 
and white silvery belly. They weighed from two to three 
pounds. These were called, “Bonito,” and very fine eating, and 
found mostly in warm waters of the deep seas. He also caught 
a few fish called, '‘Pompano,” also rated fine for food, and 
related to the same family. Then a few Spanish mackerel, a 
most delicious fish for food. He brought to the surface a fine 
soft shell turtle, weighing about ten pounds, which he succeeded 
in tumbling into the boat. Then he threw out his line again, 
and it hardly began to sink, when there was a tremendous pull, 
and the line ran out quick and fast. There was no stopping it. 
The whole line ran out, and then a quick jerk, the sound of a 
snap, and the end of the line hung limp over the side of the boat. 

“That settles the fishing business for to-day, old fellow. That 
last one was a wopper. But we’re not rigged right to catch 
such big ones. I guess we’ve got enough to last us far a few 
days anyhow. What, don’t you like the looks of that fellow?” 

Carlo had been sitting in one end of the boat and now he had 
gotten up on the end seat, and was growling and whining, while 
watching the turtle, which seemed to be making towards him. 

“Well, we’ll put him back in the other end, if he seems to 
worry you. But when we come to dish him up out of the stew 
pan, I don’t believe you’ll have any very great objections to 
him.” 

When they got back to the tent, Jack took some of the empty 
boxes and knocked together a fish box, and, after putting the 
fish in, pushed it into the sea, and anchored it to the shore. 

“Now Carlo, what will your majesty have for dinner, fried 
fish or turtle soup? Or will you have soup for the first course, 


78 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

and take the fish on the second or third course? How is it old 
fellow? Will you take your dinner in courses to-day; is that 
what your majesty has been used to? Well, we’ll have one 
course to-day, and another, to-morrow. Won’t that suit your 
majesty? I guess that will be best. I think we’ll try some of 
these fish to-day. Can you eat a whole one, think? Well I 
guess we’ll cook a couple of the Spanish mackerel, I guess they’ll 
go all right, don’t you think?” 

So Jack made a fire, and while waiting for it to burn down to 
a bed of hot coals, cleaned and prepared a couple of fish, which 
he cut up in sections. Then preparing the coffee, and getting 
out some biscuit and fruit, he said: “Now, old fellow, I guess 
we’ve got a dinner fit for a king, two kings, excuse me your 
majesty, I came near forgetting that you are a monarch. But 
I tell you one thing, old fellow, you forgot to milk the cow 
yesterday. So fhat we have no cream for our coffee, and butter 
for our bread. Don’t you know you did ? Well we’ll overlook 
it this time, but you mustn’t forget again.” 

After dinner Jack lit a cigar and stretched himself out on the 
beach for a quiet smoke. After breakfast the next morning, 
Jack lit a cigar and told Carlo that they would take a walk 
around thedsland, and see if they could discover anything new. 

“This is the eighteenth of the month, old boy,” said Jack, as 
he was marking the date. 

“Did you know that? Do you think you can remember it? 
You can? Well now, if I ask you after while what day of the 
month it is, will you tell me ; you will ? Will you bark eighteen 
times? Well, all right, see that you remember that.” 

They started around the eastern end of the island, intending 
to make a complete circuit. The sun was not yet risen, and the 
atmosphere was fresh and invigorating, and they both enjoyed 
the fine morning air blowing in from the ocean. They went 
around the east end, and along the north shore towards the 
west. There was a little stretch of beach at the foot of the 


Jack Builds a Cabin Tent. 


79 


promontory, not very much, but sufficient for a passage between 
the rocks and the sea. Jack intended to go along this passage, 
then continue on around the island. But while still upon the 
north side, and just as he was about to round the rocks at the 
foot of the promontory, he suddenly grasped Carlo’s collar, and 
jumped back behind the rocks, pulling the dog with him. “Be 
still Carlo, not a sound, hush up.” And then cautiously he peered 
around the corner of the rock, still holding Carlo by the collar. 
The dog seemed to understand and crouched at Jack’s feet, but 
with bristling hair and glaring eyes. What Jack saw was four 
light canoes, filled with savages. They were nearly nude, 
having only their loins covered with some kind of cloth, and 
heavily fringed. Their hair was woolly, like the common negro. 
They also had the negro’s thick lips. They were less than one 
hundred feet from the shore, when Jack first saw them. But 
as they had their backs to the bow of the boats, they had not 
seen Jack. 

Jack took out his revolver, examined it, and kept it in his 
hand. They were making for the narrow beach at the foot of 
the promontory. When they landed they stepped out of the 
boats, and formed into single file, looking very solemn and 
dignified. The tall straight fellow at the head seemed to be the 
leader, and had his hair decorated with some bright feathers 
which the others did not have. Each one carried a spear made 
of some kind of metal, and apparently hammered out by hand. 
After all had landed they still retained their position of single 
file, and started forward in Jack’s direction, and he began to 
prepare for action. But just before reaching the rock behind 
which Jack and the dog were concealed, they turned into one of 
the paths, that Jack had before noticed, and passed on up 
between the rocks. Jack counted thirteen of them as they 
passed up towards the summit. 

Jack breathed more freely after they had passed out of 
sight, but wondered what it all meant, and was determined to 


8o 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

find out, if possible. So again bidding the dog to keep quiet, he 
followed in their footsteps, but keeping well concealed behind 
the rocks, and in the many turnings of the path. He proceeded 
thus until he could command a good view of the summit. Again 
commanding the dog to be quiet and lie down, for Carlo once in 
a while would emit a low growl, he succeeded in concealing both 
behind two large rocks, with a small crevice between, where 
he could get a good view of what was going on at the summit. 

The thirteen savages, after they reached the top, marched 
single file around the cone-shaped crest, before spoken of, 
several times. Then all stood facing the east, solemn, dignified 
and silent. The sun was just appearing above the horizon, and 
as it made its full appearance, the chief or leader made a sign 
with his spear, and they all bowed three times. Then at another 
signal they prostrated themselves and bowed their heads to the 
earth. This they did three times, then they arose and stood 
erect 6nce more. Then at another signal they gave forth a 
sound which was a sort of gutteral chant, with no music nor 
harmony about it, but a kind of dismal medley of woe. Then 
this ceased and they commenced their march around the crest 
again, chanting another dismal, melancholy orgy. Then there 
was more bowing and prostrating themselves, and more march- 
ing and chanting. Then they turned their attention to the image 
in the center, and bowed to him, and prostrated themselves 
before him, and apparently chanted their delightful music to 
him. 

“I believe I understand,” said Jack. “These savages are wor- 
shippers of the sun, and this image is the idol that represents 
their god.” 

As the savages appeared about through with their worship, 
Jack thought it about time to leave. So he and Carlo proceeded 
down the path, and, when near the bottom, slipped behind some 
large rocks, and waited for the savages to leave. They soon 


Jack Builds a Cabin Tent. 81 

made their appearance, walking in their dignified style, passed 
Jack’s hiding place, entered their boats and put out to sea. 

“Well,” said Jack, “It seems I have made my camp in some- 
body’s meeting house. Who would ever have thought that 
there would be a lot of savage fools, coming from no one knows 
where, who had selected this place to go through their tom 
foolery?” 

“I wonder where they came from any way ; it must be some 
distance off for I can’t see any signs of land anywhere. Why 
in the name of everything that’s sensible can’t they go through 
their mummery on their own island? Why do they have to come 
here to do it ? If they should find out that I am living here on 
their consecrated ground it will probably go hard with me. But 
I must not let them know it, if I can help it. I must endeavor 
to get away from here, if possible, but how am I to do it ? I have 
no boat suitable to make the trial in, and I have even destroyed 
my raft. Well, I suppose I’ll have to stay here for the present 
and take my chances. Meantime I must keep a sharp lookout 
for them. I wonder if they never go farther into the island 
then they did this morning, and how often they come here to 
worship. Well, I suppose I shall find these things out in time. 
Meantime, Carlo, old fellow, we must look a little out.” 

6 


82 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 


CHAPTER VI. 

JACK KINDS A SECRET CIPHER. 

Jack watched for several mornings for the re-appearance of 
the savages, but had seen nothing more of them. One morning 
while strolling along the narrow beach, at the base of the 
promontory, having seen nothing of the savages, he came upon 
what appeared the skeletons of several human beings. These 
were scattered over quite a surface of the rocks, and while look- 
ing at them curiously, and wondering who they could have been, 
and whether they had been savages, or some poor shipwrecked 
persons, he noticed further down, in between the crevice of two 
rocks, what appeared at first to be a piece of soiled writing paper. 
Thinking it might contain something in explanation of the pres- 
ence of the skeletons, he picked it up and unfolded it. He found 
it was not paper at all, but a small piece of parchment, on which 
were quite a number of strange characters, that to the ordinary 
eye, had no significance whatever. Jack knew at once that he 
had found some kind of a secret cipher, which he determined to 
work out, if possible, when at leisure. Not because he placed 
any particular importance to its meaning, but simply to pass the 
time, or for his own amusement. Just as a person likes to 
work out any kind of a puzzle. So he folded it up and put it in 
his pocket, for future investigation. Looking further among 
the bones, he found a large horn handle jack-knife, long ruined 
by rust, and several pieces of coin. “I suppose these things were 
in the pockets of these men when they died/’ said Jack. Look- 
ing further he found several brass buttons, also suspender 


Jack Finds a Secret Cipher. 83 

buckles. Then he saw further down, nearer the water, an iron 
chain fastened to a ring inserted in one of the large rocks. 

“This chain must have been fastened to their boat, and these 
men must have died soon after landing, or else when just going 
to embark ; I wonder how. It isn’t natural that they should all 
die at once, unless they were killed. Perhaps they were mur- 
dered by these same savages that worship here, or their fore- 
fathers, simply for trespassing on their place of worship. That 
thought is not a very pleasant one for me to contemplate, and 
the more reason why I should be cautious. This must have 
happened a long while ago. These bones look like they had 
been bleaching a long while ; though maybe only a few years 
of hot sun and rain might give them that appearance. I really 
do not know how long it would take.” 

“Well, come on Carlo. We’ll go home, old fellow,” he 
continued. 

The next morning after breakfast, Jack lit a cigar, and took 
out the parchment containing the cipher, and copied it off on a 
page torn from the memorandum book he carried in his pocket. 
And this is what it was : 

rn 33 O in D BID 5T7 3 a !D f7 E I tX-1 3 EJ 51 LlCl 

Ba&B jssri nswEjnu iBBismnjn 

1 J3W % BJUSCnxUDJDlJ'IBjnBtnnBDlCDl 

nn -xmniinijB tnccE~itcx3in®rn*.niiJB 

tn 3 n[J 7 y~iBaunB-h'in-iiiirt 3 a 

0 BOELFU 0E03~7 

j iff im nnniLF- u bj 30 cc 

He studied over it several hours, trying to find a key that 
would unravel the mystery, but in vain ;he could not get head nor 
tail of it. It was all Greek to him. Then he picked up the 


84 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

almanac and studied that intently, looking through the medical 
advertisements, paying particular attention to the construction 
of words and sentences, but could get no clue. Thus he spent 
the morning hours, when he was finally aroused by a whine from 
Carlo, who was standing a little lower on the beach, and who 
was stretching himself with a sort of restless impatience, and 
looking up in his face with questioning eyes. 

“Hello Carlo, getting impatient? Want your dinner, old 
fellow? We were to have soup to-day, made out of that ugly 
looking fellow, whose appearance you didn’t like. Well, we’ll 
cut him up and make him into soup.” 

So Jack built up the fire, and filled the large iron pot half 
full of water from the spring. He killed the turtle and took a 
quantity of the fleshy part of the meat, and cut it up into small 
pieces. After the water boiled he put the meat into it, and left 
it to cook. He then went at the cipher again, and studied from 
all points, but without success. I suppose these two lines under- 
neath form a signature. If I only knew what the name was, it 
would give me a clue, or even the first name. But then I might 
as well ask for a solution of the whole thing and be done with it. 
Then he picked up the almanac again, and looked over it care- 
fully, turning page after page, then finally settled down to 
study a page of solid reading matter. He took out a pencil and 
tore a leaf out of his memorandum book, and began to do some 
figuring. 

He put down certain words, and after doing some counting 
would put marks under them. This he continued for a long 
time. Then he turned to another page and did the same thing 
again. And then to another page and then another, and then 
he finally said : 

“Jack, old boy, I’ve got a clue, and its a sure enough clue too. 
I find that in the proper construction of any ordinary sentence 
in the English language, the word the is used many more times 
than any other word of three letters, and I find further that the 


Jack Finds a Secret Cipher. 85 

word of is used many more time than any other word of two 
letters. Now do you know what that means, you old num- 
skull ? Can’t you get the true significance of that through your 
thick head? No, I don’t believe you can, so I’ll have to tell you. 
Well it simply means that if we go through the secret cipher 
carefully and find the three characters that appear oftenest 
together, and in the same relation to each other, these three 
characters will undoubtedly represent the word the. And then 
if we go through the cipher a second time, and find two other 
characters, that appear oftenest, in the same relation to each 
other, those characters will undoubtedly represent the word of. 
Now, is it plain enough? Oh yes, certainly. But why didn’t 
you think of it yourself? But we’ll wait until after dinner now.” 

“Carlo, old boy ; want your dinner ? Does it smell good ? But 
it isn’t ready yet ; I wonder how long this stuff ought to cook ? 
I suppose until the meat is tender anyway. Isn’t that it, old 
fellow? Like your meat nice and tender; but we’ll see what 
we’ve got to season it with. Wouldn’t your majesty like your 
soup well seasoned? Well, we’ll see what we’ve got.” 

He went to the tent and returned with the box of assorted 
spices. “Well, here’s thyme, parsley, cloves, allspice. That’ll be 
enough, I guess, with pepper and salt.” 

He put in a little of each at a time, until he got it to suit his 
taste. Then as it seemed to be done, he set it off, and put on 
the coffee, and prepared the rest of the meal. When all was 
ready, he gave Carlo a plentiful supply in the tin basin, together 
with a quantity of the meat. 

“How do you like that, old boy?” 

But Carlo lay with his jaws between his paws, howling with 
pain. Jack burst out laughing. 

“Too hot, old fellow? Well you mustn’t be in such a hurry. 
You must let it cool, or else blow it like I do. Can t you blow 
it, old boy? Well, that’s something else for you to learn.” 

After dinner Jack went at the cipher again. 


86 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“Now you’ve got a clue, Jack, you ought to be able to solve 
this puzzle, unless you’re a bigger numskull than I ever took 
you to be. Now, the first thing to find is what three characters 
appear together oftenest in the same position. And as we find 
the characters we will put them down together with the letter 
which they represent.” After about an hours study, he con- 
tinued. “Now these are the three characters which appear more 
than any others, J O 7 ; so we will suppose that they represent * 
the word the, and that gives us three letters to start with : J t, 
O h, 7 e, and then we go through the cipher again and we find 
the two other characters that appear oftenest are these : [D H ; so 
these must represent the word of, £JJ o, fj f ^ 

Now, if we look through the cipher we will come to these char- 
acters : B nJIHB • If that should prove a single word, it means 
a word beginning and ending in the same letter, with double o in 
the center. What’s that you say, Jack, how am I to know it’s a 
completed word? Well, I don’t know, but t intend simply to find 
out. Is your head so thick that you can’t understand that there 
is a good deal of guess work about a thing of this kind? The 
way to do is to make a stagger at it, and then if you find you’re 
mistaken, all you have to do is to go back again and start on 
another tack. Don’t you see? Now this might prove to be 
the beginning of one word and the ending of another. Or it 
may prove to be a single syllable of some word, but until I find 
it is so, I’m going to consider it a single word. Now, the ques- 
tion is, what word is it? We will begin and run down the 
alphabet ; a, boob, cooc, dood, e, foof, goog, booh, i, jooj, kook, 
lool, moom, noon. This is the first word we come to that has 
any sense, and if we continue the alphabet, we will find that it is 
the only word. If this proves right it gives us the letter n, B n. 

W e now find we have the first two words of the cipher : On 
the. Then the third word begins with th and the fifth letter of 
this word is t. By running down the alphabet, we find we can 
get no word with sense with the letters in this position, so we 


Jack Finds a Secret Cipher. 


87 

can only continue the word, and we find the seventh, eighth and 
ninth letters are e, t, h. That gives us the word thirtieth nearly 
completed. That gives us two more letters, £f i, £ r. “Hurrah 
Jack ! we’re getting there. 

“The next word is of, which we have already found. We have 
now the first four words. On the thirtieth of. Now, this un- 
doubtedly signifies a date, and the next word should be the name 
of a month of the year. The next four characters following this 
are unknown to us, but the next three are t, h and i. But by run- 
ning through the calendar we can find no month where these 
letters could occupy these positions; so, of course, Jack, you 
blockhead, it must be the name of a month containing less than 
five letters. You see that, don’t you? Well, there are only 
three months in the year that contain less than five letters ; May , 
June and July. When you first consider the month of May, there 
is no clue to guide you; so you go on to June and you know 
that could not be correct, because the known characters of n nor e 
do not appear. Then you know it could not be July, because 
the second and fourth characters representing this month in the 
cipher are the same, standing for the same letter, and in July they 
are different letters ; so, Jack, the only thing for you to do is to 
fall back upon May for the month intended in the cipher; you 
see that, don’t you ? Oh you do ; well it’s a wonder. Now, this 
gives us three more letters, £ M, / a, j)( y. 

Now the next letter is a again, and the next one t , 
then h, then i. The next is unknown, but by placing the known 
ones down, and leaving a space for the unknown we have, 
a, t, h, i — h. Then by running down the alphabet, we find that g 
is the only letter that can possibly fit in ; that gives us g, U g. 
The next letter is t, then i, then one unknown, then e. The only 
two words that could fit here are tide and time. We know it is 
not time, because there is no m; so that it must be tide, and that 
gives us d, r d. The next word is from, all known characters, 
the next the. By putting down the known characters in the next 


88 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

word we have — e, n, t , e, r, which we can immediately make out 
to be center; that gives us C, J C. The next word is of, the next 
the . Then comes c, r, o — n, which we understand to be crown. 
This gives us w, X w. Then comes t, h, r, o — g, h, which is 
through and this gives us u, u. Then comes — h, a, d, o , w, 
which can mean nothing but shadow; that gives us ^ £ s. Then 
the next three words we find are of the cross” The rest was so 
easy that Jack could hardly write down the words fast enough, 
and the result when he was through was the following : 

On the thirtieth of May, at high noon tide, from the center of 
the crown, through the center of the shadow of the cross, 
measure fifty feet, north twenty-five feet, dig. 

JOHN BLACKMORE, 

Capt. of The Black Cross. 

“Well Jack, old boy, you’ve accomplished it ; but small good it 
is going to do you for all I can see. You know just about as 
much as you did before, for this don’t tell you much. What the 
dickens does he mean by his Cross and Crown, or rather as he 
put it, the Crown and Cross? It seems he has reversed the order 
of things ; but perhaps it would be about right as far as he is 
concerned, for I suppose he had his crown in this world, and has 
to bear his cross in the next, for this whole thing seems to reek 
of piracy. Heigh ho, I guess I have had all my trouble for noth- 
ing, and will take a smoke to relieve my feelings. Ain’t that the 
best way, Carlo, old boy? We’ll take a smoke and relieve the 
tension of our minds.” 


CHAPTER VII. 


JACK IS TAKEN PRISONER BY THE SAVAGES. 

Jack the next morning, after a hearty breakfast, called Cano, 
and started out for a stroll. He was walking along the north 
shore, and was about to turn the rocks at the foot of the 
promontory, to see if he could see anything of the savages, when 
he was immediately surrounded by them. The thing was so 
sudden and unexpected, and he was taken so much by surprise, 
that he at once saw that resistance was useless. They had evi- 
dently seen him at a distance and been watching his movements 
for some time. Carlo wanted to immediately show fight, and it 
was as much as Jack could do to hold him back. 

“No use, old fellow,” he said, “there are too many of them. 
They would only kill you, without helping me any, either. We’ll 
have to submit, at least for the present, old boy, and see what 
comes of it ; then watch our chance to get away.” But Carlo was 
not satisfied and wanted to spring at the throat of the great chief, 
who stood out a little in advance of the other, but Jack made 
him be quiet. 

“Well my high-cock-i-lor-unl, ,, said he, addressing the digni- 
fied chief. “What do you want with me.” 

But this worthy only grunted, and, pointing out over the 
ocean, commenced to talk in some sort of unknown gibberish. 

“Oh, why don’t you talk United States, then a person could 
understand you?” They could make nothing of one another’s 
language, and so could come to no understanding. The dog 
seemed to be a great curiosity to them, and while Jack was trying 
to make something out of the gesticulating that the chief was 

89 


90 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

going through, the rest stood around talking excitedly and 
pointing at the dog. Carlo did not like so much familiarity, and 
wanted to attack the whole party singe handed. 

“Keep still, Carlo, keep still ; maybe our turn will come after 
while. There, be quiet, old fellow.” 

“Well,” he continued, addressing the chief again. 

“What does your high mightiness want with me ?” 

But he could get nothing out of him but his gesticulations and 
strange unknown language. They drew off finally a short dis- 
tance, and seemed to hold a sort of consultation. Then the 
chief stepped forward and motioned to Jack that he must get 
into one of the boats that lay beached close by. 

“All right, your highness, we’ll see the end of the farce. Come, 
Carlo, these gentlemen of the islands want to give us a sea 
voyage.” 

And taking Carlo, who uttered his protests in low growls, he 
entered the boat pointed out by the chief. The chief and two 
other savages entered the boat with Jack ; the others got into the 
other three boats. 

Taking the oars and pushing out into the sea, they proceeded 
to row about due west, the boat containing Jack and the chief 
taking precedence of the others. 

“I wonder if these fellows are cannibals, old fellow,” said Jack 
to Carlo, “and are going to serve us up in a stew for their 
supper.” 

Do you want to be put in a pot and boiled and dished up for 
supper, old boy?” Carlo emitted a low growl. 

“Don’t you think you would like that, old fellow? Well, they 
haven’t maltreated us so far, anyway. Perhaps things are not so 
bad as they look, old boy. We’ll wait and see.” 

Jack, on entering the boat, or canoe, as it really was, had taken 
a seat in the stern, with Carlo crouched at his feet ; and now a 
strange thing happened. They had proceeded about a mile on 
their way, when Jack thought he would like a smoke; he took 


9i 


Jack is Taken Prisoner by the Savages. 

out a cigar and put it in his mouth, and lit a match, when all the 
savages in his boat jumped into the sea, and swam to the other 
boats, into which they crowded, and commenced to talk their 
gibberish again, and undoubtedly were laboring under intense 
excitement. 

“What in the name of strange things does that mean/’ said 
Jack. “I guess it was the match, old fellow, that did that business. 
They never saw a match before, and thought I set a stick a-fire, 
by striking it on my pants. Well, we’ll let them think so; we 
won’t tell them any different, and perhaps it may serve us a good 
turn.” The savages now brought the other boats alongside of 
the one containing Jack, and were kneeling, and gesticulating 
and bowing to him, and undoubtedly showing him the greatest 
reverence. Then going forward and taking Jack’s boat in tow, 
they proceeded on their way, but all the time watching him with 
the greatest curiosity. 

After about three hours, Jack perceived that they were again 
coming to land. This was another island, but apparently larger 
than the one they had just left. As Jack stepped ashore, he was 
immediately surrounded by the savages who had already landed. 
They all bowed and prostrated themselves, several times, and 
continued to treat him with the greatest reverence. They then 
formed into a line of march, with Jack in the center and the dog 
at his heels, and started for the village of the savages, the 
great chief marching at the head. They proceeded thus toward 
the interior of the island, and had gone, perhaps, half a mile, 
when a halt was called on the edge of a forest. The chief sent 
one of the men away. He was gone about half an hour. He 
returned with quite a number of boys about half grown. These 
boys each carried some sort of instrument, supposed to give 
forth music. Some were made of hollow canes, some made of 
bones of large animals, and resembling horns, and some were 
made of the skins of animals stretched over wooden rings. 
These were played upon with a couple of sticks with rattles 


92 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

attached to the end. And when the whole savage band set up 
their music, each one trying to exceed the other in amount of 
noise, and there being no harmony, but each playing at a dis- 
cord, the noise produced was perhaps the most dismal ear- 
splitting sound ever produced. With this savage band in ad- 
vance they again took up the line of march. They thus pro- 
ceeded onward through the forest into the village, where all were 
immediately surrounded by the entire population, consisting 
altogether of about one thousand men, women and children. 

In the center of the village was a large open space about a 
quarter of a mile in length and breadth. Around this space 
were placed the huts, made of limbs, covered with bark and skins. 
Towards one end was a strong solid building made of heavy 
logs, with several small windows near the top. This was proba- 
bly a prison where they put their prisoners, or captives ; but Jack 
was not put in this prison. He was led into the center of the 
open space, and all the savages gathered around, men, women 
and even small children, and bowed and got down on their knees 
and bent their heads in the dust and grunted and groaned and 
even howled, until Jack got sick of it all. He motioned to the 
chief, and by gesticulations gave him to understand that he 
wanted something to eat. He was conducted to a hut and given 
to understand that he was to consider it as belonging to him. 
It was well furnished with a good supply of skins, which seemed 
to be clean and in good condition, and Jack proceeded to make 
himself comfortable, giving Carlo one corner of it. His dinner 
was soon brought to him, consisting of oysters, turtle steaks and 
fish. They also brought an extra supply of turtle for the dog. 
They then retired and left him to himself. 

“Well Carlo,” said Jack. “What do you think of it all, old 
fellow ? It’s not so bad, is it ? ? I think these people have found 
out in some way that we’re monarchs, isn’t that it, old boy?” 

“I expect,” said Jack, “they think I’m some great lord from the 


Jack is Taken Prisoner by the Savages. 93 

sun, sent to them by their god, because I can make fire come out 
of a stick. Well, we must keep up the delusion.” 

The chief now advanced and made Jack to understand that he 
was to follow him. Jack went with him and found they had 
gathered material for a fire and it was all ready for lighting, and 
he motioned to Jack that he was to light it. Jack took in the 
situation at once, and determined to surround the affair with 
something like mystery. He bade them by gesticulating that they 
were to stand back, and after a space had been cleared for con- 
siderable distance around, Jack walked around the pile of wood 
several times, swinging his arms, and then proceeded to where 
he could see the sun in the west, held up the match in the air and 
bowed three times as if invoking the help of the great sun god. 
He then returned, struck the match and lit the fire, at which 
they all commenced their groaning and howling again. They 
followed him around afterward wherever he went prostrating 
themselves, until Jack got awful tired of it all. When suddenly 
it all ceased and Jack looked around for the cause, he saw that 
the chief had given a sign, and they were all silently withdrawing. 

“I’m much obliged to your high mightiness, for stopping that 
din,” said Jack. “I couldn’t stand much more of it.” Jack 
went back to his tent and, arranging the skins to suit him, lay 
down and gave himself up to thought. 

“I wonder how long this thing is going to last. I expect I’ll 
get awful tired of all this nonsense they go through. Then I 
wonder what will happen if I run out of matches. It’s lucky I 
happened to have a good supply when I was taken prisoner, but 
I guess I’ll have to quit smoking for the present and save my 
matches. I’d be in a bad fix if I should run out of them before 
I can escape. If I could only go with them when they go to 
worship, perhaps I could manage to give them the slip long 
enough to get a fresh supply from my tent. But there is time 
enough for that when I begin to run out of them. It’s a good 
thing that there are so many of them to cook, that they hardly 


94 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

ever let the fire go out clay or night, and so it will only be 
occasionally that they’ll want a new fire started.” 

The next morning after breakfast Jack concluded he would 
take a stroll and explore the island. He did not know whether 
he would be permitted to go about by himself or not, but de- 
termined to find out. He first went to a quiet spot on the beach 
and had a bath and swim. While swimming about in the water 
he perceived a couple of woolly heads peeping out from between 
the bushes ; so he supposed he was under surveillance, unless 
these two savages were merely prompted by curiosity to watch 
and see what such a strange being might do. He paid no atten- 
tion to them, however, but dressed himself, and calling Carlo, 
went on past the place where they were concealed towards the 
west end of the island, where there appeared quite a range of 
high hills. Ascending to the top of this range of hills, Jack 
stood for a long time looking out over the ocean. Part of the 
western slope of this range was covered with a heavy growth 
of timber. Jack finally continued his walk down through this 
timber towards the western shore. In passing in among the 
trees he found them thickly inhabited with a great variety of 
many beautiful birds of very bright plumage, and, also, several 
varieties of the monkey, many species of which Jack had never 
heard of. He noticed that the two savages were still following 
him, thought for what purpose, unless for curiosity, he could not 
tell. If they expected him to escape from that end of the island, 
without a boat, Jack would like to have them tell him how. In 
fact, Jack would hesitate to attempt to escape in one of their 
frail boats, unless the necessity was urgent. He thought per- 
haps he might conjure up some excuse to be permitted to build 
a raft, on which to effect his escape. It is true he might be able 
to escape to the island where he had built his hut, but to what 
purpose, only to be recaptured, and brought back, and perhaps 
be severely dealt with. 

He stood awhile on the beach at the foot of the hills, looking 


95 


Jack is Taken Prisoner by the Savages. 

out over the water. Many thoughts came to him as he re- 
membered what all that great body of water had done for him. 
He thought of the strange chain of circumstances that had 
brought him to his present position, and again his thoughts 
reverted to the future, and he wondered what the outcome of it 
all would be, and if indeed all these things in his life had been 
so ordered from the beginning, or were all mere chance happen- 
ings. He stood there a long time thinking the sad thoughts 
that would sometimes come ; then sighing deeply, he started to 
retrace his steps toward the village. Entering the village he 
passed through groups of women and children, who retreated 
backwards from him, bowing as they went. Even the smaller 
children that could hardly toddle were thus required to give him 
reverence. 

Passing further up the village street or lane, he entered into 
the open space in the center. Here a group of men were congre- 
gated, among them many of the chief ones, and were holding 
some sort of a confab. Merely from force of habit, Jack pulled 
out his watch, as he came up to them, to see the time of day. 
No sooner had he touched the spring and opened the case, than 
they all came crowding around him, showing much curiosity, 
but at the same time evidently under much stress of awe and 
fear. Then, as he held it to the ear of the nearest one to let him 
hear the mysterious ticking, he was surprised to see him retreat 
in great fear. He then held it to the ear of another with the same 
result ; then another, and another. There was none that could 
repress the curiosity to hear, but when once they heard the 
mysterio is sounds the little thing gave forth, they were so over- 
come that they retreated in great fear. And when Jack finally 
looked around to see what the trouble was, they were all con- 
cealed behind trees and peeping out from the doors of the huts, 
and wondering what was going to happen. Jack burst out 
laughing. 

“Well if you ain’t the biggest jays that ever I run up against.” 


9 6 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

Then he laughed again at the comical expression on their 
faces, made up of awe, fear and curiosity. 

After assuring them by all kinds of gestures that nothing was 
going to happen, and that no harm was intended, they came 
slowly forward and gathered around him. He then tried to ex- 
plain to them what the watch was for. He drew a large circle 
on the ground, and made them understand that was like the face 
of the watch. 

Then taking a stick in one hand, he pointed steadily at the sun 
with the other, until the attention of all was riveted upon it. 
Then pointing to the east, he slowing raised his arm up overhead 
and around to the west, at the same time moving the stick 
around the circle on the ground with the other. This he did 
several times, until one, more intelligent, perhaps, than the 
others, caught the idea. This he excitedly explained to the 
others, and soon they were all talking excitedly in their strange 
gibberish. They then regarded Jack with more awe and wonder- 
ment than ever, and surely thought him some great lord of the 
sun they worshipped. For these poor, deluded beings did not 
grasp the right idea at all. Instead of understanding that the 
watch was made to regulate the time made by the sun, they 
conceived the idea that the watch regulated the sun, which was 
run by its mysterious machinery. Jack let them think so when 
he found out how things were, and even opened up the works 
to them, and let them see all the little wheels and springs moving 
in such a wonderful manner. 

Jack left them and went to his tent, but, as for the savages, they 
had ample time to talk and think about it ; for here was some- 
thing new and strange in connection with their religion. And 
soon there was great excitement throughout the whole village, 
and for the rest of the day they stood about talking in excited 
groups. Jack saw the influence he had gained and determined 
to keep it, if possible, and to take advantage of every opportunity 
to advance it, and gain all the power over them he could; it 


97 


Jack is Taken Prisoner by the Savages, 

might stand him in good stead some day. Day after day passed, 
and Jack came to be regarded almost as a superior being. 
He called the people together one day in the center of the 
village, and performed many sleight of hand performances. 
Very simple these would be to civilized people, but most wonder- 
ful to these ignorant savages. 

In his intercourse with these people, he found that they were 
divided into twelve tribes. The great chief of all was elected by 
the whole people, assembled for that purpose. He held his posi- 
tion for life, unless he proved himself in some way to be un- 
worthy, when he was liable to impeachment. 

Each tribe also elected a chief of its own. These were the 
thirteen that did the worshipping at the other island. Their 
religion in some respects resembled that of civilized Christians, 
as Jack found out after he learned their language. They believed 
in a life hereafter, and that after death they went to live in their 
beautiful sun ; that this life was everlasting, and that only happi- 
ness and joy awaited them after death. But Jack had been with 
them many weeks before he found all this out. 

7 


9 8 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 


CHAPTER VIII. 

JACK FINDS NEDUE. 

Jack had been among the savages for about two months, and 
had learned their language, not only so that he could understand 
them, but he could also make himself undersood. He found it 
very simple, as it did not consist of such a great variety of words 
as languages of civilized nations. It was not necessary in the 
simple life they led ; although he did not enjoy his life among 
them, he did not find it altogether disagreeable. He still retained 
his power and influence among them, and they yet believed him 
some superior being sent to them by the great god of the sun. 

Carlo also seemed to be resigned to his fate, and had made 
many friends among the savages, especially among the children, 
with whom, at times, he loved to frolic. He allowed many 
familiarities from them when in the proper humor, but there 
were times when they seemed to learn by instinct not to bother 
him. Or if they should happen to forget, by a low warning growl 
he would soon remind them that he was on his dignity and not to 
be interfered with. Jack found it sometimes difficult to keep his 
power over the savages ; they expected impossibilities from him. 
Because there were certain things that he could do that were, 
to them, miraculous, they expected him to perform all kinds of 
miraculous things, and would sometimes make the most unheard 
of requests. One day one of them lost an arm by a shark while 
in the water, and after the stump had healed over, they wanted 
Jack to give the man a new arm. Jack could not tell them that 
he could not do it; that would never do. He called a council 
of the chiefs. Instead of the chiefs appearing alone he found the 


Jack Finds Nellie. 99 

whole village assembled, to see this wonderful performance, and 
they firmly believed that Jack could perform this miracle. 

When Jack arrived and saw the great throng assembled, and 
beheld the excitement under which they were laboring, he ad- 
vanced quietly and stood in their midst and looked around upon 
them, until all were hushed into absolute silence. 

“Mighty chieftain of a great people,” said he. “You ask me 
to perform a great thing. I think, when you ask me to perform 
this thing, you ask it in ignorance. In fact, you don’t stop to 
think what you ask. Has there been one of you, who has thought 
for a moment whether this thing would be agreeable to the great 
sun god, whom you worship ? Has any one asked this question 
of the great god of your fathers ?” He looked around, all were 
more or less abashed, some hung their heads. All except the 
great chief, who stood erect, and held his head up haughtily, and 
who now stepped forward and said: 

“We expect our brother from the sun to tell us these things, 
and not to ask us questions. We know not what the great god 
of the sun may want us to do. We want to hear what our 
brother can say.” 

“Yes, your brother can tell you these things, but you want to 
see to it that you believe him, and not make a lie of the god of 
your fathers. But,” he continued, “if you want me to tell 
you these things you must let me do it in my own way. I intend 
to ask questions, and I expect the great chief of this people to 
answer them. What is he that he should question the ways of 
his god?” 

Jack had been long enough among the savages to know that 
this audaciousness would probably help him. The old chief 
bowed his head but remained silent. 

“I ask my question again,” said Jack. “Have any of you 
asked the great god of the sun whether the thing would be 
agreeable to him?” They were all silent. 


Lcf C. 


IOO 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“If there should be any one and he has received an answer let 
him speak out.” All were still silent. 

“I ask this question because had there been any one who had 
received such an answer, it would have been in the negative, 
because this man would then have been an eyesore to the great 
god throughout all eternity. 

“I ask you another question. How long has this man to live? 
How many moons before his life goes out? Will he live so 
many moons, or so many more moons, or more mpons than 
any of his fathers ever lived before him? It matters not, for 
some time he will die, and join his fathers in the beautiful sun, 
and there he will live forever. Are the words that your brother 
has spoken, good?” 

The old chief bowed and announced : 

“Our brother has spoken words of goodness and wisdom.” 

“Well then, when he goes to join his fathers in the sun, he will 
be made a perfect man. His arm will be restored to him. Is 
it well spoken?” 

The old chief bowed. 

“Then I ask you, oh chief, what would he do with the extra 
arm that I should give him. It is true that it would be a help 
to him for the number of moons that he may continue to live 
here, and so I ask the great chief if it would be best for him to 
have this extra arm for the few moons that he may continue to 
live, and then go about forever and ever in the beautiful land of 
the sun, a monstrosity, an eyesore, a thing hateful to see ?” 

“No, no. That should not be,” said the chief. 

“No, no. That should not be,” they all repeated. 

Then they prostrated themselves before Jack, and said he 
had spoken well. And as Jack went back to his tent, he 
wondered if there would not come a time when he would be 
unable to extricate himself from some difficulty in which he 
would become involved. The time had come now when it was 
really necessary for Jack to replenish his supply of matches. 


IOI 


Jack Finds Nellie. 

He was nearly out of them, and he must get a fresh supply, or 
else acknowledge to the savages what a humbug he was. He had 
been to the other island on two different occasions, but had had 
no opportunity of paying a secret visit to the tent. He was 
satisfied that the savages were not aware that such a tent existed. 
They never went further into the island, than the extreme 
western part where they had set up their temple, and spent no 
more time than was actually necessary in conducting their serv- 
ices. One morning he asked the chief to call the council 
together, as he had something of importance to communicate. 
He walked in quietly among them after they were all seated 
around in a circle on the ground, and said : 

“Oh, mighty chief, and chieftains of a mighty people, behold 
before you, the brother sent to you by the great god of the sun. 
Behold him and know that he is different from his brothers of 
the island. His skin is white, he is clothed in different raiment, 
he has powers given him which you do not possess. He came 
from the great god in the sun to teach you many things. He 
has tried to perform his mission. 

“Has your brother spoken well ?” 

“You have spoken well,” said the chief. 

“But now the time has come when your brother must return to 
the god of the sun. Behold his clothes, they are in rags. He is a 
disgrace to the great god who sent him among you, his pride is 
hurt. When the great god sent him to you, he clothed him in rai- 
ment suitable for the great mission upon which he was sent, but 
now your brother is sad because of his rags. He holds his head 
down in shame. If he disgraces his calling for want of proper 
clothing it will greatly displease the great sun god. He will 
withdraw his favor from him, and your brother will go out in 
sadness and die in distress.” 

“What is it our brother wants?” asked the chief. 

“In the morning, while the moon still makes a shining path 
upon the waters, your brother would journey over the dark 


102 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

waves to meet the great god of the sun, as he comes up out of 
the sea.” 

“He will make known his wants, and the great god will give 
him what he wants. Then he will return to his brothers in glad- 
ness and joy, and mingle with them in council, and speak unto 
them good words.” 

“Can our brother from the sun accomplish this?” asked the 
chief. 

“The great god of the sun is all powerful,” said Jack. 

“Wonderful, wonderful,” said the chief. 

“And how long will my brother be gone ?” he continued. 

“’Till the sun sinks again in the west.” 

“Cannot my brother take one of the chiefs with him, that he 
may behold the glory of his presence ?” asked the chief. 

“The glory of his presence would strike my brother dead,” 
unhesitatingly, asserted Jack. 

“How can my brother make his wants known? Can he speak 
to the great god?” 

“Oh, mighty chief, your brother can speak to the great god in 
a language you know not of.” 

“Wonderful, wonderful,” said all the chiefs. 

“My brother shall take this journey to-morrow while the 
darkness still rests upon the waters, to meet the great sun god as 
he comes up out of the sea, but he must go alone. The dog 
must remain.” 

“Oh, mighty chief, can I not take the dog?” 

“No, the dog will remain, he does not need any clothes, and so 
could do my brother no good.” 

Jack had no especial reason for wishing to take the dog, only 
for company, for he fully expected to return. When he did at- 
tempt to escape, he wanted something better between him and 
the bottom of the sea, than one of their frail boats. All the rest 
of the day, Jack was a special mark of awe and reverence, for it 
was undoubtedly known throughout the village that he was to 


Jack Finds Nellie. 


103 


make a trip to the sun and return clothed in new garments. He 
started the next morning, about three hours before sunrise, and 
was really astonished to find how much excitement existed. 
Nearly the whole village had turned out to see him off. He had 
to tie Carlo to a tree before he started. The dog couldn’t under- 
stand how it was, that Jack could go off anywhere without him. 
Jack pushed off and got away with as little ceremony as possible, 
or he would undoubtedly have been treated with some of the 
ear-splitting music of the band, which Jack could see was very 
much in evidence. 

He rowed away over the ocean towards the east. In about 
three hours he reached the island, and going around to the south 
side, brought up at the nearest point to the cabin tent. After 
beaching his boat, he took off his clothes and had a swim. He 
then prepared and ate a hearty breakfast, which included the 
luxury of a cup of coffee, which he had not enjoyed for a long 
while. After giving himself a clean shave, he proceeded to dress 
himself in a new suit. He selected the most flashy suit he had, 
a “loud” check suit, with a dash of red in it. This, he thought, 
would best catch the savage eye. He then put on a bright blue 
tie, and new shoes and hat. He also put up a bundle to take 
with him, including some gauze underwear, socks, collars, shirts 
and a dozen handkerchiefs. He took, also, his shaving outfit, 
including the mirror. In changing the things from the pockets 
of the old to the new suit, he noticed he had selected the suit 
which contained the eye glasses in one of the pockets. These he 
put back in his pocket, as he thought they might help him some 
way to bamboozle the savages. Then taking a good supply of 
matches, he got into the boat and shoved off. He rowed around 
the east end of the island ; the thought struck him that he might 
have been followed by some of the savages, and he could thus 
better avoid them until he was ready to meet them. He had 
rounded the point at the east end, and was proceeding very 
leisurely along the north shore, when his eye caught something 


ioa Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

afloat, away off towards the horizon. His first thought was that 
this was a boat containing some of the wily savages, and had 
lost track of him in the darkness. He lay upon his oars and 
watched this object for some time. He knew they could not see 
him at that distance with the island immediately behind him. 
He was finally satisfied that the object, whatever it was, was not 
propelled by any human force, but was only being beaten about 
by the waves. 

“It’s probably only a piece of drift wood,” said Jack, “but still, 
we’ll get a little nearer and investigate.” 

As he approached nearer he saw that the object took the form 
of a boat. Coming still nearer, he saw that it was a ship’s boat 
of good proportions. 

“Ah Jack, my boy,” said he. “That’s just what you want 
when you make your escape.” 

He did not think there Was any one in it, until he came along 
side. He then found it contained a boy and a girl ; both were 
apparently dead at first glance. The girl was very beautiful, 
evidently about eighteen years of age. The boy was a mere lad 
in his early teens. The girl lay at full length in the bottom of 
the boat, her head resting upon some clothing formed into a 
bundle. The boy lay in the bow, with his head resting upon his 
arm for a pillow. Jack’s first attention was to the girl. 
She was not dead, for he found her heart beating strongly ; she 
had probably only fainted. But the boy he found was dead 
beyond all doubt. 

“Poor lad,” said Jack, “you’ve met a sad fate. I wonder if 
they are brother and sister; I ought to bury the poor fellow 
before she comes to. Then she won’t have to see him let down 
into the sea. It will be less hard maybe when she knows it’s all 
over.” 

“Poor fellow,” he said again. “We will give you a sailor’s 
burial, and let you down into the sea.” 

After he had disposed of the boy’s body, Jack gave his atten- 


Jack Finds Nellie. 105 

tion to the girl. He soon succeeded in reviving her, for, as he 
thought, she had only fainted. Upon regaining consciousness, 
she looked up into Jack’s face, and perceiving a stranger, she 
started up in bewilderment. 

“Where am I ?” she said. 

“You’re in good hands,” said Jack, gently. 

She looked around upon the water, then perceiving another 
boat alongside, she seemed to comprehend. Then she looked 
toward where the young lad had been. 

And Jack said, again, gently. “He was past help, and I had 
to bury him.” 

“Yes, I know,” she said. “He died this morning, poor boy, he 
was very good to me.” 

“How long have you been afloat ?” asked he. 

“The marks are on the side of the boat ; we commenced keep- 
ing an account of the days so. The last mark was made by poor 
Harry just before he died. 

“ ‘That’s the last mark I’ll ever be able to make, Miss Nellie’ 
said he, and in an hour he was dead.” 

Jack looked and counted eight marks. 

“So you’ve been afloat eight days,” said he. 

“And how did you live?” 

“Our water gave out day before yesterday, and our food 
yesterday,” said she. 

“I know,” she continued, “that poor Harry gave me the most 
of it, and so starved himself. He always persisted that he wasn’t 
hungry, or had had plenty, when I knew that he had scarcely 
touched anything at all,” she continued, the tears coming into 
her eyes. 

“Poor Harry,” said Jack. “He was a noble fellow, and de- 
served a kinder fate.” 

“But,” he continued. “We must not stay here while you are 
starving.” 

And tying the painter of the canoe to the stern of the boat, 


io 6 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

Jack seized the oars and pulled lustily for the shore. He rounded 
the island and beached the boat at the nearest point to the tent. 
As the boat landed and Jack jumped out, he said : 

“Now, Miss Nellie, for I have learned that that is your name, 
you will have to trust yourself to me,” he said. 

The beautiful brown eyes were raised an instant, and looked 
square into the honest gray ones. She did not answer, but 
simply held out her hand to be helped out of the boat. 

Jack took her into the tent and made her lie down. He then 
took the bucket and went to the spring and filled it with the 
cool clear water. He gave her some of this to drink, but not 
too much. He raked together the fire and put on'the coffee pot 
again. After looking over his stores, he concluded that some 
soup would probably be best for her at first ; so he opened a can, 
and prepared it according to the directions. He also opened a 
fresh can of meat, and a can of peaches. When all was ready, 
he arranged some boxes around her, and brought her first a 
bowl of soup. He then brought in the other things and arranged 
them on the boxes, together with some biscuit, sugar, salt and 
pepper. 

“I know you will feel better after you have eaten what you can 
of these things,” he said. “It is the best that I can do on short 
notice. The coffee will give you strength after you have 
swallowed it, although I cannot give you cream in it, which is 
perhaps what you have been used to.” 

“I have been used to pretty hard fare of late, I assure you, 
Mr. — ” 

“Jack,” said he, “it’s the only name I have here; so you’ll 
have to call me that, or nothing, I suppose.” 

“Well, your nice breakfast smells savory,” said she, “and I 
have no doubt will taste much better. And I’m nearly starved, so 
that you mustn’t be surprised at the quantity that I can con- 
sume,” she continued. 


Jack Finds Nellie. 107 

“You go ahead and eat all you want, and there’s plenty more ; 
so don’t be afraid of it,” said he. 

“But aren’t you going to have any?” asked she. 

“I just had my breakfast, before I found your boat, and I’m 
hardly prepared for another meal so soon, but I’ll be glad to 
take dinner with your ladyship, if you will have me,” said he. 

There was unbroken silence for the next few minutes. Nellie 
was of a good, sound constitution, and was very hungry, and ate 
ravenously. Jack went out, that he might not embarrass her, 
for he knew that she was nearly starved. He wandered down 
to the shore, and succeeded in catching a small turtle, which he 
brought back and put into an empty box. 

“Had enough breakfast?” asked Jack, as he looked into the 
doorway. 

“Oh, plenty, thank you, and a real nice breakfast too. But 
where did you get all these things from?” asked she. 

“On board ship/’ said Jack. “You see I was shipwrecked 
too.” 

“But how did you get away with so many things ?” 

“On a raft,” said Jack. 

“Oh, you made a raft, and were there no boats?” 

“Nope; boats all gone, filled with the passengers and crew. 
Nobody left on board but Carlo and myself.” 

“And who’s Carlo?” asked she. 

“He’s my dog, about the only friend I have left in the world, 
I expect.” 

She raised her eyes, and regarded him earnestly a moment. 

“You’ve seen trouble too,” she said. 

“Yes, I’ve dipped pretty deep into it,” said he. “Sometime I 
would like to tell you all about it. But I don’t like to talk about 

it yet. I do not even like to think of it when I can help it. 

But there is one thing I will tell you. I’ve been in prison, I’m 
an escaped jail-bird, as I suppose most people would call me. 
But there is one thing I want you to believe. You must believe, 


108 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

that is, that I was not put there for anything that I had done, 
either intentionally or unintentionally.” 

She again raised her eyes and looked at him long and intently. 

“I’m sure you weren’t,” she replied, simply. 

“Are you, Miss Nellie? Thank you,” he said, taking off his 
hat to her. “I believe those are the sweetest words that I ever 
heard spoken by human life,” he continued. 

“Sometime,” he continued, “I will tell you all about it.” 

“But where is this dog of yours? I haven’t seen him around.” 

“I left him this morning, before sun up, with a band of 
savages.” 

“Savages !” she said, looking around apprehensively. 

“Yes,” said Jack, laughing. “I’ve been living with the savages 
for the past two months or more.” 

“Where, on this island?” she asked — again looking around and 
turning slightly pale. 

“No, not here,” said Jack, smiling. “On another island, about, 
I should judge, ten miles off to the west.” 

“And did you escape from them?” 

“No, not exactly. I’ll tell you how it is.” And lying down 
on the beach close to where she was sitting, for they had come 
out of the tent, when they commenced to talk, and Jack had 
brought a box for her to sit upon, he related all that had happen- 
ed to him since he left the wreck on a raft. How he first landed 
here and built the cabin tent ; his first discovery of the savages, 
and their mode of worship, how he was taken prisoner, his 
present influence among them, and how he happened tc be at 
this time on this island. 

“And you must return to-night?” said she. 

“Yes, I promised to be back by sundown, and to keep my 
reputation among them, I must keep my promise.” 

“But why not escape now, in the boat that you found me in ?” 
asked she. 

“I’ve thought of that,” said he, “and we might possibly sue- 


Jack Finds Nellie. 109 

ceed, but to tell the truth I could not leave my dog thus in the 
lurch. You probably cannot understand why I’m willing to risk 
so much simply for a dog. But that is because you cannot 
understand what we’ve been to one another, and how faithfully 
he has stood by me at all times. I think if I should desert him 
now, I could not help but imagine the sad reproof that I would 
see in his eyes all the rest of my life.” 

“I see,” said Nellie. “You certainly prove a staunch friend, 
where you give your friendship.” 

“Well, Miss Nellie, I hope I may prove just as staunch a 
friend to you, if you will permit me,” said Jack. 

“I’m sure,” said she, blushing slightly* “that I haven’t so many 
real true friends, that I can afford an offer, both so generous and 
kind. 

“But what is to become of me, then, when you go back to the 
savages?” asked Nellie. 

“You might possibly stay here unmolested, until I could find 
an opportunity to come for you,” said he, thoughtfully. But 
Nellie shook her head. “All alone?” said she. “I don’t believe 
I could hardly do that; I would be imagining all kinds of 
horrors.” 

“I do not myself, believe that that is the best plan,” said Jack. 

“What, then, do you propose?” asked she. 

“That you go with me,” said he. 

“To the savages?” 

“Yes, I think that is best,” said Jg^k. “There is not the least 
danger to you; you will be perfectly safe. When I tell them 
that you are my sister, and returned with me from the sun, they 
will be willing to worship you.” 

“But when they see the boat, will they not doubt your story?” 
asked she. 

“But I don’t intend they shall see this boat,” replied Jack, “or 
know anything about it. And when I return to the savages, the 
only boat they will see, will be the boat I took away with me.” 


no Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“Then what will you do with the boat?” asked she. 

‘Til hide it here among the rocks, until the time comes when 
we can get away,” said he. 

Both were silent for some time. 

“I really don’t see any other way,” finally, said Nellie. 

“You must trust me implicitly, Miss Nellie, and believe that I 
would not do anything that would bring you into danger. At 
least, there is no present danger. Of course, I can’t look into the 
future. If these people should find out what a humbug I am, I 
really don’t know what would happen. But rest assured of one 
thing, that in any or in all cases, your safety shall be my first 
consideration, even to the giving up of my life, if necessary.” 
said Jack, earnestly. 

“I’ll trust you in this, as in all other things,” said Nellie. 

“Thank you,” said Jack. “And now, there is one other thing,” 
said Jack. “Let us be perfectly free and frank in our intercourse 
with each other, and drop all formalities. And while we’re here 
on these islands let us consider ourselves, simply as brother and 
sister; I’ll be your brother Jack and you’ll be my little sister 
Nellie. And right proud am I of my little sister,” continued he, 
taking off his hat. 

“All right — Jack,” said Nellie, with a pretty blush. “I’ll 
consider you my big brother, and tell you all my troubles.” 

“I see one thing, Nellie,” said Jack. “You’re a nice, sensible 
girl. Now, we’ll have some dinner, and then we must take our 
departure,” continued he. 

“But you must let me get the dinner,” said Nellie. 

“Can you make turtle soup?” asked he. 

“Of course, didn’t you know that I was a graduate of a cook- 
ing school,” asked she, looking at him comically. 

“All right,” said Jack, smiling in return. 

“I submit, and run the awful risk of eating the cooking done 
by a graduate of a cooking school. But I’ll make the fire and 
bring the water and wait for further orders,” continued he. 


Jack Finds Nellie. 


1 1 1 


“Let me see,” said she, “if I can remember the recipe for 
making turtle soup. First catch the turtle — then — ,” 

“Oh, but you see, the turtle is caught. I did that while you 
were enjoying your breakfast,” said he. 

“Well then, I’ll let you cut it up into small pieces, and remove 
the bones.” 

“All right,” said he. 

Nellie in the meantime had put the water on to boil, and sat 
watching Jack cut up the turtle, which, after cleaning thoroughly, 
she dropped into the boiling water. 

“How long do you let it cook, Nellie?” asked Jack. 

“Oh, it depends upon the turtle ; some take longer than others. 
You must cook it until the meat is tender,” said she. 

“That’s what I told Carlo,” said Jack. 

“And did Carlo undersand?” asked she. 

“Understand, I should say yes. You don’t know what long 
and numerous conversations Carlo and I used to have 
together.” 

“And would you understand him?” asked she, smiling. 

“Of course,” said he. “His eyes speak volumes, and then he 
emphasizes everything with his tail.” 

“With his tail?” asked she. 

“Yes, by thumping his tail. I accused him once of swearing 
that way. Just a little swear word, you know, that men some- 
times use when plain language is not emphatic enough. I told 
# him if that was what he meant, he mustn’t do it, or he wouldn’t 
go to the dog heaven when he died.” 

Nellie’s laugh rang out so clear and sweet and full, that it did 
Jack’s heart good to hear it. 

“You must have been great friends,” said she. 

“Indeed we were. You see we were sort of orphans, as it 
were, thrown onto the world together, and had a kind of fellow 
feeling for each other.” 

“You mean a-bird-of-a-feather kind of feeling,” said she. 


1 12 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“Well yes, or rather it was more of a-no-one-cares-for-me, 
and I-care-for-no-one-sort of a feeling.” 

“Poor Carlo must miss you,” said she. 

“Yes, I expect the poor fellow thinks that I have deserted 
him.” 

When the soup was done, Nellie put the coffee on the coals, 
and Jack went in and brought out and opened a can of corn, 
which he put into the skillet to warm. Then he brought out some 
biscuit and peaches, and, also plenty of dishes, and a couple of 
bowls and knives and forks and spoons. 

“You seem to be well provided with everything for a Robin- 
son Crusoe,” said she. 

“Well, you see, I had read of Robinson Crusoes before, who 
landed on desert islands without anything to do with, and what 
a hard time they had; so I was determined to come as well 
supplied as possible. Then, you see,” he continued, “I had 
a better opportunity than most Robinson Crusoes, for I had a 
whole ship-load to select from. The only trouble was to choose 
the things that I would most likely need.” 

After dinner Jack went down to the boat and brought up six 
bundles of women’s clothing. 

“Oh, they’re not all mine,” said Nellie. 

“Nevertheless, I think you had better lay claim to anything 
in the clothing line that you can get hold of,” said he. 

“You see,” he continued. “You might need them badly 
before you ever see civilization again.” 

“But I don’t really like to wear those poor dead women’s 
things.” 

“I know, Nellie, just how you feel, and you needn’t wear them 
unless necessity compels you. You can wear your own things 
first, and keep these in case of emergency. I am only going to 
put them in the hut here, and, when we manage our escape, we 
can take them with us, only to be used when you are compelled 
to. When we join the savages you need only take your 


Jack Finds Nellie. 113 

own things, or as many of them as you think you may need for 
a few weeks, and if you will put these up into a bundle we will 
soon be ready to start.” 

“All right, whatever you think is best,” said she. 

“Now, Nellie, it will be best for you to make the best im- 
pression possible, when you first appear before these savages. 
I would advise you to put on the brightest colored dress that 
you may happen to have. You see, colors go a long way in 
the savage eye. Have you noticed the loud suit I have selected? 
I only wish I could dress myself in scarlet, embossed with gold 
braid or covered with tinsel. It would delight their ignorant 
hearts beyond anything conceivable.” 

“I don't know as I have anything so very gay,” said Nellie. 
“But I’ll do the best I can.” 

“Well, I’ll go and find a good place to hide the boat, and 
leave the hut for your accommodation,” said he. 

Jack got in the boat and rowed along the shore, looking for 
a place suitable for his purpose. He finally found what he 
wanted in a little cove, between two large rocks, projecting over 
the sides and nearly meeting at the top. Running the boat into 
this safe little harbor, and making it fast, he was satisfied that it 
would be there when he wanted it. As he approached the hut, 
Nellie stepped out of the door, attired very prettily in a dress 
made of bright blue material. 

“Will I do — Jack?” she asked, flushing prettily. 

“Do? I should say so. You’re just — nice,” although he 
was going to say stunning, but thought better of it. “Now, if 
you only had a bright red ribbon tied around your neck, with 
a large red bow in front, you’d captivate the savage eye.” 

“Oh, Jack, I could hardly stand red with this dress,” said 
she. 

“It might kind of look to them like the sun setting in a blue 
sky,” said Jack, laughing. 

“Here,” she said, “I’ll put on this pretty yellow ribbon. That 


1 14 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

may look to them like the yellow streaks in the sky after the 
sun has gone down,” she continued, laughing. 

“That will do,” said Jack. “Now, Nellie, if you have your 
things ready that you want to take, we’ll take our departure.” 

“But I see,” he continued, “you have some of your things 
wrapped in newspapers. I wish you’d please find something else 
to wrap them in, and let me have those papers. It’s been so 
long since I saw a newspaper that I hardly know anything.” 

“You’re welcome to the papers, Jack. But I’m afraid you’ll 
find them rather stale news.” 

“It will be new news to be though,” said he. 

And taking the three papers she handed him, he folded them 
up, and put them in his pocket. Nellie wrapped her things up 
in some pieces of dress goods, and tied them neatly with string. 
Jack took these bundles down, and put them in the canoe. He 
then went into the hut and made everything as compact, and as 
easy to handle as possible. He could not tell how much time 
he might have for loading up, when they arrived after effecting 
their escape, and so thought it best to take time now, that might 
be very valuable to them then. 

After Jack got everything fixed to his satisfaction, he closed 
and fastened the door as well as he could from the outside. 
Then he happened to think that he hadn’t marked the day of the 
month that morning, so he took out the almanac, and put the 
little pin prick over the number that designated the day. 

“This is the fourteenth of September, Nellie,” said he. 

“Do you keep a record of time?” asked she. 

“Yes, I like to know what day of the month it is, and try to 
keep it correctly, and fully believe that I have done so.” 

“Now, I think we’re all ready,” he continued. “It’s just three 
o’clock, so we’ll have time to spare, and can take it leisurely.” 

Jack handed Nellie into the canoe, and making her comforta- 
ble in the stern, he took up the oars and began the return trip 
to the savages. 


ll 5 


Jack Finds Nellie. 

“You haven’t told me anything about your shipwreck,” said 
Jack, “and how you come to be alone in the boat with Harry, 
I believe you called him.” 

“Yes, poor Harry,” said she. “My heart fairly aches every 
time I think of him.” 

“Was he your brother?” asked Jack. 

“No, he was one of the ship’s passengers, going out to 
Australia, to see if he couldn’t better his condition, for he was 
not strong. His lungs were affected somewhat, and he thought 
perhaps it would be better for him out there. And having a 
good offer from a reliable firm there, he thought it would be 
better all around.” 

“You must have started with a boat full, when the wreck 
happened,” said Jack. 

“Yes, there were fifteen of us altogether. All women, except 
Harry and four sailors, who rowed the boat. The women began 
to die the second day and went off two and three each day. I 
think it was the heat and exposure, which none of us were used 
to. Then the men had smuggled a cask of liquor aboard before 
starting, and soon got to drinking that, and were drunk most 
of the time. One fell overboard, and another went to save him, 
and both were drowned. Then the next day the other two died, 
just drank themselves to death. Then poor Harry and I were 
alone. The food was nearly gone, and he was starving, yet 
forcing the food upon me, and when I refused he pretended 
to eat, yet afterward I would know it was all pretension, and 
that he had hardly touched a bite of it.” 

“He was a noble lad,” said Jack. 

“And then you came, you know,” said she. 

“Yes, I came to rescue you from one danger, only to take you 
into another,” said Jack. “My poor little sister is certainly 
being tried very hard, but she bears up bravely under all her 
troubles, and I can only hope that she may come out all right 


ii 6 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

at last. But Nellie,” he continued, “were you traveling alone; 
was there no one aboard the ship that belonged to you ?” 

“Yes, I was with an aunt, dear Aunt Amelia; I wonder if she 
was saved. You see, we became separated during the confusion, 
and she was put into one boat, and I into another, and during 
the first night the boats became separated.” 

“And so you were on your way to Australia ; is that your 
home? But,” he continued, “if I sak any questions that I 
ought not, you must snub me, Nellie.” 

“No, I want to tell you all about it. You see, I live in New 
York with papa, my last name is Robinson, and my Aunt 
Amelia is papa’s sister. She had paid us a long visit, and I was 
returning with her to her home in Australia, when the wreck 
happened.” 

“And your mother, Nellie?” 

“Mamma died when I was about ten years of age.” 

“And your father is worried to death about you, probably, 
for I suppose he has heard of the wreck by this time.” 

“Poor papa, I wish I could let him know that I was alive and 
safe so far.” 

“And your aunt, too, I suppose is a good deal worried about 
you ?” 

“Yes, if she herself escaped,” said Nellie. 

They were silent a long time. Jack rowed mechanically while 
occupied with his own thoughts, and Nellie sat looking out over 
the water. 

They reached their destination a little before sundown. The 
bank was lined with savages, evidently awaiting Jack’s return, 
and undoubtedly very much surprised to find that he brought 
a companion back with him. Jack heard Carlo’s joyful 
bark before he reached the shore, and turned to speak to him. 

“Hello, old boy. Did you think I had deserted you, and had 
gone for good? Did you miss me, old fellow?” he continued, 


Jack Finds Nellie. 117 

as he stepped out of the boat. Carlo answered with short joyful 
barks, glistening eyes and wagging tail. 

“Well, my brother has returned,” said the chief, coming for- 
ward, “and clothed in new raiment. All has been done as my 
brother promised, and so we know he has come from the great 
god of the sun. But my brother comes not alone, with him is a 
white spirit, who is as beautiful as the shining night.” 

“Your brother has things to tell of the great god of the sun, 
but this is not a befitting place. Let the great chief gather the 
chieftains, and, in council assembled, your brother will explain 
the coming of the white spirit, who is as beautiful as the shining 
night.” 

Jack was the recipient of much admiration, and Nellie of much 
wonder, as they followed the chief up through the forest to the 
village, preceded by the village band with its nerve racking 
music. 

“Oh, Jack,” whispered Nellie, “I feel awful nervous. I’m afraid 
of these horrid looking people.” 

“Don’t be afraid, Nellie,” said Jack. “It’s all right, and, when 
I get through talking to them, they’ll do anything for you.” 

Carlo made up with Nellie at once, and she encouraged his 
advances, and, by the time they reached the village, they were 
very good friends. 

The chief had hastily called a meeting of the chieftains, and 
all were assembled in the open space in the center of the village 
when Jack arrived. The savages had brought up the things out 
of the canoe, and placed them at the entrance to Jack’s hut. 

Jack picked up the mirror and wrapped it in one of the news- 
papers that Nellie had given him. Taking it with him, he led 
Nellie into the center of the assembled chiefs, and said: 

“Oh, mighty chief, and chieftains of a mighty people. Your 
brother yesterday stood before you in rags. He was ashamed 
because he was a disgrace to the great god of the sun, who sent 
him to you. He called your attention to his condition, and 


1 1 8 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

asked permission to return to the god of the sun from whom he 
came, that he might receive from him proper raiment and thus 
be clothed in a befitting manner. Your brother was permitted 
to go out over the dark waters, to meet the god of the sun, as 
he came up out of the sea. Your brother went away, was 
clothed anew, and has returned. Has you brother spoken 
well ?” 

“Our brother has spoken well,” said the chief, and all the 
chieftains bowed assent. 

“When your brother met the great god of the sun as he came 
up out of the sea, and he had listened to your brother’s wants, 
and had clothed your brother anew, he asks many questions of 
your brother about the people here. 

“And after asking about your needs, and what was most neces- 
sary to your happiness and prosperity, he asked what kind of a 
people you were, whether you were of a cruel disposition, or, 
instead, whether you were kind in spirit, and of tender heart. 
For, he said, they are my people, and I would do them good, but 
they should be kind and gentle in spirit if I should help them. 
For I would send to them, one of my gentle ones, my beauti- 
ful white spirit. One that never knew harsh treatment, and 
she must be treated kindly.” 

“Your brother answered that you were a kind people, and 
dealt gently and not harshly, and that if the great god of the 
sun should send his gentle white spirit to you, to do you good, 
you would be kind to her. Did your brother speak words of 
wisdom ?” 

“Our brother spoke both wisely and well,” answered the great 
chief. 

Then Jack, taking Nellie by the hand, led her forward. She 
came timidly, blushing, but looking very pretty in her sweet, 
girlish grace. 

“Then, my brothers, behold the beautiful white spirit, the great 
god of the sun has sent you. She is as beautiful as the shining 


Jack Finds Nellie. 119 

night, as my brother has well said. Dressed in the bright blue 
of the sky, she stands before you, pleading for kindness and 
gentleness. Has your brother spoken well?’” 

The great chief, drawing himself up, and standing erect, 
proudly answered: 

“The great chief of this people, and the chieftains of the tribes, 
have harkened unto our brother’s words, and he has spoken 
well. The white spirit, clothed in the blue of the sky, who is as 
beautiful as the shining night, is welcome among us. She will 
receive kind treatment by gentle hands. Is our brother 
satisfied?” 

“Your brother is satisfied. But your brother listened again 
while the great god of the sun spoke, and these were the words 
he spoke : I will know if she be treated kindly for I can see 
from afar off. I have many eyes by which I can see all things. 
And to show this people that I can see all that may be done in 
their land, I here give into your hand one of these many eyes, 
that you may show to them how I can look down upon them 
at any, and all times. I will now show you how your god can 
look at you.” 

And unwrapping the mirror, Jack approached the chief and 
held the glass in front of his face. 

“Oh, mighty chief, behold your god looking at you.” 

Down he went on his knees, and promised all that the great 
god required of him. 

Jack took the glass from one to the other and showed each 
one how the great god of the sun could see them with his 
powerful eye. 

And each went down on his knees in turn, until they were all 
grovelling in the dirt. Jack could hardly keep from bursting 
out laughing, but he managed to control himself. 

Finally, they all gathered around Jack and Nellie, exclaiming, 

“Wonderful, wonderful, great is our god, great is our brother, 
the lord of the sun, great is our sister, the beautiful white spirit, 


120 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

clothed in the blue of the sky and beautiful as the shining night/’ 
And they promised faithfully to do everything the great god re- 
quired of them. 

Nellie was given into the charge of two women, who pro- 
vided for all her wants and saw that she was made comfortable. 
The hut that had been provided for her adjoined the one oc- 
cupied by Jack. And Jack had insisted on a thorough cleansing 
of the interior. All the old bedding was taken out, and the 
place thoroughly renovated. Then fresh leaves and sedge grass 
were brought in in abundance, sufficient for a soft comfortable 
bed, over which was spread plenty of clean, fresh rugs. Then 
Jack brought in all her belongings, which she arranged to suit 
her girlish fancy. The women then brought them an abundant 
supply of food, consisting of fish and oysters made into a sort of 
stew, and, also some turtle steaks for the dog. This they ate 
on a little grass plot between the two huts, sitting on mats. 

“Nellie,” said Jack, “these people seem to know a little 
about cooking. This stuff now isn’t half bad, considering it is 
prepared by people — well — say people who have never attended 
a cooking school, for instance.” 

“Now, you needn’t make fun of my cooking school science, 
Jack.” 

“Not at all, Nellie, I was only astonished at how some people 
could cook without that science,” said Jack, slyly. 

“Well, they’re treating us very nicely so far.” 

“Yes, I only hope there’ll be no worse to come,” said Jack. 

“You seem to understand their language very well. What 
was all that you were telling them a while ago ?” asked she. 

“Oh, I was lauding you to the skies, and making them believe 
all manner of things. How you had been sent to them by the 
great sun god, and how carefully you had been nurtured in that 
great realm of light, and how important it was to treat you with 
all kindness, for their great god would allow nothing else.” 

Nellie looked at Jack, and her face flushed a little. 


1 2 1 


Jack Finds Nellie. 

“And what were you doing with the looking-glass ?” 

“Oh, that,” laughed Jack. “Did you see them groveling in 
the dirt? That was the best joke of all. I made them believe 
that that was the eye of their great god, and, by showing them 
their reflection in it, made them to understand how their great 
god, with his wonderful eye, could see them at all times, and 
could thus tell just how they behaved toward you.” 

Nellie, after a thoughtful silence, said, “Jack, do you know 
that you have a wonderful aptitude for adapting yourself to 
circumstances ?” 

“Thanks, I always try to make the best of whatever circum- 
stances I happen to be#placed in, especially when it’s a case of 
have to. But, seriously, Nellie, I think you are perfectly safe 
for the present and have nothing to fear from them,” said 
Jack. “They are ready to fall down and worship you,” he 
continued, “whom they call the white spirit, clothed in the blue 
of the sky, and beautiful as the shining night.” 

Nellie again flushed prettily, as she glanced a moment at 
Jack before dropping her eyes. 

“Well,” she said, “I suppose it’s nice to be thought well of, 
even by savages, but I care very little for their opinion, if only 
no harm comes to us.” 

“I don’t think any harm can come to us unless something 
new turns up. If these people should ever find out what a 
fraud I am, I really do not know .what would happen. You 
see, I have never yet seen them in a state of enmity, and know 
not how they would act against a real enemy, or one whom they 
might conceive to be an enemy. They, from the first, thought 
that I was some great lord of the sun, and so it is but natural 
that they should treat such a one with great consideration ; but 
let them once find out what a mistake they have made, and, as 
I say, I really don’t know what would happen.” 

“Well, I hope we may be able to keep them in ignorance,” 
said she. 


122 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“Yes, that is our only chance, until we can manage to escape. 
Of course, if the worst comes, I can kill a few of them with my 
revolver, but that must be a last resource, for it would only 
make our condition worse, if I should attempt anything of that 
kind.” 

“It’s a wonder that they have not taken your revolver away 
from you,” said she. 

“I don’t believe they know I’ve got it,” said he. “I really 
do not know whether they would know what it is if they should 
see it, unless I should explain it to them. You see, they never 
attempted to search me ; that would be ill treatment for such 
an important personage as I am supposed to be. And I have 
always regarded my revolver as a thing to be used only as a 
last resource. And if they should attempt my life I would, at 
least, have the satisfaction of sending as many of them as pos- 
sible to their happy hunting grounds first. But, Nellie,” con- 
tinued Jack, “I don’t anticipate any trouble, and I think we 
can keep up this delusion until we can find an opportunity 
to escape.” 

“Is there any danger of their understanding us when we 
talk?” asked she. 

“Not the least,” said Jack, “they can’t understand a word, 
and think the language we use is that spoken in the land of 
the sun.” 

They had been sitting there between the huts talking long 
after the women had cleared away the remains of their supper. 
Now Jack rose and said it was time for her to retire. “Poor 
little girl,” he said, as he took her hand to bid her good-night, 
“you have been through a good deal to-day, and have stood 
up under it all very bravely. Continue to be brave, little sister, 
and we’ll try and find a way out of it all.” 

“Yes, it seems a long while since morning,” she said, sadly, 
“but I know you are doing all you can for me, Jack,” she con- 
tinued, kindly. 


123 


Jack Finds Nellie. 

“Well, good-night, Nellie. Remember, as I told you, your 
welfare shall always be my first consideration. By the way, 
take Carlo with you ; not that I think there is the least danger, 
but probably you will feel safer with such a staunch friend as 
he would prove.” 

“Good-night, Jack. Yes, -I should feel safer with Carlo, thank 
you.” 

The days passed by in weary monotony. Jack and Nellie 
grew very tired of their life among the savages. They had 
roamed over the island hand in hand, like two children, and 
taken in all that there was to see, and then grew weary of it 
all, notwithstanding that they were still considered guests of 
honor. They were even permitted the use of the boats, and 
often spent the early evenings in paddling about the island, 
sometimes making the complete circuit. 

After they had been with this people about two weeks, Jack 
began to wonder if they would not be permitted to leave if 
they felt inclined, and one day he broached the subject to the old 
chief, who very positively shook his head in the negative. 

Nellie made many friends among these savages, more espe- 
cially among the women and children. Of course she could 
not hold any conversation with them, but they could frequently 
make each other understand by gestures. She taught them 
how to cook many new dishes, which she could easily do by 
simply taking the ingredients and showing them how they 
should be prepared. 

The children she taught many new games, and often took 
part in them herself, and so won their hearts. She helped the 
mothers with their ailing ones during sickness, and the aged 
loved her for her kindly ways and gentle manners. 

But all this was soon to change. Jack, for some time, had 
noticed a coolness springing up among the chief and chieftains 
toward him, and, quick to notice any change which so much 
depended upon, sought for a cause. It was brought out one 


124 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

day in conversation with the chief himself. It seemed that 
soon after Nellie’s arrival, during their worship one day, they 
had asked their god to give them some sign concerning Jack 
and Nellie, and they had been waiting all this time for a sign, 
which, of course, Jack knew they would never receive. This 
immediately opened his eyes to the danger they were in. He 
determined to know the worst, and broached the subject boldly. 

“How long do you expect to wait for this sign?” he asked 
the chief. 

“We will wait long enough to be certain that the god of 
the sun will give no sign.” 

“Then what?” asked Jack. 

“Then my brother will have deceived us,” said the old chief. 

“And if you make up your minds that your brother has 
deceived you?” asked Jack. 

“Then my brother must be punished.” 

“But how?” asked Jack. 

“In any manner that a council may determine.” 

“And the White Spirit?” asked Jack. 

“She will have shared in the same deception, and must bear 
the same punishment,” said the chief. 

“Is there any particular sign that you asked for or expect?” 
asked Jack. 

“No, only some sure sign that cannot be misunderstood. 
We go again in two days to our temple and expect this sign 
to be given us, if the great god intends to give us a sign,” 
said the chief. “And why shouldn’t he give us a sign?” he 
continued. “If my brother is all he says he is, and comes from 
the great god, the great god ought to make it known to us.” 

“And what do you think the council would decide as to the 
punishment?” asked Jack. 

“To be plain with my brother, the council has already de- 
cided in secret session,” 


125 


Jack Finds Nellie. 

“And that decision ?” asked Jack. 

“Is death,” said the chief. 

“And the White Spirit?” asked Jack. 

“She must die too,” said the chief. 

“My heavens,” said Jack, “do you mean you are going to take 
our lives if the sun doesn’t perform some strange miracle ; and 
aren’t you afraid of the consequences?” continued he sternly. 
“Aren’t you afraid of your god’s vengeance? Don’t you know 
he’d smite every mother’s son of you and sweep your island 
out of the sea for doing such a dastardly deed?” still continued 
he, trying to bluff. 

But the old chief shook his head. “There is no danger,” 
said he, “if my brother did not come from him.” 

“Has not your brother given you ample proof that he did 
come from him?” asked Jack. 

“My brother has done all he could to make us believe, but 
we want evidence from the sun god himself.” 

“Well,” said Jack, as he turned away, “you’ll get evidence 
enough, in a way that you won’t like, if you don’t drop this 
subject. What, do you think the great god of the sun is going 
to stop the great work he has on hand, of giving light to the 
world, to listen to the idle prattle of an ignorant people like 
you? What are you, or your people, that you dare think of 
such a thing?” 

But the old chief shook his head as he turned away. 

This, of course, opened Jack’s eyes. He had thought that 
he and Nellie were perfectly secure, and here were these savages 
waiting for some kind of a sign from their imaginary god, 
which, of course, they would never receive, and as soon as they 
became satisfied that they would receive no such sign, he and 
Nellie were to be put to death as imposters. “I wonder how 
long they will wait for this sign. This old chief spoke about 
expecting it the next time they went through their humbug of 


126 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

worship, which is day after to-morrow, and probably that will 
be the end of our probation. Confound their idiotic ignorance, 
anyway. They haven’t got the sense of a flea,” soliloquized 
Jack, as he went through the village, angrily kicking over 
whatever happened to come in his way. 


CHAPTER IX. 


CONDEMNED TO DEATH. 

Neddie was sitting upon the topmost peak of one of the 
ranges of hills the next day, and Jack was lying on the ground 
at her feet. Nellie’s sad eyes were looking out over the ocean. 
Jack had been telling her of his conversation with the old chief. 

“Here we’ve been standing on the top of a volcano, which 
was liable to an eruption at any moment, thinking all the time 
that we were perfectly safe,” said Jack. 

“But what had we better do?” asked Nellie. 

“I’m trying to think,” said Jack. 

“Is there any chance to get away?” asked she. 

“I’ve been thinking of that too,” said Jack. 

“They’re waiting for a sign,” continued he. “I wonder if it 
would be sign enough if I should manage to get away in the 
night and tear their idol down and smash his head?” 

“That would surely be a very positive kind of a sign,” said 
Nellie, “but Jack, supposing something should happen to you 
and you should not return, what would become of me ?” 

“Poor little girl, I’ll never leave you, Nellie. Come what 
may, we’ll take our chances together,” said Jack. “I would 
like to smash their idol though,” he continued. “That would 
just be the kind of a sign that would do them good, the ignor- 
ant idiots.” 

“But Jack, don’t you think that it is a good thing for us that 
they are so ignorant?” 

“Yes, I know, we’ve taken advantage of their ignorance >so 
far, but just now I wish they could have a little common sense 


128 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

drummed into their thick skulls. Just think of our lives de- 
pending upon some sign being given them by the sun.” Jack 
lay a few moments looking out over the ocean. 

“Well,” said he, finally, “there is only one thing to do, and 
that is to get away from here as soon as possible. They go to 
the temple island to-morrow; that will be our best chance, I 
guess; while the chief and all the chieftains are away. We’ll 
try for it then, anyway, and take a circuit far enough to the 
south to miss them on the sea, reach the hut on the island, pack 
our things into the large boat, and get away from this region 
entirely.” 

“I should be so thankful, Jack, if we could only succeed and 
get away somewhere where we will be to ourselves. I’ve al- 
ways felt nervous and afraid among these people,” said she. 

“Well, we’ll make a try for it, little girl.” 

“Will we take our things from here?” asked she. 

“That depends,” said Jack, “if we have the opportunity to 
get them to the boat; if not, we’ll go without them and only 
take what we have on. There is one thing certain, Nellie, 
there is nothing going to keep us from getting away if I can 
help it. I am perfectly willing to leave these savages harm- 
lessly and peaceably, but they seem to be inclined to keep us 
here for the purpose of taking our lives. Now they will have 
to look to themselves if they attempt to stop us, for it is enough 
to make any man desperate, and I shall certainly kill some of 
them if they stand in my way or try to prevent us from getting 
off,” continued Jack. 

“I’d hate to see any blood shed, Jack, but I suppose you’d be 
entirely justified in this case,” said Nellie. 

“I won’t shed any blood unless it is necessary, but if it is I 
shall not hesitate. If we’re taken afterwards, it can’t be any 
worse for us, if they intend to kill us anyway.” 

There was a long silence. Nellie sat leaning her head upon 
her hands, her sad eyes looking out over the water. Jack was 


Condemned to Death. 129 

impatiently biting off little blades of grass and then spitting 
them out. 

“Well,” said she finally, “I wish we were well out of our 
troubles.” 

“Poor little girl,” said Jack, “Pm awful sorry to have you 
mixed up in this kind of a thing. If I was alone, Nellie, it 
wouldn’t be half so hard.” 

“Do you think that, when all the chiefs have gone to their 
worship, any of the others will try to interfere with our 
getting away?” asked Nellie. 

“They’d better not try,” said Jack. 

“Suppose they take all the boats with them ?” asked she. 

Jack thought for a moment. 

“They might do that,” he said, “although they don’t need 
them all ; but after what the chief told me, they might take 
that precaution, thinking we might try to escape.” 

“But what if they should, Jack?” 

“Then we can’t get away, at least not until the chiefs return.” 

“Oh I hope we can get away safely without any trouble at 
all,” said she. 

That afternoon another secret council was held, but Jack 
could learn of nothing that had been decided upon. He went 
about deep in thought. He could see that Nellie was much 
worried, as she had good cause to be, and in his heart he was 
very sorry for her. 

“Poor little girl,” he said to himself, “just to think of a deli- 
cate girl like her to be placed in a position of this kind. And 
I am to blame for it all, too. I might have left her on the 
other island in the hut. She would have been perfectly safe 
there, or if they should have found her she would not have 
been any worse off than she is now. I ought to have insisted 
on it. They want a sign. I’d like to give them a sign that 
would scare the life out of them. I would like, among other 
things, to smash that idol into powder. I wonder if that would 
9 


130 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

have any effect on their superstitious minds. Confound their 
idiotic ignorance. I wish I knew how to put a little common 
sense into their heads. They haven’t even got horse sense. 
They haven’t got half the sense Carlo has. No, I wouldn’t in- 
sult the dog by comparing him with them. They’ll have to 
look out now; they’ve got a desperate man to deal with.” So 
Jack soliloquized, as he strutted angrily about, smoking one 
cigar after another, and scowling at every one he met. 

There was very little more said between him and Nellie. 
They were both unusually quiet and thoughtful. But Jack 
often caught Nellie’s eye looking at him wistfully, and of course 
knew she was naturally anxious and worried, and could look 
alone to him for safety and protection. 

“Poor little girl,” he said again, “no harm shall come to her 
as long as there is any strength left in my arm. Yes, or even 
life left in my body. If I was gasping out my life in the last 
agonies of death, and saw her in danger, I really believe I would 
rise up in supernatural strength to strike a last blow in her 
defense,” he continued. 

So the afternoon wore away and night fell. As Jack bade 
Nellie good-night he told her to prepare everything in readi- 
ness to be easily carried off, for they would make the attempt 
to escape early the next morning. 

“Good-night, little sister,” he said again ; “keep up your spirits 
and hope for the best. I’ll bring you out of this if possible.” 

There was not much sleep for Nellie that night. She lay 
awake till very late thinking over all the past and wondering 
what the morrow \Vould bring. But along after midnight she 
lost herself in sleep and did not awaken until the sun had risen 
and was shining through the crevices of her hut. She looked 
pale this morning as she put aside the hut door, but Jack 
thought her more beautiful, if anything, as she emerged from 
the hut dressed all in white. 

“Well, Nellie,” he said, “did you sleep well last night?” 


Condemned to Death. 


^3 1 

“Not very well, Jack,” said she. “I was a good deal worried, 
I'm afraid.” 

“Well, I hope to-night you may have a good rest away out on 
the deep, blue sea somewhere, far away from these idiotic sav- 
ages,” said he. 

“Are they gone, Jack?” 

“Yes, they do their worshipping at sunrise, and so have been 
gone some hours.” 

“Did they leave any boats?” asked she. 

“Yes, there are three down there on the beach. We will 
take the largest one as being the most serviceable,” said Jack. 

“Do you think the others will let us off?” said she. 

“They had better not try to stop us,” said he. 

They had finished the breakfast that the women had brought 
them and were standing in front of Nellie’s hut. 

“I hope we’ll get off all right without any trouble,” said 
Nellie. 

“We’ll get off all right, trouble or no trouble,” said Jack 
determinedly. 

“When had we better start?” asked Nellie. 

“As soon as possible,” said Jack. “We want to get as long 
a start as possible, then we have to make a long circuit to the 
other island so as to avoid those returning. Confound them, 
I wish their temple with its idiotic idol was in the opposite 
direction; it would save us a long pull and much time. But 
get your things ready and have everything handy as soon as 
I give the word. I want to look around a little first to see if 
this is a good time to leave.” 

He lit a cigar and started toward the center of the village. 
He met no one except a few of the old women, and began to 
wonder what had become of all the men. He went on through 
the village, and then found them all gathered on a stretch of 
green engaged in some field sports. The young men were 
trying their skill at throwing the spear and the whole village 


132 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

had turned out to witness the sport. They had set a target 
upon a tree a few feet from the ground, and were trying their 
skill at different distances from it, and when an unusual good 
throw was made there was much cheering and applauding, 
and when some of the younger ones would miss the tree al- 
together there was much mocking and laughter. Jack watched 
this sport casually for some time. He knew now was the time 
to escape, but did not want to hurry his motions, or create 
suspicion in any way. So he mixed in among them and looked 
on for a while, then sauntered leisurely back, until he got out 
of sight, when he quickened his footsteps and soon reached 
Nellie’s hut. She was standing quietly in the door- way as 
Jack approached. 

“Now is our time, Nellie,” said he; and going in picked 
up the bundles she had made ready, and stopping at his own 
hut, took up his own few packages, and calling Carlo they 
proceeded down to the beach where the three boats were 
drawn part way out of the water. He handed Nellie into the 
largest one and seated her in the stern ; was about to follow 
with Carlo when two stalwart savages emerged from the bushes 
where they had been in hiding. They came quickly forward. 

“My brother must not go upon the water to-day,” said the 
foremost. 

“And why not?” asked Jack. 

“Against the orders of the chief,” said the savage. 

“And why should the chief want to prevent me from going 
upon the water?” asked Jack. 

Nellie turned pale and looked at Jack in despair. Jack 
glanced at her a moment, then turned again to the savages. 

“What has the chief got to do with my actions anyway?” 
asked Jack. 

“I dunno ; that’s the orders,” said the savage. 

“But I tell you, my friend, that I am a going upon the water 
to-day, chief or no chief; orders or no orders, and the very 


Condemned to Death. 


J 33 


best thing for your health at this present moment is to stand 
aside and not try to interfere with me.” And he made to step 
into the boat. 

“No,” said the savage, “my brother can’t go,” and seizing 
Jack by the arm he tried to force him back. 

Jack drew up his powerful, athletic frame, and taking a step 
back he said, “What, you great idiotic numskull, dare you try 
to interfere with my actions,” and swinging his powerful right 
arm he took the savage under the jaw and knocked him clean 
off the rock upon which they were standing into the sea. As 
he came up spluttering the second savage made a dash at 
Jack with his spear and would undoubtedly have run him 
through, but Carlo had suddenly awakened to the fact that 
there was a fight on hand and was anxious to get mixed up in 
it. As the savage made a lunge at Jack with his spear Carlo 
siezed him by the leg, which caused him to lose his balance 
and stumble in front of Jack. Before he could recover himself 
Jack had again swung that right arm and sent him into the sea 
after his companion. He called Carlo and stepped into the 
boat and seized the oars. 

“Now if you fellows bother me again I’ll not let you off so 
easily,” said he, as he rowed out into the deep water. 

But the savages were game, and no sooner had they reached 
shore than they immediately jumped into one of the other 
boats and proceeded to follow. 

“Keep back!” said Jack, “if you know what’s best for you. 
It’ll not be healthy for you out here.” 

But they continued to follow, and were gaining on Jack, for 
they had a lighter boat and two pair of oars. Jack pulled 
lustily and the canoe fairly flew through the water, but the 
second one even went faster, and Jack saw that they would 
soon overtake him, so he pulled his revolver. 

“Oh, do you have to kill them, Jack?” asked Nellie, 


134 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“It may come to that, Nellie, but not yet. I think I can 
probably sink their boat.” 

And firing two shots at the boat just below water-mark, 
knocked a piece of the bark out over a foot in length. The 
boat immediately filled and sank, leaving them struggling in 
the water. 

“Now I hope you are satisfied,” said Jack. “I said I was 
going upon the water and so I am, and all your heathen crew 
can’t prevent me.” 

The savages were making for shore, swimming with long, 
strong strokes. 

“I guess they’ll give it up now,” said Jack. But he was 
mistaken. No sooner did they reach shore than they made 
for the remaining boat and started again in pursuit. 

“Well, I admire your persistence,” said Jack. “This time 
I’ll have to kill you if you catch up with me.” 

Jack now had a start of about three hundred feet, which he 
endeavored to keep, and succeeded for a while, only to find at 
last that the savages were steadily gaining upon and must 
eventually overtake him. When this fact became a certainty 
he stopped rowing and waited for them to approach. When 
they had arrived within a few feet of him he fired again, trying 
to cripple this boat as he had the other. He fired too low, 
and the ball struck the water and passed under the boat. The 
next shot made a hole in the boat, but it was above water- 
mark and so did not sink it. The savages were now along- 
side, and the one nearest to Jack raised his spear and was 
about to run him through when Jack fired his last shot right 
at his head. He tumbled backward into the water and sank. 
The other one now raised his spear, but before he could use it 
Jack had brought one of the oars down on his head with such 
force that he knocked him partly over in the boat. The boats 
were drifting apart again when Carlo made a spring and landed 
right on the half conscious man with such force that they 


Condemned to Death. 


*35 

both went into the sea. This seemed to revive the savage, and 
it was a death struggle between him and the dog. The dog 
had the man by the throat and was bearing him down, while 
the savage was trying to choke the life out of the dog. 

“Hang to him, Carlo,” shouted Jack. “Put his head under 
and keep it there. That’s right, drown the life out of him, old 
fellow.” 

Carlo was doing his best, but the savage was game and 
fought hard for his life. They were both becoming weak, and 
the battle must soon end. Jack had brought the boat around 
so that he might come to Carlo’s assistance, but just as he got 
within reaching distance they both sank beneath the waves. 
They waited in utter silence what seemed a long time to Jack. 
In fact he had about come to the conclusion that the dog and 
man were both drowned, when Carlo’s head again appeared 
above the water, gasping for breath. 

“Hello, old fellow, did you do him up ; did you drown him 
Carlo?” said Jack, as he caught Carlo by the collar and eased 
him up while he got his breath. He then helped him over the 
bow of the boat and made a place for him to lie down, for 
Carlo had had a hard tussle for it, and was very nearly ex- 
hausted. 

“Well, we have not got away without bloodshed after all, 
Jack,” said Nellie. 

“No,” said Jack, as he picked up the oars and began rowing 
with long, regular strokes. “But it was their own fault ; I 
did not kill them until it was necessary for our own safety. 
In fact, if I hadn’t shot that savage he’d have killed me.” 

“Yes, I know,” said Nellie, “of course you couldn’t have 
helped it.” 

“And are we really free now, Jack, do you think?” she con- 
tinued. 

“Well, it begins to look like it, Nellie, but we must be care- 
ful not to meet the returning chiefs,” said Jack. 


136 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 


“Oh, I feel like I could sing for joy, Jack/’ 

“Better not yet awhile, until we see whether we are indeed 
off for good,” said he. 

They made a long detour to the south, going fully twice the 
distance necessary. So it was nearly noon when they ap- 
proached the temple island, from the south. Jack ran the canoe 
upon the beach and stepped out and was about to help Nellie 
out, when he was immediately surrounded by the very savages 
he had taken such great pains to avoid. They had seen Jack 
approaching from a long distance, and had been in hiding, 
waiting for him for some time. Jack was taken completely by 
surprise, and before he knew it two of them had pinioned his 
arms behind him, and were trying to tie them with thongs. 
With a mighty effort he shook them off, and for the third time 
that day swung his strong right arm, caught one of the savages 
behind the ear and sent him rolling down the bank, where he 
lay with his head partly submerged in the water. Carlo again 
came to the rescue and made straight for the throat of another 
one of them and bore him down to the earth, and undoubtedly 
would have killed him, but was struck over the head with a 
club that one of them had picked up. Jack saw the act, but not 
in time to save the dog. But the man who had struck the blow 
was soon lying down the bank with his companion. Jack now 
seized the club the man had dropped and commenced swing- 
ing it right and left, laying out two more of them. There were 
five of them down now, and Jack put his hand back to draw his 
revolver, but when he snapped it in the old chief’s face he re- 
membered, too late, that he had neglected to reload it. The 
revolver was knocked out of Jack’s hand by one of the others, 
and Carlo sprang at this man, but missed his grip. Jack 
stooped to regain his club, which he had dropped, when he was 
jumped on from behind, borne down and finally bound securely. 
Carlo would have again come to the rescue, but Jack called 
him off, 


Condemned to Death. 


I 37 


“No use old fellow,” he said sadly, “the jig is up; there’s 
too many of them, old boy ; we’ll have to give in, and watch for 
a better chance.” 

Nellie had been sitting in the canoe all this time with 
blanched face and wide staring eyes. Everything had been 
done so quickly that she had hardly had time to realize it all, 
before Jack was returned to the boat with his hands tied 
behind him. 

“Well, little girl,” said Jack, as he entered the boat, “we didn’t 
succeed this time it seems after all, and we’re probably in a 
much worse fix than we were before, if such a thing is pos- 
sible. If by some miraculous power I could only transfer 
you to your home in New York I would gladly take all that 
was to come and not complain, but to think that you have to 
go back to this hateful people makes it doubly hard,” he con- 
tinued. 

“Don’t, Jack,” said Nellie, “I know you did the best you 
could, and that it isn’t your fault that we didn’t succeed.” 

“I wonder what the confounded idiots were doing here any- 
way? Surely they weren’t waiting for us. Yet the way they 
surprised us looks like it,” said Jack. 

They were on their way back to their own island by this 
time. All were able to help themselves, but there were some 
pretty sore heads among them. The one that Carlo had at- 
tacked was probably the most hurt. The skin around his 
throat was considerably lacerated, and he was probably pretty 
sore all over, inside and out. Jack and Nellie were both very 
glum upon the return voyage. Nellie sat looking out over the 
water with the saddest expression Jack thought that he had 
ever seen. 

“Poor little girl,” he thought, “I don’t care so much for my- 
self, I could stand it and take what comes, but I’m sorry for 
her, and I can’t think of a single word to cheer her with, for 
I suppose it is all up with us now. I don’t see that anything 


138 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

can save us. Our only hope is still to escape, but I suppose 
our chances now will be mighty slim. They will watch us like 
hawks now, I suppose. I won’t even have the satisfaction of 
killing a few of them first as I thought, for they have my 
revolver. I saw the big chief pick it up. I wonder if he 
knows what it is anyhow. What a ninny I was for not load- 
ing it up after emptying it. Jack, I always thought you were 
an awful fool, now I know it.” And so Jack’s thoughts ran 
on in sadness and deep despair, for<he could see nothing ahead 
for them but death. 

When they reached their own island, Jack and Nellie were 
taken up through the village and, together with the dog, placed 
in the strong prison hut. Jack protested and asked that Nellie 
might be given in charge of some of the women, but they 
wouldn’t listen to him. 

Supper was brought to them, and they were told that they 
were to die next day at noon. So it was with very poor ap- 
petite they sat down to the last supper they ever expected to 
enjoy. 


CHAPTER X. 


BAMBOOZLING THE) SAVAGES. 

They sat a long time in silence, while the sun went down, 
and the darkness gradually crept in upon them. 

“The confounded idiots/’ said Jack, at last, “they haven’t 
even got the decency to give you a separate apartment, al- 
though I begged them to do so, but have forced me in here 
upon your privacy.” 

“I don’t mind, Jack, it doesrr’t matter. I don’t think any- 
thing matters much now,” said Nellie, sadly. “In fact I would 
rather have you with me on this, the last night that we have 
to live,” she continued. “I believe I would die or go crazy if I 
had to go through the night alone,” she continued again, 
after a short silence. 

“I wonder,” she said again, after a long silence, “if we shall 
ever see another sunset,” looking up through the small windows 
near the ceiling at the fast fading light. “Do you really think 
they will kill us to-morrow, Jack?” 

“Poor little sister,” said Jack, “I only wish I could see some 
way out of it for you at least.” 

“Well, I’m not afraid to die,” she said. “I only hope they 
will give us an easy death ; I couldn’t bear to be tortured.” 

“My heavens, Nellie, I can’t even stand the thought of it, 
for you,” said he. * 

“Don’t you know how they usually do kill?” asked she. 

“No, Nellie, I really don’t; it may be they spear one to 
death.” 


139 


140 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“I suppose that would not be a very hard death, if they should 
strike in a vital part?” said she. 

“My dear little sister, I wish I only had two lives to give 
and could save yours.” 

“Jack, I know Fm awfully selfish,” said she; “I’m only think- 
ing of myself all the time ; of course it’s just as hard for you.” 

After a long silence Jack arose from the place he had occu- 
pied near the door, and said, “Nellie, let me fix up some kind 
of a bed for you, and then lie down and try to get a little sleep. 
You must* still have some friends among the women. They 
have provided you with plenty of rugs and mats. Here, HI 
make you up a bed in this corner,” and Jack made her as com- 
fortable as possible under the circumstances. 

“And where will you sleep, Jack?” asked she. 

“Oh, I’m not sleepy. If I feel so after a bit I’ll lie down 
near the door here,” said Jack. 

“But you’ve given me all the rugs,” said she. 

“Oh, there is plenty of stuff here I can gather together for 
a bed when I get sleepy.” 

“Well, I’ll lie down, but I’m not sleepy either,” said she. 

Nellie lay down on the bed, and Jack went over and sat down 
near the door. Carlo came to him and put his cold nose into 
Jack’s face, whining piteously. 

“What is it, old fellow?” said Jack, patting him on the head. 
“Do you realize, old boy, the fix we’re in?” 

Carlo only understood that Jack was sad about something, 
and tried to offer him a dog’s sympathy. 

“Poor fellow,” said Jack, “go lie down, Carlo. That’s it, 
old boy.” 

Carlo stretched himself out in front of Jack, with his head 
between his paws, but with his eyes watching intently Jack’s 
every motion. Thus they sat until the twilight faded and the 
shadows grew heavier, and finally thick darkness spread over 
all. 


Bamboozling the Savages. 14 1 

Nellie lay very still, and Jack wondered if she were asleep. 
He hoped so and that she might not awake until morning. 

“Poor child/’ thought he, for what was she, after all, but a 
child; a very sweet and interesting one, but still a child. But 
she was not asleep, for she soon called to him. 

“Jack,” she said softly, “did you ever think what comes 
after death?” 

“I’ve tried to think of.it sometimes, Nellie,” said he. 

“You don’t think that this can be the end; the real end?” 
she said. 

“I’m afraid, I’ve never come to any positive conclusion about 
it, Nellie.” 

There was another long silence. 

“It don’t seem, Jack, that we could have been brought into 
the world, and live up to this time, and then die like — this, and 
that was the end.” 

“It don’t seem so, Nellie.” 1 

“Our lives must count for more than that, Jack.” 

“Yes, it seems so, or else they would not be worth the living,” 
said Jack. 

“While lying here I’ve been thinking of all the naughty 
things I ever did.” 

“I don’t think you could ever have been very naughty, 
Nellie.” 

“They say when a person is drowning, or falling to death 
from some great height, that during the short interval that 
elapses before death, that everything they ever did in all their 
lives passes like a panorama before the eyes of their memory, 
and that they remember the most minute things that ever hap- 
pened to them. So it has been with me while lying here. I 
seemed to have lived my life all over again, going away back 
into my childhood, before mama died, and I remembered ever 
so many things that I hadn’t thought of for years.” 


142 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

There was another long silence. 

Then Nellie said again, “Jack, if this is not the end, and some- 
thing comes after, then mama is alive and happy — somewhere ?” 

“Yes, Nellie,” said Jack. 

Then silence again. 

Then said Nellie, “Jack, if mama is alive, do you think that 
she can look down from — somewhere, and know about — this ?” 

“I expect so, Nellie.” 

“And do you think she will be waiting for me — somewhere ?” 

“Yes,” said Jack, but his voice was this time husky. 

Then another long silence, broken only by the beating of 
the waves upon the shore, or the clear notes of some night 
bird, or the dismal hooting of some owl. Finally, by her deep, 
regular breathing, Jack knew that Nellie had at last fallen 
asleep. 

“Thank God,” said Jack, “that she may have this short 
respite — she needs all the rest she can get, to sustain her 
through the terrible ordeal through which she is to pass at noon 
to-morrow — to think of those tender, young limbs, to be first 
scorched, then blackened, then burned to a crisp, by these devils 
who pass by the name of men — for that’s the way we’re to die, 
though I hadn’t the heart to tell poor, little Nellie so — well I 
wish it was all over, and all her sufferings in the past, poor 
thing.” 

And so passed the night, the most unhappy night among all 
the unhappy nights of Jack’s experience. He could think of 
no means of escape. He cudgeled his brain in vain to find a 
way out of it. Getting out of the hut, even, would be impos- 
sible, for he could hear the regular tramp of the sentinels out- 
side; but even then, how could they ever get away from the 
island, with hundreds of these savage devils thirsting for their 
blood? In the morning, when led out to die, he might, it is 
true, knock down or perhaps even kill a few of these imps, but 


Bamboozling the Savages. 143 

to what purpose? That would not help Nellie in the least, in 
her extremity. There seemed no help whatever, unless some 
miracle should happen, and miracles were out of date. 

“I cannot see any way,” said he, “in which we can escape this 
awful death. Poor child, I hope unconsciousness may soon 
come to her, and her sufferings soon be over,” continued he, 
sighing deeply. 

So the night passed and the gray dawn began to appear. As 
the gray changed to white, and the light gradually crept into 
the small windows, Nellie opened her eyes, first in surprise at 
seeing Jack sitting there; then, as she began to realize the aw- 
ful truth, and remembered that they were both to die that day 
at noon, the old sadness reappeared. She was silent a while, 
then she said, “Jack, have you been sitting up all night?” 

“I didn’t feel sleepy, Nellie,” said he. 

“But you ought to have tried to get some rest,” she said. 

“It doesn’t matter, Nellie, you know, as you said last night, 
nothing matters now,” said Jack. 

“Then you don’t see any help for us, Jack?” she said. 

“I’ve been trying to think of a way out of it all night, Nellie.” 

“And you didn’t succeed?” 

Jack shook his head. 

“Well, you’re not to blame, Jack; you’ve done all you could.” 

Again Jack shook his head. “I had no business to bring 
you into this scrape,” he said. 

“But you couldn’t have helped it, Jack,” said she. 

* “I could have left you on the other island in the hut,” said 
Jack, “and you would have been safe there.” 

“But I told you I couldn’t stay there, Jack,” said Nellie. 

Again Jack shook his head. “I ought to have insisted on it,” 
said he. 

About nine o’clock the door was opened, and the women 
brought in some breakfast. 


144 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“I don’t believe I can eat any, Jack.” 

“You must try, Nellie ; you will need all your strength. Poor 
little girl, try and eat, even if you don’t feel like it.” 

They sat down, and Jack tried to eat something to encourage 
her, but every mouthful nearly choked him. Finally, after a 
few mouthfuls, they both gave it up and the things were re- 
moved. 

“I don’t suppose we’ll ever see the sun rise again, Jack?” 

“Poor little girl; oh, the pity of it, Nellie. I can’t bear to 
think of such a fate for you.” 

There was a long silence, then Nellie said, “See what day of 
the month it is, Jack; let us know upon what day we are to 
die.” 

Jack mechanically took the almanac out of his pocket and 
looked for the last day that he had marked. 

“It is the first day of the month, Nellie. This is the first of 
October,” said Jack. 

They were both silent. Jack was turning the leaves of the 
almanac indifferently, with his mind fixed on other things ; but 
finally something caught his eye and held it. 

“Oh, Nellie,” said he, with more animation than he had dis- 
played of late, “can we prove this thing?” 

“What thing, Jack?” said she, looking up quickly. 

“Why, that this is the first of October. I believe, if we are 
right, that I can frighten these savage imps out of their lives.” 

“But how, Jack?” asked she. 

“There is an eclipse, Nellie; an eclipse of the sun on the first 
of October,” said Jack. 

“But I don’t see how that can help us any, Jack.” 

“Oh, it’s an old trick, Nellie. It has been tried before upon 
savages in other parts of the world successfully; and you see 
it can be easily played upon these people, because they are wor- 
shippers of the sun. Oh, I’ll frighten the daylight out of them, 
literally speaking, too,” said Jack, joyfully. 


Bamboozling the Savages. 145 

“But how, Jack?” said Nellie, brightening considerably, being 
encouraged by Jack’s manner, though not understanding his 
method. 

“Oh, you just wait and see how I’ll bamboozle them, Nellie. 
I don’t think there’ll be any trouble about our getting away 
when I’m through with them,” said he. “But, the first thing 
we want to do,” he continued, “is to prove this date. We must 
be sure that this is the first of October, and that I haven’t made 
any mistake in my marking the dates.” 

“But how are we going to prove it, Jack?” 

“Perhaps we can prove it together, Nellie. I wish I had 
only known how much would depend upon my keeping the 
dates correctly; I would have been careful enough then. But, 
let us see if we cannot verify it, Nellie,” said Jack, taking one 
of the newspapers from his pocket. 

“Now, this paper is dated August twenty-seventh , and is 
Wednesday's paper," said Jack. “Now, how soon after that did 
you sail?” 

“Why, we sailed the following Saturday,” said Nellie. 

“Sure of it, Nellie?” asked Jack. 

“Yes, that would be the thirtieth , wouldn’t it? We sailed on 
the thirtieth, I’m positive,” said Nellie. 

“Yes,” said Jack, “the Saturday following would be August 
the thirtieth, the day you sailed. Now, how many days after that 
were you shipwrecked?” 

Nellie considered a little while. “Why, it was just a week 
after,” said she; “I remember Aunt’s calling my attention to 
it as we were about to retire. ‘Nellie,’ she said, ‘we have just 
been a week to-night on the water, and it seems like a month.’ ” 

“And you were wrecked that night ?” asked he. 

“Yes, the collision occurred about midnight, and we left 
the wreck the next morning.” 

“Well,” said Jack, “there are thirty-one days in August; so 
that a week from August thirtieth would be September sixth . 

10 


146 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

Then you were eight days in the boat ; that was the number 
marked down when I looked.” 

“Yes, poor Harry marked the last that morning he died.” 

“Well, eight days from September sixth would make it Sep- 
tember fourteen. That was the day that I brought you to this 
island,” said Jack; “and I know that it was just two weeks 
after that that I had a talk with the chief. That would bring 
it up to the twenty-eighth. Two days after we tried to escape, 
which would make it the thirtieth, which was yesterday. Hur- 
rah !” said Jack, “this is the first of October sure enough. Now 
111 show these idiots something to-day that’ll make them wish 
they had never been born. Let me see,” he continued, “just 
what it says about the eclipse anyway. Hurrah,” he said again, 
presently, “things are coming our way now, Nellie. It says in 
the northern part of North America the eclipse will scarcely be 
noticeable ; in the central portion it will be partial, and in the 
tropics it will be total. Just think, Nellie, we don’t have to 
give a little one-horse show, but a big, full-fledged, five-tented, 
three-ringed circus, with a brass band.” Jack was now jubilant, 
and Nellie was catching some of his spirit, although she had not 
the least idea what Jack was going to do. “At high noon, 
Nellie. In luck again,” shouted Jack. “The very time they 
had fixed to burn us at the stake, they’ll wish they had never 
seen a stake before it’s over.” 

“Oh, Jack, were they going to do that?” asked Nellie, turning 
pale. 

“That’s just what they had intended, Nellie, but I couldn’t 
bear to tell you before, little girl. But,” continued Jack, “you’ll 
not mind now, Nellie, will you? Even if they tie you to a stake, 
and pile the brush around you ; remember, and keep saying to 
yourself: ‘Well, they’ll never light this pile, anyway.’ If your 
heart begins to fail, say that over to yourself, and don’t show 
them that you are afraid. It will help us wonderfully if we can 
make them believe that we’re not afraid of anything that they 


*47 


Bamboozling the Savages. 

can do.” Jack took both of Nellie’s hands in his, “Poor little 
sister, do you think you can go through with it all ?” said he. 

Nellie raised her eyes bravely to his, “I’ll not fail you, Jack,” 
she said. 

“That’s the right spirit, Nellie, and remember, and please 
don’t forget for a moment, that I promise faithfully to bring 
you through it all safely.” 

“I’ll trust you, Jack, in all things, and at all times,” said she. 

“Thanks, little sister. Now I must do some thinking, to 
plan the best method of bringing this about,” said he. “One 
thing I’ll want to do, I’ll want to watch the sun pretty closely, 
so as to know exactly when the eclipse begins,” continued he; 
“and this will be just the thing for that purpose,” taking out the 
case that contained the eye-glasses. He removed the glasses 
from the case, and after burning a sufficient quantity of 
matches, succeeded in smoking the lenses thoroughly, and then 
replaced them carefully in the case. 

Soon after eleven o’clock the door was opened and a num- 
ber of savages appeared armed with spears. They led Jack 
and Nellie out to the center of the great square of the village, 
where the whole population was gathered to witness the grand 
spectacle of two captives being burned at the stake. There 
were two long stakes, made of heavy green timber, planted 
firmly in the ground about twelve feet apart. Near by were 
great stacks of dry wood gathered from the drift upon the 
shore. 

“Courage now, Nellie,” said Jack; “remember that no harm 
shall come to you.” 

Jack was now tied to one of these stakes, and Nellie to the 
other. 

Nellie was very pale, but composed, and watched Jack nar- 
rowly, and seemed to partake of some of his courage. 

The savages now piled the dry wood around them. Jack 
looked down upon them, smiling in a kind of pity. 


148 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

They had wrapped the green thongs about their bodies, leav- 
ing their arms free. Carlo was tied to a tree at a short distance 
off. 

Jack now looked at the sun. It was nearly overhead. The 
great chief and the chieftains were standing in a semi-circle a 
short distance off. The great mass of the people were gathered 
immediately in the rear, wherever they could get an opportunity 
to hear and see everything that took place. Now, amidst a 
dead silence, Jack spoke up. 

“Well, my brothers,” said he, “you think you have gathered 
here to witness a grand ceremony. You have even called your 
women and children forth to enjoy the grand sight; but, I’m 
sorry for you, my brothers, for you will be disappointed. There 
will be no one burned here at the stake to-day. I said, in the 
beginning, that you think you have gathered to witness such a 
ceremony, and you only think so, for no such ceremony will take 
place. Do you think the great god of the sun will allow such 
a great sacrilege ?” said he sternly. “When the great god gets 
overhead, and with his wonderful eye can look down upon this 
scene, and understands the dastardly thing you are about to do, 
what do you suppose will happen? When he sees the Lord 
of the Sun and the beautiful White Spirit bound in this way, 
and knows that you intend to burn their bodies, it were better 
for you that you had never been born. 

“Oh, mighty chief, you think yourself a great man. Do you 
dare defy your god? Do you know that he is soon to crush 
you and your people ; that he will wipe your island off the face 
of the globe, and the waters will roll over you and you will be 
no more? Oh, chief of a poor, ignorant set of people, I ask 
you again : dare you defy your god ?” 

Jack now took his eye-glasses and put them on and looked 
at the sun. They watched him in much curiosity, wondering 
what he was going to do. He had been talking against time, 


Bamboozling the Savages. 149 

waiting for the first appearance of the eclipse, just when the 
outer disk of the sun began to lose its shape. 

“Oh, mighty chief,” he continued, “you asked your god to 
give you a sign. He is about to do it. He will give you such 
a sign that will bring you to your knees, pleading for mercy.” 

“My brother talks big words,” said the chief; “let him per- 
form.” 

“You want your brother to perform?” said Jack. “So be it; 
but first let your brother tell you what will happen to you. As 
soon as the great god can look down upon this sacrilege, he will 
withdraw his face from you ; he will entirely disappear from 
the heavens, and there will be no sun where there ought to be. 
Why? Simply because he has withdrawn himself from his 
usual path in the heavens to wreak his vengeance upon you. 
He will swoop down upon you with such fury and power that 
you’ll never have time to know what happened, and will only 
awake to find your island gone, and yourself food for the fishes.” 

Many of the men trembled and the women began to weep, but 
the old chief was game and could not be bluffed. 

“I say again,” he said, “my brother only talks big words ; let 
him perform.” 

“Oh, your brother will perform soon enough,” said Jack, 
again glarfcing at the sun, rather anxiously, for it seemed time 
for the eclipse, if there was to be one. This time, however, he 
saw what he had been waiting for, and with one word to Nellie, 
to encourage her, telling her everything was coming right, he 
raised his arms to the sun in apparent supplication, and thus 
began : 

“Oh, mighty god of the sun, wilt thou look down upon this 
scene; behold thy beautiful White Spirit, her tender limbs 
about to be given to the flames ; she whom thou didst send in 
all kindness to be a comfort and a joy to them ; she, the light of 
thy realm, the joy of thy heart, to be thus sacrificed, and also 


150 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

the Lord of the Sun whom thou didst send to this people for 
their guidance and instruction? Wilt thou, oh great god of 
the sun, look down, behold, and then strike vengeance? With- 
draw thy face from this people; then smite them and banish 
them from the face of the earth, and may the waters roll over 
this place and know it no more !” 

The first shades of the eclipse began to be manifest, and then, 
as soon as it began to become unmistakeably perceptible, they 
began to look around for clouds, but there were no clouds. 
Then they looked at one another and trembled, and all the time 
it was growing darker and darker, until their superstitious 
minds could bear no more, and they stood trembling in fear. 

“Down on your knees and plead for mercy,” shouted Jack. 
“Every mother’s son of you ; down on your marrow bones, you 
ignorant idiots ; down with you, you great ignoramus of a chief. 
You will defy your god will you ; now take your punishment.” 

But the chief and all were down groveling in the very dirt, 
and begging pitiously for mercy, and the howling and wailing 
was something terrible to listen to, and in a sense very comical, 
and Jack could hardly keep from bursting out laughing, but he 
managed to control himself. 

He left them to their repentance as long as he dared; but 
when he saw that the eclipse was about over, and the sun was 
beginning to appear, he told them the god of the sun had heard 
their supplications for mercy and would forgive them this time. 
So they arose one after another as it began to grow light again. 

“Forgive thy brothers,” said the chief, as he approached Jack. 
“Our brother was right and we were wrong. We will do what- 
ever our brother says.” 

“Swear it before your god,” said Jack. 

“We swear, we swear, before the god of our fathers,” an- 
swered all the chieftains. 

“Cut these thongs,” said Jack. 

The old chief himself cut them immediately. 


Bamboozling the Savages. 151 

“The great god of the sun will not trust his emissaries any 
longer with such a people. We leave here in the morning to 
meet him as he comes out of the sea. Has my brother any 
objection to that?” said Jack, sternly. 

“It shall be just as my brother says,” said the chief, meekly. 

He went forward with Jack to cut Nellie’s thongs, but as her 
form was released, the limp body fell forward, and Jack caught 
her in his arms, for Nellie had fainted. 

They all came crowding around with expressions of sorrow 
and offers of help, but Jack bade them stand back; he thought 
he could see in this incident a method of still further increasing 
their fear, or rather an opportunity to clinch the point he had 
already made. He took it for granted that they had never seen 
anyone faint before, and so could still further impose upon their 
credulity. 

“Bring some rugs here,” he ordered. 

He laid Nellie down upon the rugs, and after making her 
position comfortable, he arose, and in a sad, sorrowful manner 
of speech began: 

“The poor White Spirit is dead. She, who was the favorite 
child of the great god of the sun, is dead — dead. She, whom 
the great god sent to this people to do them good — she is dead. 
She who came among them in all kindness — who administered 
to their sick children — who aided and instructed the women, 
and" was a great comfort to all the aged — she is dead — and who 
has done this ?” said Jack, looking sternly around. Then assum- 
ing a threatening attitude, he turned to the great chief, “Who 
has killed the beautiful White Spirit that came to you clothed 
in the blue of the sky? Will my brother, the chief, be able to 
account for this to the great god of the sun? Here lies his 
favorite child, the light of his eyes, the joy of all his kingdom, 
and she is dead. Do you suppose you can escape this time 
the punishment averted before? When your brother goes out 
over the dark waters, to meet the great god as he comes up 


152 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

out of the sea, and places in his hands the cold body of his 
beautiful White Spirit, with the bright life all gone out of it, 
what do you suppose will happen? Or when the great god 
again rides in the heavens and conies above once more, and 
with his wonderful eye looks down upon the lifeless form of the 
beautiful White Spirit, what do you suppose his vengeance 
will be?” 

By this time they were all down on their knees again, grovel- 
ing in the dirt, howling and wailing for mercy, and most of the 
women sobbing outright. 

“We are sorry, we are sorry,” said the chief, “we did not mean 
it so.” 

“Well, I’ll try and save you once more. Your brother will 
do what he can, but this will be the last time. If you should 
offend again, never again will I intercede for you.” 

Again putting on the smoked glasses, which he had removed, 
he again addressed the sun in supplication. 

“Oh, great god of the sun, wilt thou hear us once more in 
supplication for this people? It seems they do nothing but 
wrong, but, great god, will thou be merciful? Thou hast passed 
over this people and art engaged in other things ; but wilt thou 
turn thy wonderful eye back again for a moment, and behold 
the lifeless form of the beautiful White Spirit, for whom thou 
hast such great love? Yes, oh great god of the sun, she is dead. 
These people have been the means of taking her life, but they 
say they are sorry and did not intend it. Now, great god, wilt 
thou look once more upon them in compassion ; never again 
will we plead to thee for them. If they should sin again, they 
must take the consequences of their fault. But, just this once 
more, wilt thou hear us, and restore unto us the life of the 
beautiful White Spirit? Wilt thou look into her eyes, that she 
may see? Wilt thou speak into her ears, that she may hear? 
Wilt thou touch her form, that she may arise?” 

Jack had again been talking against time, and had watched 


Bamboozling the Savages. 153 

Nellie very closely for some signs of returning consciousness, 
and had come to be slightly alarmed at her long faint, but 
when he saw the first quiver of her eyelids he knew the faint 
was over and so brought his petition to a close in time to take 
her by the hand and help her to her feet. 

“Wonderful ! wonderful 1” exclaimed the savages, “great is 
our god, and great is our brother,” and they came crowding 
around where Jack stood supporting Nellie with his arm, for 
she appeared very weak and very much dazed. 

Jack motioned them all back and said, “The White Spirit has 
taken a long journey, and has just returned, and is very tired 
and Jack led Nellie back to the tent which the women had pre- 
pared for her and made her lie down and rest, while he ordered 
a bountiful supper. 

Carlo, all this time, had been tied to a tree and forgotten. 
Jack went now and released him. He also asked the chief for 
his revolver, which he gave over to Jack without a word. 

“Is it all over, Jack, and are we going away?” asked Nellie, 
as they sat down to their supper. 

“Yes, Nellie, it’s all right now, and we’ll get away from these 
people all right, but you need food and rest first,” said Jack. 

“Oh, Jack, can’t we go now? I’m still afraid of these people, 
and then they might change their minds,” said she. 

“Never have the least fear of that, Nellie; they have been 
too badly frightened. They’ll not forget it in a hurry.” 

“What was all that you were saying to them? Of course I 
couldn’t understand anything; only when the eclipse came I 
saw that they were badly frightened.” 

“That’s all there was to it, Nellie; they were frightened at 
the eclipse, but I made them believe that I was the cause of 
it,” said Jack. 

Jack and Nellie had excellent appetites for the supper the 
women had brought them, consisting of about everything the 
island afforded. They had not eaten much for the last twenty- 


154 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

four hours, and now both ate heartily, and enjoyed their supper 
exceedingly. 

“Now, Nellie,” said Jack, when they had finished, “you must 
lie down and get a little rest. We will start long before sun- 
rise, and get away from this place, which I hope we may never 
see again,” said Jack. 

Carlo was jumping about with short, joyful barks, as if he 
understood that a great crisis in their lives had been safely 
passed. 

Jack went to his own tent and threw himself across his bed 
to get some much needed rest. He slept a sound, dreamless 
sleep, but was awakened by Carlo’s low growl, who showed con- 
siderable uneasiness at certain sounds throughout the village, 
and, upon investigation, Jack understood that a great number 
of them were abroad, and gathering at the beach to see him 
and Nellie take their departure. 

Rising hastily, he soon gathered his traps together, and going 
to Nellie’s tent, found her waiting and nervous, being anxious 
to get off. 

“Have you everything ready, Nellie?” 

“Yes, Jack, I’m so anxious to get off before something hap- 
pens to detain us,” said she. 

“Quiet your fears, little sister, there will be nothing to prevent 
our getting away this time.” 

“Oh, I hope not, Jack.” 

“Never fear, Nellie, you’re only nervous. You’ve lost so 
much sleep, and you’ve gone through so much the past few 
days that you’re all unstrung. But come,” continued Jack, 
“we’ll get away now just as soon as we can, so that your mind 
may be at rest,” and picking up Nellie’s bundles they made 
their way to the boat that the savages had selected for them. 

They found quite a gathering at the beach. The chiefs were 
all there, and a great many of the others. They all came press- 
ing around Jack and Nellie, showing them great reverence. 


*55 


Bamboozling the Savages. 

Jack maintained his dignity among them and gave them to 
understand that he was not at all pleased with the part they had 
played toward Nellie and him. Besides, in his heart, he was 
anxious to get away. He was sick of the whole thing, and 
tired of playing the farce he had been compelled to do. But 
especially on Nellie’s account was he anxious to see the last of 
this people. So, with as little ceremony as possible, he handed 
Nellie into the boat, and calling Cark), he stepped in himself, 
and bidding them a brief adieu, pushed off, and was soon lost 
to them in the darkness. 


1 56 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 


CHAPTER XI. 

THE PIRATE’S DEN. 

NedEiE sat very quiet for some time, then she began to 
breath more freely. 

“Oh, Jack,” she said. “Are we really off?” 

“Yes, we're off this time, little girl, for good. We’ll not be 
troubled by that rabble again,” said Jack. 

“I feel like I didn’t ever want to see another savage again as 
long as I lived,” said she. 

“No, I expect you’ve had all the experience with them that 
you’ll ever want in this life, Nellie,” said Jack. “But little 
sister,” he continued. “You passed through the ordeal splendid- 
ly. You’re a brave little girl, Nellie.” 

“But I failed you at the last, Jack, and I promised you I 
wouldn’t.” 

“Not at all, Nellie. That was only the reaction when it was 
all over, and the danger had passed. Besides it was the best 
thing that could have happened.” 

“Why so, Jack?” asked she. 

“Well, I used the incident to our advantage and made them 
believe that you were dead, and that they had killed you, and 
dire vengeance would be meted out to them when their god 
knew what had happened,” said Jack. 

“But I came to, afterward.” 

“Yes, after I had asked their god to restore you, and that his 
vengeance would not fall upon them. I was a little afraid you 
might come to too soon and so spoil it all, and afterward again 


The Pirate’s Den. 


J 57 


I was a little alarmed at your long faint, but everything came 
out all right,” said he. 

Both fell silent and Jack rowed leisurely over the water. The 
gray of morning began to show, and soon the rising sun made 
his appearance. 

“Oh, Jack,” said Nellie. “That I believe is the most glorious 
sight I ever beheld. I never expected to see it again.” 

“It certainly is a glorious sight,” said he, “taking into con- 
sideration all that it means to us. That night,” he continued, 
“was the saddest night of my life.” 

“How thankful we ought to be,” said she, joyfully. 

“I hope we are, Nellie.” 

“Oh, Jack, I just begin to realize that I am free. I never 
knew what the word meant before. I feel as though a great 
weight that had been holding me down was suddenly lifted, and 
I believe that if I could only borrow a pair of wings somewhere 
that I could fly.” 

“Well, I hope you won’t fly away and leave me in the lurch,” 
said Jack, dolefully. 

Nellie laughed joyfully. 

“What would you do, Jack?” 

“I’m afraid I would try to come lumbering after, and would 
probably fall into the sea and get drowned,” said Jack. 

Again that merry peal rang out which did Jack good to hear. 

“Never mind, Jack, I won’t leave you yet awhile, but this is 
our island just ahead,” said she. 

Jack turned and saw that they had nearly reached the western 
shore of the island, and turning the canoe he rowed along the 
southern shore and beached it at the nearest point to the hut. 
He helped Nellie out. Carlo had already sprung out and ap- 
peared very glad to get home again. 

“Hello, old fellow,” said Jack. “Glad to get back again? 
Didn’t you like your visit to the savages? Well I didn’t like it 
much myself. 


158 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“Well, Nellie, we’ll take these things out of the boat, and then 
see if we can get some breakfast. Do you think you could 
manage to eat a little more than you did yesterday morning? 

“Oh, I could eat a cow,” said she, laughing joyously. 

“Well we haven’t any cows, that is, whole cows,” said he. “I 
believe we have some that’s been cut up, and put into cans. 
Perhaps a dozen or two of these might suit your ladyship,” 
said he. 

“Oh, I couldn’t stop short of a whole case,” said she. “Oh, 
Jack,” she continued. “I know I’m talking awful nonsense, but 
I’m just so happy. I must find some way of escape for the 
exuberance of my spirits.” 

“I’m awfully glad to see you in such spirits, Nellie,” said Jack, 
looking at her kindly. 

“And don’t you mind my nonsense a bit?” 

“Not a bit, I like nonsense sometimes,” said Jack. “In fact, 
I’m often taken that way myself. Even Carlo used to look at 
me reproachfully sometimes, when he thought I spread it on 
too thick.” 

Again that sweet, joyful laugh of Nellie’s pealed forth. 

“Don’t you like too much nonsense, Carlo?” she said. And 
taking his two forepaws in her hand she went dancing down 
the beach with him. 

After breakfast, at which they enjoyed a cup of good coffee, 
of which they had been deprived so long, Jack brought around 
the ship’s boat, and rigged a sail for it, using the same one he 
had made for the raft. 

“That will save lots of hard work,” said he, looking upon the 
result of his labor with satisfaction. 

“How far do you suppose we will have to go, Jack?” said she. 

“Don’t know, Nellie, but we want to get a good many miles 
from here. We want to get clean out of the range of these 
pesky savages anyhow; so that by no possibility we will ever 
come in contact with them again,” said Jack. 


The Pirate’s Den. 


l S9 


“There is no danger of them coming here and finding us 
before we can get away, is there Jack?” asked she, looking 
around apprehensively. 

“No fear of that,” said Jack. “For we will get away some- 
time to-day.” 

“Suppose they should come for worship?” 

“It is not their time for worship. No we’re well rid of them, 
Nellie, this time for good,” said Jack. 

Jack now began to load the boat with the stores. It was 
large and roomy, and by piling up the boxes and consolidating 
packages he found ample room for everything, leaving space 
enough besides for comfort. He loaded up everything except 
the plank that had formed the raft. He even cut away the 
tarpaulin from the frame supporting it, and folding the pieces 
neatly, made them into good comfortable seats. He also filled 
two casks with fresh water from the spring, and lashed them 
firmly to the mast. Along in the afternoon everything was 
completed, and they were ready for the start. 

“Well, Nellie, I believe we’re already now to start upon our 
unknown voyage.” 

“All right, Jack, I’m ready for any new adventure that isn’t 
mixed up with savages,” said Nellie. 

“I hope, too, that we may see no more of such ignorant 
idiots,” said Jack, savagely. 

Placing Nellie in the bow, with Carlo at her feet, who un- 
doubtedly preferred to remain on the island, he took up the oars 
and rowed around to the eastern end of the island, where the 
breeze caught the sail, and they started on their unknown 
voyage. 

The wind came from the northwest, and by keeping before 
it they traveled almost southeast. The breeze was stiff and 
they made good progress, and soon left the island far behind. 
And only a dark line on the horizon marked the place, and 


160 Haps and Mishaps of jack Haselton. 

finally this disappeared, and they were again on the ocean with 
nothing in view, but sea and sky. 

After a while Nellie began to show the weariness she felt. 
She had slept very little during the past two nights, and had 
passed through an ordeal that would have shaken the nerves of 
many a stronger person. As her head began to droop more and 
more, Jack saw how it was, and lashing the rudder to keep it 
steady, he unrolled the mattress, and laid it across the gunwales 
in the bow of the boat, and pressed it down in the center, thus 
leaving it partly curled, and very comfortable. Then placing the 
oars upright along the sides, he fastened over the ends a piece 
of tarpaulin to keep off the sun’s rays. Then giving Nellie a 
bundle for a pillow, he told her to crawl in and lie down, and 
get some of the rest she so much needed. 

“Sleep just as long as you can keep your eyes closed,” he told 
her, “for you need it, little girl, after all you’ve been through. 

“And then,” he continued, “you’ll wake up as fresh as a 
daisy.” 

“Oh, Jack,” she said, “you’re awful good to me, and I’m so 
sleepy I can scarcely keep my eyes open.” 

Jack went back and took the rudder again, and soon by 
Nellie’s regular breathing, had the satisfaction of knowing that 
she was fast asleep. 

The shadow of the sail lengthened out over the water. The 
sun went down in a western sea; twilight faded into darkness. 
The stars appeared one by one, and Jack still sat guiding the 
boat as she bounded gayly over the waters, and Nellie slept on. 

“Dear little girl,” soliloquized Jack, “the rest is doing her lots 
of good.” Then he remembered that this was the first time in 
his heart, that he had considered her as especially dear to him. 

“Yes,” he continued. “She certainly is becoming very dear 
to me, I wonder why? Is it just because she is so dependent 
on me, or must look to me alone for protection?” 

Then he tried to think how he would feel if it had been anyone 


The Pirate’s Den. 


1 6 1 


but Nellie who had been placed in this position with him. He 
called to mind all his young lady acquaintances and tried to 
place them, one by one, in Nellie’s position. But after think- 
ing the matter over, he concluded that there was no one under 
the same circumstances, that he would have the same feelings 
for. Then he tried to remember what his feelings had been 
before Nellie made her appearance. 

“How could I ever have been so satisfied alone with Carlo ?” 
he said. “Would I be as contented again, if by some means 
Nellie should be removed from my life? No, surely not, it 
would make all the difference in the world to me. But why, 
I wonder? Why am I becoming so fond of her? It must be 
just because she is so gentle, and sweet and brave, and every- 
thing that’s nice. How many girls that I have known would 
go through with what she has, with the same fortitude and 
withal, be so gentle and kind and unselfish? Yet, what a child 
she is. A mere child in many things, a very dear, sweet little 
child, but still a child.” And then other thoughts came. “But 
what is to be the outcome of it all ?” he said. “If you should suc- 
ceed in gaining the affections of this sweet child, what then 
Jack; what would happen then? You mustn’t for a moment 
forget that you’re under a ban. You know in the eyes of the 
world you’re only an escaped convict. You’re a jail-bird, old 
boy, that’s what you are, and you mustn’t for a moment forget 
it. It’s no use saying you’re innocent. That don’t go down 
with the people, you know ; so you’ve no right to look upon the 
pure, sweet little girl, of ever being anything to you. No, give 
it up Jack, it won’t do. Never in the world.” And then he 
sighed deeply. “No,” he said, “I must never let her know any- 
thing about it. It isn’t very likely that she would ever care for 
me anyway; so there can come no harm to her from it. I’m 
glad of that. And if there is to be any pain in it, it will only 
be for Jack, and I guess he can bear it, especially, if it’s a case of 
have to. Heigh ho, Jack, there’s more trouble before you, old 
11 


1 62 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

boy, which may prove the worst you’ve gone through yet. But 
you’ll have to take it like all the other things that come. But 
then there’ll be some sweet moments with it all, old fellow, even 
though more bitter ones are to follow just on account of the 
sweetness. But such is life, old boy, and you’ll have to take the 
bitter with the sweet. Well, I hope she may never know, 
dear little Nellie.” 

So Jack sat, soliloquizing, while guiding the boat, all through 
the long night, until the gray of the morning again appeared. 
And still Nellie slept on. When Nellie finally awakened, and 
sat up and looked around, the sun was just rising. 

“Why Jack,” she said, “I must have slept several hours, the 
sun has almost set.” Jack laughed, mirthfully. “Did you enjoy 
your rest, Nellie?” 

“Yes, I feel as fresh as I ever did. The sleep has all gone out 
of my eyes. I don’t believe I’ll be able to sleep a wink to-night.” 

“I guess you’ll be able to sleep when night comes,” said Jack. 
And Jack again laughed. “Jack, you’re teasing me some way, 
but I don’t just see how?” said she. 

“Does the sun usually set in the east?” laughed Jack. 

Then Nellie looked around, somewhat bewildered, and seemed 
to understand. 

“Jack, you don’t mean to say that that is the sun just rising, 
and that I have slept all night ?” 

Jack nodded his head several times, looking upon her be- 
wilderment with much satisfaction. 

“Is it possible, Jack? And have you been sitting there all 
through the night, while I slept?” 

Again Jack nodded. 

“And why didn’t you wake me, Jack? You must be tired out. 
I ought to have relieved you ; I can steer a boat when the waves 
don’t run too high. Harry taught me, you know,” said Nellie. 

“Oh, but you were getting your beauty sleep, little girl, and 


The Pirate's Den. 163 

you were nearly pegged out, and I knew how much good it was 
doing you, and was only glad that it was so,” said he. 

She looked at Jack, and flushed slightly. 

“You’re altogether too nice to me, Jack,” she said. “You 
must let me help you sometimes.” 

“Well, I’ll let you set out the breakfast things. I expect you 
must be hungry after your long fast. I wish we had some way 
of making some coffee. I think a cup of good coffee this morn- 
ing would about touch the right spot,” said he. 

“But I expect you’ll have to forego that this morning, Jack, 
unless you can drink cold coffee. There is still some in the 
pot from yesterday,” said she. 

“Yes, that’s just the thing. We’ll take it down anyhow, 
Nellie, even if it don’t taste very good, it’ll have the same effect 
afterwards.” 

So they had breakfast of canned meats, peaches, biscuits and 
cold coffee. 

“Now,” said Nellie, after the things were cleared away. 
“You must lie down and get some rest and let me steer the 
boat.” 

And Jack was willing, not only because he was very tired, but 
also because he saw that it would really please Nellie. 

He lay down and was soon in a deep, dreamless sleep. Nor 
did he awaken till along in the afternoon, when they had 
another meal, or rather a continuation of breakfast. 

“Isn’t it strange we don’t come across something, Jack? We 
haven’t sighted a sail or a bit of land since we started,” said 
Nellie. 

“Well, the ocean’s a pretty big stretch of water, Nellie, and 
we may have passed several ships, and land too, just beyond 
our reach of vision,” said he. 

“Yes, I suppose so,” said she. “Would you like to be picked 
up by a ship, Jack?” “I would rather it would be an outward 
bound from New York, Nellie.” 


164 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

Nellie looked at him intently. 

“But then,” he continued. “On your account I would be 
willing to board one even bound for that city.” 

“Yes,” she said, finally, “on account of your trouble.” 

Jack nodded, but did not say any more. 

That night Nellie woke several hours before daylight, and 
insisted on Jack lying down again. This he did this time 
entirely to please her, and slept until after the sun was up. 
Again they had breakfast, but had to drink water this time. Carlo 
spent most of the time sleeping in the bottom of the boat where 
Jack had made a bed for him. It was very evident he was not 
partial to ocean voyages. Towards noon they sighted a ship 
away off toward the horizon, and going their way, but the dis- 
tance was too great for such a small object, as they must have 
appeared upon the water, to attract attention. 

“I don’t suppose papa ever expects to see me again,” said 
Nellie, after a long silence. 

“No, I suppose he has given you up by this time,” said Jack; 
“so sometime you may be able to give him a very pleasant 
surprise.” 

“I wonder if I will ever see home again?” she said, sadly. 

“I hope so, Nellie, and indeed I think so too. For you see, 
we have plenty to keep us alive a long while, and it isn’t in 
reason to suppose that we can go on wandering around on the 
ocean forever without coming across some ship, bound for 
somewhere; so that I think the prospects of reaching home- 
sometime, are very good,” said Jack. 

“Yes, I suppose so,” said Nellie, after a short silence. 

Along in the afternoon they sighted land, off to the right of 
the direction in which they were sailing. Jack changed their 
course to bring them to a closer view of it. This proved to be 
quite a large island, a considerable portion of which consisted of 
hills, which attained to a considerable altitude. Off towards the 


The Pirate’s Den. 


165 

south could be seen a large forest of trees, some of immense 
growth. Jack concluded to land and make an investigation. 

“I hope there are no savages,” said Nellie. 

“If there are, we’ll not stay any longer than we can help,” 
said Jack. “The main point after finding if there are any in- 
habitants, is to find if there is some good water,” he continued. 

They beached the boat, and started to investigate. They 
ascended one of the highest of the hills, and found they had a 
good view of the whole island. It was much larger than any 
they had yet seen, being several miles in diameter in all direc- 
tions. The forest, they had observed, covered nearly the entire 
central portion, and extended towards the south, quite to the 
sea. They could see that the hill upon which they stood formed 
a part of a range of hills that extended nearly across the entire 
western end. They could see no signs of any inhabitants 
whatever. 

“Well, Nellie, if we can find water here, we had better make 
up our minds to stay,” said Jack. “At least for the present,” 
he continued. “If we find for any reason that it is not desirable, 
we can pull up stakes and leave.” 

“It doesn’t seem to be inhabited,” said she. 

“No, there are no signs of anything human,” said he, “and thus 
far it is just to our taste.” They found a good stream of water 
down towards the forest of trees, which was clear and cold, and 
by shaping out a basin to catch it, there would be a sufficient 
quantity for all purposes. 

“I think we’ll get the boat around to this side of the island 
and unload here under these trees,” said Jack. “It will also be 
handy to the spring, besides we must build our house somewhere 
among these trees.” After unloading the boat Jack found it 
was after four o’clock. 

“We won’t have time to build a house to-day, Nellie; so we’ll 
have to make shift the best we can till morning,” said he. 

“The first thing I guess will be something to eat. I’ll make a 


1 66 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

fire here and fill the coffee pot with some fresh water. We’ll 
have a good cup of coffee this time anyway,” continued he. 

“I wonder what you’ll do, Jack, when your coffee is all gone. 
You seem to be especially fond of it,” said Nellie. 

“Don’t know, Nellie,” said Jack, shrugging his shoulders. 
“One calamity at a time please. But we’ve got enough to 
last a good while yet,” he continued. 

After supper Jack lit a cigar and took a stroll through the 
forest to select a good place to build a house. 

“Wonder what I’ll make the frame of,” said he. “I haven’t 
any raft to break up this time. I expect I’ll have to cut down 
some of the younger trees to make it of. Well, I’ll have plenty 
to do to-morrow, I guess.” 

When he returned the sun was hanging low in the west. 

“Well, Nellie, we’ll have to rig up something for you to sleep 
on to-night,” said he. “I think I can fix it,” he continued. And 
taking a piece of tarpaulin he knotted on to each end a stout 
piece of rope. He stretched this between two trees at a proper 
distance apart, thus making a very comfortable hammock. He 
put in plenty of bed clothes to make it soft, and finally 
tested its strength by his own weight. ' Then taking another piece 
of tarpaulin he suspended it above this, and in such a manner 
that the sides hung down below the hammock, but not touching 
it by about a foot, thus making a coveringand at the same time 
admitting the air. 

“There, little girl,” said he, “with what bed clothes you need 
for covering I guess you’ll sleep like a top.” 

“Oh, that’s nice, Jack. But where are you going to sleep?” 

“Oh, any old place is good enough,” he said. “I’ll find a 
place to sleep all right, little girl, don’t you worry.” 

“There is plenty of material left ; why don’t you make yourself 
another just like it?” 

“Oh, it isn’t worth while,” said he. 

“But it was worth while to make it for me.” 


The Pirate’s Den. 


167 


“Oh, but that’s different, you see.” 

“I’m afraid I’m an awful bother to you, Jack,” said Nellie. 

“Now, Nellie, little sister, don’t you get that notion into your 
head, not for a little bit,” said he. “What I do for my little 
sister, I love to do, and I only wish there was more to do. But 
when it comes to Jack I don’t take the same interest to do 
things. Don’t you see?” 

“I see that you’re awfully nice to me, Jack.” 

There was something in her voice that made Jack look at her, 
and he saw her eyes were full of unshed tears. 

Carlo, at this time, set up a barking that proclaimed he had 
undoubtedly made a discovery of some kind. Nellie and Jack 
both stood up and looked in the direction of the diversion. 
Carlo was chasing some kind of an animal or large bird through 
the forest, which was very fleet of foot. The bird was taking the 
direction of a large circle, evidently having a nest it did not 
want to desert. Every now and then, when Carlo would get 
too near, it would make a vicious kick at him. Carlo was evi- 
dently, enjoying the sport immensely, but the bird seemed some- 
what distressed. 

“What is it, Jack?” asked Nellie. “Is it an ostrich?” 

“No, I don’t think it is,” said Jack. “It is what is called a 
Cassowary. It does not grow as large, quite, as an ostrich, 
although belonging to the same family. Then you see it has a 
hood-like covering over the head, which the ostrich does not 
have. It is very powerful, and, they say, can knock a man down 
by a single kick. It has a long, straight claw on its inner toe, 
which is quite a formidable weapon. It is fond of fruits and 
berries, but also will eat worms and insects. It*-© nest is a mere 
depression among the fallen leaves. The eggs are green, in 
color, and about five in number.” 

“Will it attack one?” asked Nellie. 

'‘No, not unless they arc disturbed, or their nests threatened 


1 68 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

to be robbed. They are naturally shy and timid, but very fleet 
of foot.” 

“What a large bird it is !” said she. 

“It is next in size to the ostrich, the largest bird in the world, 
sometimes growing eight feet high. While this bird is probably 
five or six feet,” said Jack. 

“Are there any more of them, do you think?” 

“Very probable, they inhabit thickets, and are often found in 
these tropical islands,” said Jack. “Come here, Carlo,” he con- 
tinued. “Come here, sir. That long-legged thing will kill you, 
if he gets a fair kick at you, old fellow.” 

Carlo obeyed, but he was loth to give up his sport, and 
watched the odd looking bird, until he disappeared in the 
thicket. They remained sitting on the beach until it began to 
grow dark. Then Jack helped Nellie into her swinging bed, 
placed the covering over her, tucked her in, and bade her good 
night. Then, throwing the mattress over some boxes, he lay 
down himself, and was soon asleep. - M 

The next morning after breakfast, Jack lit a cigar, and, pick- 
ing up the axe, started through the forest to cut down some 
young trees for the frame of his house. He had found two or 
three to suit his purpose, and, after cutting them down and 
trimming them, went forward in search of others. He kept on 
until he rather suddenly emerged from the forest, and found 
himself on the sandy beach of the western shore of the islands. 
High above him towered the rock hills that seemed from this 
side almost impossible of ascent. But proceeding along the 
beach he discovered a cleft in the rocks ; entering this cleft was 
a path that looked as if it might have been at one time well 
trodden. Following this path, which was very crooked, having 
many short and abrupt turns, he finally came out upon the 
center of the island, and not a great distance from the spring, 
near which he had determined to build his house. 

“Why Jack, old boy ? here is a short cut to the sea Qn this 


The Pirate’s Den. 169 

side. It might come handy sometime, who knows ? I wonder 
what the dickens that is,” he continued. 

He had discovered an opening in the hillside, which was 
partly covered by a large flat stone. This stone had evidently 
been used at one time to entirely cover the entrance to this 
hole. But the rains had washed away part of the earth upon 
which it rested, so that it had partly toppled over, disclosing 
the opening it was put there to conceal. Jack went forward 
and looked in. He saw a long tunnel-like aperture which 
seemed to 6pen out into a larger aperture further in, which 
seemed to be well lighted. He enlarged the opening a little 
and crept in. He went through this tunnel and found him- 
self in a large sized room, probably fifteen feet wide, by 
about forty feet long. This room was lighted by two large 
windows, arranged on a pivot so they could be swung partly 
open. These windows had apparently been taken from some 
ship’s skylight. The rocks and earth on the outside had been 
removed to give sufficient light. There was a large fireplace in 
between the windows and a rough chimney made of stone 
and smeared over with clay. Over the fireplace was a shelf, 
upon which were some old musty books. A pick and spade 
stood in one corner. A rude made cupboard stood in another 
corner, in which was an assortment of cheap table ware, and 
a box containing a miscellaneous lot of fishing tackle. A bottle 
stood on the shelf with a partly consumed candle stuck into the 
neck. 

“Well, Jack, what have you struck now?” said he. “This is 
somebody’s den, but I guess they haven’t been at home for a 
long time.” 

He picked up the books and looked them over. They were 
very old and gave evidence of their age. Most of them were 
tales of the sea. There was one old history of England. He 
turned to the fly leaf and found they once belonged to John 
Blackmore, Captain of the Black Cross. 


170 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“Hello,” said Jack. “What’s this? That’s the name signed 
to the secret cipher, old boy. This must have been his den. A 
pirate’s den. Well, I suppose old Capt. John is dead, and I can 
take possession of his castle, if I feel inclined. I wonder if I can 
find anything more about the cross and crown , now that I am on 
the island where the old captain lived. Maybe, sometime, I can 
figure that out,” said Jack. 

When Jack returned to Nellie he found her worried at his 
long absence. 

“Why, Jack, I did not know what had become of you,” said 
she. 

“I have been house hunting,” said he. “Did you ever go 
house hunting, Nellie, and don’t you remember how it takes up 
the time?” 

“Well, did you find a house to suit you, Jack?” 

“Yep, I found one to my liking, although the number of ropms 
are rather limited, but it is the only one that happens to be 
vacant just now; so I suppose we’ll have to put up with it, es- 
pecially as the landlord will make any alterations that we may 
want, and the rent is very reasonable.” 

“Jack, what on earth do you mean?” 

“Come and see,” said Jack. And picking up the spade he 
started off to show Nellie their new residence. 

“What are you going to do with that?” she asked. 

“Well, you see, the front door hangs on only one hinge, and 
so needs a little repairing,” said he. 

“Jack, I believe you are talking nonsense now.” 

“Never talked better sense in my life,” said he. 

•On arriving at the opening, Jack shoveled the dirt away and 
removed the stone that partly clogged the entrance, so that 
Nellie could enter. He then took her in and showed her the 
room he had found. 

“But, Jack, who made this place?” asked she. 

“Mr. John Blackmore, Captain of the Black Cross.” 


The Pirate’s Den. 


171 


“And who is he?” asked she. 

“I think he was a pirate, or a smuggler, something of that 
kind,” said Jack. 

“Oh, Jack, supposing he should come back.” 

“Not very likely, because he’s dead,” said he. 

Nellie looked around, and touched things with a look of dread 
upon her face. 

“Jack, how do you know so much about him?” 

Then Jack told her how he had found the parchment, with the 
cipher written upon it, and how he had succeeded in reading it, 
and how it had been signed by John Blackmore, and then, upon 
finding this place, he had found the same name written upon the 
fly leaf of the books. 

“And do you think that the cipher means that there is a hidden 
treasure somewhere?” asked she. 

“Undoubtedly,” said Jack. “At least it means that there was 
a hidden treasure hidden somewhere, but whether it has ever 
been dug up is another thing,” said he. 

“And you have never been able to locate this cross and 
crown?” asked she. 

“Never saw anything that looked like anything of the kind,” 
said Jack. 

“Do you suppose it can be upon this island, Jack?” asked 
Nellie. 

“Can’t say, Nellie. I had really given the thing up, and con- 
cluded it was a mystery beyond my comprehension, and so have 
not thought anything about it lately,” said Jack. 

“And are we to live here, Jack?” 

“Why, yes, Nellie. It’s probably better than anything I can 
build. I think I can make it very comfortable for us here,” said 
Jack, looking around. 

Jack opened the windows out and gave the place a good airing. 
Then he cleaned the place out thoroughly. He brought over all 
his stores from the beach. It was quite a good job, but he got 


172 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

everything moved by noon. They then sat down to the dinner 
Nellie had prepared. 

He spent the afternoon in fixing up the place to his taste. 
He made a room for Nellie by stretching tarpaulin across, 
taking in one of the windows. He made a door for her so she 
could fasten it by tying short pieces of rope together on the 
inside, thus giving her all the privacy she needed. 

He took the young trees he had cut down, and cut them into 
proper lengths, drove them into the ground for bedposts. 
He nailed to these two pieces lengthwise for rails. On the top 
of these he nailed some short cross pieces, making a good strong 
support for the mattress. Then, with plenty of bed clothes, 
Nellie was nicely fixed. 

He drove plenty of nails around for her to hang her things 
on. The mirror he hung in a good light near the window. 

"It must have been an inspiration when I put that looking 
glass on the raft,” said he. “For what account is a girl with- 
out it,” he continued, teasingly. 

“Do you think that’s all I’m good for, Jack?” 

“Excuse me, Nellie, I got the thing turned around, I should 
have said, what’s the use of a mirror without the pretty face of a 
girl to look into it?” 

“And what are you going to do when you want a mirror to 
see your own pretty face ?” she said, saucily. 

“Oh, me, I have to get along with the reflection from your 
bright eyes,” said he. 

“Jack, you’re in a new role, when you try to flatter,” said she, 
but her eyes were very bright indeed just now, as she gave 
him one swift fleeting look and then dropped them again over 
her flushed cheeks. 

Jack looked at her kindly out of his great honest gray eyes, 
then taking up the bucket, went to the spring for water. 

“Now, I guess I’ll knock together some kind of a bed for 


The Pirate’s Den. 


1 73 


myself,” said Jack, after he returned. “Pll make it over in this 
corner, and partition it off with some more tarpaulin. Then 
you see, Nellie, we’ll have three rooms to our castle, two bed- 
rooms and a dining-room and kitchen combined. Aren’t we 
getting up in the world, don’t you think?” 

“Yes, we’ll soon be millionaires, but we mustn’t let it spoil us, 
Jack, and cause us to look down upon our neighbors,” said she, 
laughing. 

“There is one of your neighbors now, protesting against any 
such slight,” said Jack, joining in her laugh, and pointing to 
the window. 

Nellie looked and saw a good sized monkey, staring in and 
chattering, and making grimaces, and twisting his head, while 
his little eyes roamed all about the room, as if trying to make 
out what kind of new neighbors he had got. 

Nellie laughed again, and went towards the window holding 
out her hand, but he scampered away, looking back and chatter- 
ing until he disappeared in the thicket. 

“I wonder if there are many of them here?” asked she. 

“Yes, there are a great many of them in the forest, of different 
varieties, together with large numbers of very beautiful birds, 
but I haven’t seen any reptiles yet,” said he. 

“Oh, I hope we won’t be bothered with anything of that kind,” 
said she. 

Jack now set to work putting up his own bed. He drove the 
posts in the ground, then nailed the rails on, as he had done for 
Nellie, then he cut a piece of tarpaulin the proper size, and 
nailed it firmly to these rails, thus forming a sort of a cot-bed. 
He partitioned off a small space around it with more tarpaulin ; 
thus making the three rooms intended. 

All the time Jack had been working, Nellie had not been idle. 
She had taken a needle and thread from some unknown 
repository among her own things, and had been sewing squares 


174 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

of tarpaulin together. And when Jack had finished his bed, she 
showed him a couple of pillows she had made, already for the 
stuffing. 

“That’s a good idea, little girl,” said Jack, “and I think I saw 
plenty of stuffing in the shape of some long moss, as I came 
through the forest, I’ll go and get some.” 

He soon returned with a quantity in the folds of a quilt he 
had taken for the purpose. 

“Now, I’ll stuff them so they’ll be full enough, but not too 
hard,” said he, “and then you can sew up the ends.” 

Jack now brought in all the stores and piled them in the front 
end as compactly as possible. 

Then they were ready for supper. 

“I guess, Nellie, we can soon have a change of diet. You 
must be getting tired of this canned stuff. There is quite a 
quantity of fishing tackle that I found here in one of the boxes, 
and we can have all the fish that we can eat, as soon as I get 
a little time. If the former owners of this deserted castle had 
only left us a gun and ammunition we might, also, have plenty of 
game,” said Jack. 

“Couldn’t you shoot something with your revolver, Jack?” 

Jack shook his head. “It’s altogether too uncertain,” said 
he. “I’d waste too many cartridges, and I want to keep all I’ve 
got. I might need them sometime for larger game, and need 
them awfully bad.” 

“To-morrow I must manufacture some kind of a table, if I 
can find anything among the drift-wood to make it of, and then 
we need a couple of chairs, and we can use the pillows for 
cushions,” said he, laughing. 

“Then, I might fix some kind of a door here,” said he, looking 
at the opening to the tunnel. “Oh, we’ll get fixed after while, 
Nellie.” 

“I think we’ll be fixed very nicely,” said she. 

They went to bed very early as Jack was very tired, and, as he 


The Pirate’s Den. 


*75 

bade her good-night, he laughed, as he handed her a bottle with 
a lighted candle stuck in the neck of it. 

“You’d better take this, Nellie, for I forgot to have the electric 
light turned on,” said he. 

They had an early breakfast the next morning, and had just 
finished, and Jack was in the act of lighting a cigar preparatory 
to going out, when there broke forth upon the outside, a harsh 
dissonant sound. It apparently was quite near. It resembled 
very much the bray of a jackass. They both stood rooted to 
the spot, completely dumfounded. Jack grasped his revolver 
and hurried out through the tunnel, leaving Nellie almost 
paralyzed with fear. Finally, she heard Jack laughing, and 
calling to her. She came forth trembling, but somewhat re- 
assured by Jack’s laugh. 

“What is it, Jack?” she said, looking around. 

“Behold the enemy,” said Jack, majestically, pointing up into 
a tree. 

Nellie looked and saw a large handsome bird, of bright 
plumage, sitting on a limb, and looking down at them curiously. 
The bird stretched itself up, lifted its head, and again gave forth 
that awful sound. 

“Oh, horrors,” said Nellie. “What a horrible sound to'come 
from such a beautiful bird.” 

“Don’t you like its music, Nellie? Well, it isn’t very har- 
monious,” said Jack. “It is what is called a Dacelo,” he con- 
tinued. “Its full name is Dacelo-Gigas, which being interpreted 
means, laughing jackass. Its cry, also, resembles that of the 
so called laughing Hyena. It makes this cry only in the early 
morning. It's a kingfisher, and lives on fish principally,” said 
Jack. 

“But what a beautiful bird to give such a horrid sound,” she 
insisted. 

“Well, it’s generally so the world over,” said Jack. “The 
best songsters are not often those of the brightest plumage. 


176 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

Perhaps the Creator wanted to even things up a little; so a 
plain bird, and otherwise unattractive, He made the sweet 
singer.” 

“I wonder if it stays here on the island?” said she. 

“Very likely,” said he. “IPs made for that forest, you see. 
But anyhow, if you hear the sound again, you needn’t be 
frightened.” 

“I don’t know, I believe that sound would startle me at any 
time,” said she. “How many strange things there are in this 
world, Jack,” she continued. 

Nellie went back to clear up the breakfast things, and Jack to 
find some wood to make the things they were in need of. He 
returned in about an hour with a pile of lumber on his 
shoulders, which he threw down outside on the beach. He 
concluded, with the material he had, it would be better to make 
a stationary table. After cutting legs the right length he took 
them in and drove them firmly in the ground, close to the parti- 
tion of Nellie’s room, so that it might be as much out of the 
way as possible. Around these legs he constructed a frame, 
and nailed on the top. The chairs he made were very simple, 
yet strong and durable. He took a board about fifteen inches 
wide and cut this about three feet long for the back. To the 
edges of this back, and at proper distance from the ground, he 
nailed flat-wise, two shorter pieces beveled at the opposite 
corners, in the form of a saw-buck ; then completed it by nailing 
a short piece across for a seat. He then made a door for the 
opening to the tunnel, cutting up an old shoe for the leather 
hinges. 

“I don’t know what you’ll do when you have company, Nellie. 
We’ve only got two chairs to sit on,” said Jack. 

“When young housekeepers haven’t got chairs enough,” 
laughed Nellie, “they give the company the chairs, and they 
sit on the bed.” 


The Pirate's Den. 


177 

“And this front door hasn’t got any night latch. How will we 
manage when I want to go to the lodge some night?” 

... “That will be a reason for you always to keep early hours, and 
keep away from the lodge/’ she said. 

Jack liked to talk such nonsense to Nellie; she always seemed 
to enjoy it. 

Carlo spent most of the time in wandering around and in- 
vestigating things on his own account. 

12 


i 7 8 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 


CHAPTER XII. 

JACK TAKES NEEEIE TO “MEETING.” 

The next morning Jack and Nellie were watching a ship, 
dimly outlined against the sky, away off on the horizon. It 
was too far off to signal, and so they could only watch it, as it 
gradually disappeared. As they turned away Jack called Nellie’s 
attention to another strange bird, sitting on one of the trees, 
at the edge of the forest, and near the den. “That is what is 
called an Aracari,” said he. “See the long white bill, with the 
blood red stripe along the middle. This bird is related to the 
Cuckoos. There is another variety, and very remarkable, called 
the curl crested Aracari, having the feathers on the top of its 
head beautifully curled.” 

“Jack, how do you know so much about all these birds?” 
asked Nellie. 

“Only by reading. These things are all new to me too. I 
never saw many of them before, only in illustrations, but when I 
see them, I recall their names, together with some other 
information in regard to them,” said he. 

“I saw a strange fish yesterday, while looking for lumber to 
make our table,” he continued. “Its body was as large as a 
tub, and it had a number of protuberances growing out from 
about the head, and I remembered it was a cuttle fish, and I think 
it is related to the devil-fish. But this variety is especially 
peculiar in the fact that it carries a sort of ink bag, filled with a 
brown substance, which it ejects when pursued, so as to conceal 
itself from view by discoloring the water around it. This sub- 
stance was once largely employed in making India ink, which 


Jack Takes Nellie to “Meeting.” 179 

is now made of lampblack. This fish grows to enormous size, 
often weighing many hundred pounds.” 

“How curious,” said Nellie. “And did you see it empty its 
sack, and discolor the water?” 

“No, it lay quite still for a few moments, and then gradually 
sank out of sight. To-morrow,” continued he, “we will take 
a walk through the forest, and see some of the strange things 
we're living among.” 

So after breakfast, the next morning, calling Carlo, they 
started off for their stroll through the forest. But before reach- 
ing the larger trees, they were startled by the tolling of a bell, 
clear and distinct, and apparently quite near. They looked 
towards the sea, expecting to see a ship, but there was nothing 
unusual to be seen there. They they looked at one another in 
wonder. The sound had ceased so they continued their way 
cautiously towards the woods. Again the sound was produced. 
This time undoubtedly coming from the woods, but they could 
see a considerable distance through the trees, and could dis- 
tinguish nothing that would produce the sound. 

Jack took his revolver in his hand, and they again went 
cautiously forward. Again the sound was heard tolling forth 
notes clear and distinct. They again looked around. They 
could not exactly locate the sound. It seemed to fill the air in 
all directions. 

“What can it be, Jack?” asked Nellie. 

“I declare, I’m stumped,” said Jack. “I can’t even tell the 
direction from which it comes.” 

“It surely was the tolling of a bell,” said Nellie. 

“I never heard a bell toll plainer in my life,” said he. “But 
who can be ringing it?” 

Again they advanced, cautiously looking in all directions. 

Again the bell tolled. This time evidently the sound pro- 
ceeded from above. And Jack looked up into the trees; after 


180 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

searching intently among the branches, he commenced to 
laugh. 

“Oh, Nellie, I’m afraid we’ll never get used to the strange 
sounds we hear here,” said he. 

“What is it, Jack?” 

“There sits the toller,” said Jack. “You see that bird up there 
on that second branch, with the horn-like appendage protruding 
from the top of his head, and standing straight up? That is 
what is called a Bell-bird, and you know how well he deserves 
the name, for you have heard the metallic sound of his voice. 
It is said that he can be heard distinctly for the distance of three 
miles. He has a broad and depressed bill, which is soft and 
flexible at the base. That horn-like appendage standing up 
about three inches, only rises thus when the bird is excited, and, 
when in this position, is filled with air. There is an Australian 
Bell-bird which produces a peculiar tinkling sound, but which 
cannot be heard at any great distance. It is an entirely different 
species from this.” 

“Isn’t it wonderful, Jack?” said Nellie. 

“Yes, we live in a world made up of wonders,” said he. 

They had been walking on through the woods all the time 
Jack had been talking, when he stopped rather suddenly and 
began to examine a small tree, with two or three pairs of oval 
leaflets, containing a certain kind of fruit in brown pods, from 
four to eight inches long, having a fleshy or meaty pulp. 

“Here is something interesting, Nellie,” said he. “This tree 
is called Carob or Algaroba. This fruit is supposed to be the 
same as that translated husks in the parable of the Prodigal 
Son, that he fed to the hogs, you remember. And it is also sup- 
posed by some that the locusts eaten by John the Baptist were 
these same pods. They are exported to Great Britain and the 
United States, under the name of locust beans.” He broke off 
some of the fruit and they ate some, and found it very agreeable 
to the taste. 


Jack Takes Nellie to “Meeting.” 1 8 1 

“Oh, Jack, how can you remember all these things?” asked 
she. 

“Well, they simply come to me. I have read a great deal 
about things in all parts of the world, and many of them I 
would forget entirely, if there was nothing to recall them to 
memory,” said he. “But you see, when I come across some- 
thing I have read about, it all comes back to me kind of 
naturally,” he continued. 

“How many interesting things there are, even on a deserted 
island,” said she. 

“Probably many more interesting things than places inhabited 
by civilized beings,” said Jack. “For we find things in their 
natural state just as the Creator made them.” 

They were wandering along leisurely while conversing thus, 
and Carlo, running here and there and poking his nose into 
every hole, was apparently enjoying himself immensely. 

“There is another strange bird,” said Jack, presently. “On 
account of the hood-like covering over its head, it is called the 
Umbrella bird, for this hood is supposed to shade the head like 
an umbrella.” 

Carlo now set up a great barking and whining that showed he 
had come across something that especially interested him. 

As they approached they found the object to be something in 
the trees. 

“Another monkey, I expect,” said Jack. And as they came 
nearer they saw, hanging back down, an animal of the monkey 
breed, with his head twisted around, making comical grimaces 
at Carlo, who resented such indignity. 

“That is one of the monkey breed called the sloth,” said Jack, 
pointing out the object to Nellie. “They are noted for sluggish- 
ness. The skull is oblong and compressed. They are not well 
adapted to progression upon the ground, the feet being turned 
inward, but are admirably fitted for life in the trees. Unlike 
all others of their kind, they cling to the branches with their 


i 82 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

back downward, and thus they progress, feed and even sleep. 
They rarely voluntarily descend to the ground, but proceed from 
one tree to another by the interlocking branches. 

“Come away, Carlo,” he continued. “You can’t reach that 
fellow.” 

Thus they wandered on through the forest. The trees con- 
sisted mostly of the palm family, and of many different varieties^ 
These varied greatly in size. Some were mere shrubs rising 
only a few feet above the ground, while the largest grew to a 
height of over one hundred feet. There seemed to be a great 
quantity of one species, the Calamus, a climbing shrub or 
vine. These were prickly and grew long and slender; some 
of them two or three hundred feet. There were also many 
cocoanut trees. 

“Just think, Nellie,” said Jack, “the many uses to which these 
palm trees can be put. There is probably no other plant that 
excels this in its importance to mankind. There is food, cloth- 
ing, shelter, furniture, utensils, tools, weapons, ornaments and 
medicine supplied by one or more species of this tree. This 
Calamus is what they make ratan of, and also cane for seats of 
chairs.” 

“And what immense leaves,” said she. “I suppose those are 
what they make palm leaf fans of.” 

“Yes^ only they select the smaller ones; some of those would 
make rather large fans, don’t you think?” said he. 

“I should say so. I can imagine you trying to use a fan several 
feet in diameter,” laughed Nellie. 

“Oh, Jack,” she continued, “what kind of a bird is that, sitting 
there on that lower limb with the awfully long tail?” 

Jack, after scrutinizing it a moment said, “that is most likely, 
what is called the Trogon, and is probably the most gorgeous 
of its kind. It is the Red-bellied Trogon, a bright metallic 
green above and red below. This is one of a family of birds 
common to the tropics, and is distinguished from all others, by 


Jack Takes Nellie to “ Meeting.” 183 

having the second, as well as the first toe, turned backwards. 
The bill is short, stout and broad at the base, with the edge more 
or less toothed. The wings are moderate and rounded. The 
legs are rather weak, and the tail elongated, as you say. There, 
I have repeated it to you, just about as I remember reading 
it,” continued he. “I think there was some more, but I have 
forgotten some of the points.” 

There were many more beautiful birds of all colors, and some 
of them very gorgeous, many of which Jack had never heard, 
and could not even give the names. They finally came out on 
the seashore at the western end of the island, and continued 
around towards the north. 

“Jack, don’t you think, among all these strange and beautiful 
things, it is curious we have seen no reptiles?” asked Nellie. 
“Nor a crawling thing of any kind?” 

“It is rather strange,” mused Jack. “Perhaps this is not the 
season for them, and they may be all in their holes hibernating.” 

“Well, I hope they may stay there,” said she, looking out over 
the sea. “Jack,” she continued, “there’s a fish flying through 
the air.” 

“Yes,” said Jack. “There are several kinds of flying fish. 
That one is called the Plying Gurnard or Dactylopterus. It is 
remarkable for its mailed head, and for the development of some 
of its fins. See what a brilliant colored little fellow, and how 
easily he flies above the water, just touching the summit of the 
highest waves occasionally. 

“Then there is another curious bird further out to sea. See 
it there, a little further to the right, and not much larger than a 
pigeon,” continued Jack. 

“That’s another long-tailed bird,” said he, “it is called the 
Tropic bird, probably because it is seldom seen anywhere else. 
See what snow-white plumage it has, with fine black markings 
above. Underneath, it is rose color. This one has a red bill, 
some have yellow. The two central tail feathers are longer than 


184 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

the others, and, from the faint suggestion of a marlin spike, this 
bird has been dubbed the Boatswain bird, by sailors.” 

As they continued along the north shore, Jack stumbled over 
a piece of timber, partly buried in the sand. Upon looking at 
it more closely he found it to be the flagstaff of some ship, which 
had probably been washed ashore and partly buried. 

“By the way, Nellie, that is something we want/’ said he. “If 
I can only get that to the top of one of those hills, HI put out a 
signal of distress. It may be seen by some passing ship which 
may come to our relief.” 

“That must be pretty heavy, Jack?” 

“Well, HI bring down the axe and cut off a piece long enough 
for the purpose. I guess you can find a shawl or something 
among those women’s things to put on the end of it.” 

“You want some bright color, don’t you?” 

“The brighter, the better. It would be seen at a greater 
distance,” said he. 

“I’ll see what I can find,” said she. 

They had now reached the den, and Nellie began prepara- 
tions for dinner. 

“Aren’t you tired after your tramp, Nellie?” 

“Not tired, but awful hungry, Jack.” 

“I’ll try for some fish after dinner, so that we can have some- 
thing to eat except this canned stuff,” said Jack. 

The lines he selected were good stout ones, many hun- 
dred feet in length, and coiled on large reels, which could be 
fastened to the sides of the boat. He caught a quantity of 
clams along the shore for bait ; then, taking the boat, rowed out 
to deep water. He put out two lines, after fastening the reels 
securely to the gunwale of the boat. He ran out about a hun- 
dred and fifty feet of line, but the water was so deep that the 
lines hung straight down in the water. He soon caught a 
number of mullet, an excellent fish for food. He also caught 


Jack Takes Nellie to “ Meeting.” 185 

several fish of the mackerel family, called Cero, a large fish; 
also good eating. While taking one of these off the hook, he 
saw the line that was still in the water slowly reeling out. This 
proved to be a soft-shell turtle weighing about ten pounds. 
Jack had enough fish to last for some time, and, as the sun 
was hanging low in the west, he concluded to quit for the day. 
After he had prepared for Nellie to fry all the fish they could 
possibly eat, he made a fish box, in which he put the fish they 
could not use, and pushed it into the sea after anchoring it 
to the shore with a strong piece of rope. 

The next morning Jack set up a signal of distress on one 
of the highest hills, making a flag out of a bright red shawl that 
Nellie had found for him. 

They had been about three months in their new habitation, 
during which time they had lived comfortably, if not luxuriously, 
varying their diet of canned goods with plenty of fish, turtles, 
oysters and turtle eggs, which Jack found in abundant quantity 
in the sand between the crevices in the rocks, on the western 
end of the island. 

Jack had made a good trap for catching the smaller turtles. 
He selected the widest board he could find among the drift, 
then taking some large-size fish-hooks, with eyes to them, he 
nailed these all along the sides and ends of the board, a few 
inches apart, with the hooks turned upward. He nailed this 
board to a heavy log and weighted it so that the board side 
would remain uppermost; then tied a rope to it and pushed it 
into the sea. The turtles would climb over these hooks to 
get onto the board to sun themselves, but when they tried to 
slide back into the water they would get caught every time. 

Jack brought in one day some kidney-shaped nuts and laid 
them on the table. 

“What are those, Jack?” asked Nellie. 

“Those are Cashew nuts,” said Jack. “They grow on a tree 


1 86 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

about fifteen feet high, which bears evergreen leaves, and sweet- 
scented flowers. They contain a kind of sweet oil, resembling 
olive oil.” 

“Are they good to eat?” asked she. 

“Yes, after roasting, which expels the caustic oil from the 
shells. Come, we’ll try some,” said Jack, and raking the coals 
together on the hearth, he put the skillet on, and soon had the 
nuts roasted to a turn. 

“How do you like them?” asked Jack, after Nellie had tasted 
them. 

“They have a kind of acid flavor,” said she. 

“Yes, but rather pleasant,” said Jack. “But you will always 
have to be careful in roasting them,” he continued; “they are 
related in some way to the sumac and poison-ivy, and, al- 
though perfectly harmless when roasted, the fumes from them, 
when cooking, are apt to inflame your face, and more especially 
your eyes.” 

“I don’t believe we had better bother with them then, Jack.” 

“No, I only brought these in, more as a curiosity than any- 
thing else,” said he. 

One morning, soon after this, Jack had taken out the almanac 
to mark the day of the month. 

“What day of the month is this, Jack?” asked Nellie 

“This is Sunday, the eleventh of January,” said Jack. 

“Sure you’ve never missed any days, Jack?” 

“No, I’m very particular about it now, as it proved a matter 
of such vast importance to us once. I’ve been very careful 
since to be correct, not that I think it will ever be of so much 
importance again, but I regard it now as a matter of principle.” 

“I understand; but, Jack, this is last year’s almanac,” said she. 

“Yes, I know; I always have to count one day ahead for the 
day of the week; so this is Sunday, January the eleventh, and 
if you’re a right good little girl, and wash your hands and face 


Jack Takes Nellie to “Meeting.” 187 

real clean, and put on your best bib and tucker, I’ll take you 
to meeting with me,” said Jack. 

“All right, Jack, but where is the meeting-house?” 

“I’ll take you there all right,” said Jack. 

“What nonsense is this now, Jack?” asked she. 

“It’s no nonsense this time, little girl; I’ll take you to a reg- 
ular, morning service.” 

“And will you be the preacher, and I the congregation ?” she 
asked, laughing. 

“Not a bit of it; that isn’t in my line; the preacher will be 
there though, all right.” 

“Jack, you’re laughing at me;” said she. 

“No, Nellie, I’m laughing at your puzzled expression ; but I 
mean just what I say; if you’ll go with me, I’ll take you to a 
very instructive and entertaining, morning service,” said Jack. 

“Well, I’ll go, of course; but I know it’s some mischief you’re 
up to, and you’ll only laugh at me afterwards,” said she. 

“No, Nellie, I’ll promise not to laugh at you for coming, for 
there’ll be nothing to laugh at, for it’s a genuine service, 
preacher and all.” 

“All right, Jack, I’ll go. When does your mysterious service 
begin?” asked she. 

Jack looked at his watch. “Well, there is plenty of time, but 
we had better start early, so as not to disturb the congrega- 
tion.” 

Nellie looked at Jack, nonplussed. She did not know what 
to make of it. Of course, there could be no morning church 
service away off there on that deserted island. But Jack was 
so earnest in declaring it a regular service, and did not act at 
all as if he were playing some nonsense off on her ; and, of 
course, she would go. Her curiosity was excited, and she was 
anxious to know what he meant; so they started leisurely for 
the woods. 


1 88 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“Is your meeting-house in the woods, Jack?” 

“Don’t ask any questions, little girl,” said he, “or I’m afraid 
I’ll be so impolite as not to answer them. But there is one 
thing I can assure you, Nellie; that is, that you’ll be very much 
impressed.” 

“Where’s Carlo?” said she, finally. 

“I shut him up before starting. You know it is not proper 
to take dogs to meeting, they might disturb the service.” 

“Oh, Jack, look at that beautiful bird. Did you ever see 
anything to compare with it. Oh, Jack, could anything be 
more beautiful?” said Nellie. 

Jack looked at it intently, “Well, Nellie, I’m glad you’ve seen 
one of those birds. It’s probably the most handsome bird the 
Creator ever made. It is called the bird of the gods, and be- 
longs to the birds of paradise. You see the body is small, but 
the tail feathers are so long, that, from point of beak to tip of 
tail, the length must be at least four feet. Nature seems to 
have painted this bird in her most gorgeous colors,” said Jack. 

“See what a glittering green are the head, neck and breast,” 
said she, “and the feathers that cover these parts seem as soft 
as velvet,” she continued. 

“Yes,” said Jack, “and the back is a changeable violet, and 
the wings are of the same color, and, in the different lights, seem 
to change into blue violet or deep black; always, however, 
imitating velvet.” 

“And look at the long, beautiful tail,” said Nellie. 

“Yes, it is composed of just twelve feathers, violet above and 
black beneath; and see, Nellie, they shine with the brilliancy 
of polished metal. Then, the feathers above the wings are of 
the color of polished steel, changing into blue and terminating 
in a large spot of brilliant green. Then below the wings spring 
long curved feathers, directed upwards. These are black on 
the inside and brilliant green on the outside; the bill and feet 
are black,” 


Jack Takes Nellie to “Meeting.” 189 

The bird here arose in the air, and disappeared in the neigh- 
boring thicket. Nellie watched it as far as she could see it, and 
then heaved a deep sigh. 

‘T never expect to see anything so beautiful again, Jack, as 
long as I live, ,, said she. 

“No,” said Jack, “there are a great many beautiful birds, but 
probably that is the most handsome.” 

“I’m awful glad I came with you, Jack. You can make fun 
of me now if you want to, I won’t mind,” said she, smiling up 
into his face. 

“But I didn’t bring you here to make fun of you, Nellie. I’m 
going to show you something just as interesting, only in a dif- 
ferent way, as that you have just seen,” said he. 

“Whatever can it be, Jack?” 

“Well, we have arrived at the meeting-house. We are still 
a little early, but it is better so. Now we’ll just take a seat on 
this log, and keep right still, and soon you’ll see something that 
will both interest you and also greatly surprise you,” said Jack. 

They sat down upon the log, Nellie’s curiosity excited to the 
highest pitch, but she kept very quiet, only turning to look at 
him once in a while. 

Pretty soon Jack whispered, “Here comes the preacher.” 

Nellie looked and saw a monkey, about as large as a fox, and 
covered with long, glossy, black hair. He had sparkling, black 
eyes, a circular beard around his throat, small, round ears, and 
a very long tail. 

Nellie looked at Jack, and was about to charge him with a 
very tame joke, when he silently pressed her hand to be silent. 
They were sitting behind a screen of foliage, and could see out 
very plainly without being seen. Soon others of the same 
breed began to appear, until there had gathered perhaps fifty 
or sixty. Nellie was now watching open-eyed and wonder- 
ing. The leader now ascended one of the tallest trees, and 
the others immediately ascended the surrounding trees, but 


190 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

took positions lower down. Then they looked around and 
waited until there was perfect silence. When satisfied, the 
leader opened with a continuous howl. The preacher then 
waved his hand, and the congregation took up the refrain, and 
chanted a response. When this had been continued to the 
end of the ritual, the leader waved his hand for silence, and 
proceeded to pronounce the benediction, when they all dis- 
persed. 

Jack looked at Nellie and laughed. Her eyes were wide with 
wonder, and her whole countenance expressed the utmost aston- 
ishment. 

“Jack,” she said, as they arose, “I don’t understand it.” 

“You mean,” said Jack, “that they didn’t carry on the service 
in a language familiar to you.” 

“No, I mean I don’t understand. What do they mean by it, 
Jack?” 

“That’s more than I can tell you, Nellie.” 

“But do they really have service, Jack?” 

“Well, it looks that way, don’t it?” ^ 

“But how can they understand?” said she. 

“That’s what I don’t know,” said Jack. 

“If they were a lot of tame monkeys, one might think that 
they had seen a church service somewhere, and were trying to 
imitate it, but a lot of wild monkeys, away off here on a deserted 
island. Jack, if I hadn’t seen it with my own eyes, I believe I 
would have even doubted your word,” said Nellie. 

“That is why I wanted you to see it for yourself,” said he. 

“You have seen them go through this ceremony before?” 
asked she. 

“Yes, that performance of theirs is an unvarying feature of 
each day’s existence.” 

“You don’t claim then that they can tell the days of the week, 
and reserve their service only for Sunday?” said she. 

“Hardly,” said Jack. “No, they go through the same exer- 


Jack Takes Nellie to “ Meeting.” 19 1 

cises every day. No one knows what they mean, or how they 
ever came to take up this form of service. All that any one 
knows is that they do apparently go through a performance that 
resembles some form of church service/’ said Jack, “and that’s 
the reason they are called the Preachers,” he continued. 

“Is that the name of them, Jack?” 

“Yes, they are called the Preachers, and are the only monkeys 
known to have a service of this kind. I don’t know whether 
the same one is the leader every day, or whether they take 
turns about,” said Jack. 

“Well, I am surprised, Jack.” 

Jack laughed, “Do you feel like you had been to church?” 
asked he. 

“Well, hardly that, Jack, but do you think that a tame monkey 
could have, at some time in the past, escaped from captivity and 
taught these wild ones that service?” asked Nellie. 

“It might have been,” said Jack, thoughtfully; “monkeys are 
-sometimes brought aboard ships by their owners, and it may 
be that such a one escaped in some way in times past, and 
taught the wild ones some of his tricks, and this service may 
have been one of them, and the descendants may have been 
taught to keep it up. But if that is so,” he continued, “it must 
have been a long while ago, for this island is not the only place 
where this breed of monkeys is found. It is found in Brazil, 
Guiana, and probably some other countries. So there must 
have been time enough for them to become pretty well scat- 
tered. Any way you fix it, it is a puzzle,” he still continued. 

After dinner they climbed one of the high hills, and spent 
the afternoon there, in looking out over the ocean, and watch- 
ing the kingfishers catch their prey. Occasionally a flying- 
fish would make its appearance, and once a whole school of 
flying gurnards arose from the water, and, after flying 
through the air a considerable distance, again disappeared 
beneath the waves. 


iy2 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“I’ve seen a great many strange things since I’ve been on 
these islands/’ said Nellie. 

“Yes, there are many strange and curious, as well as many 
beautiful, things here, but if we could only go down into the 
depths out there and be permitted to walk around on the bot- 
tom of the sea, we would see more curious and beautiful things 
than the mind can concieve of,” said Jack. “It is said that 
the most elaborate gardens, consisting of the most beautiful 
flowers, cannot compare with jvhat is found there; then there 
are fish which are just as beautifully colored as the most hand- 
some birds pf paradise. Then there are all kinds of curious 
animals, and some very hideous ones, too, that would probably 
give you the nightmare to think of,” he continued. 

“I would love to see those all very much, if I would not 
have to go down into the water. If you were only a magician 
and could conjure them all up to the surface for me to see, 
now,” said she. 

“I’m afraid they wouldn’t come at my bidding, Nellie,” he 
said. “In fact, there are a great many of the inhabitants of 
the deep sea that never come to the surface at all, and are only 
seen by divers, whose vocation takes them down to where they 
are,” he continued. 

“I should love to go down in a diver’s suit, Jack, if I was not 
afraid. I wonder,” continued she, “if a woman ever did so ?” 

“I don’t know,” asid he, “I never heard of a woman doing so ; 
but I shouldn’t wonder if they have ; women are doing all sorts 
of things now-a-days,” he continued. 

When the shadows began to lengthen they returned to the 
“den.” 


CHAPTER XIII. 


ATTACKED BY PIRATES. 

A EEw days after Jack came in and laid upon the table some 
large round objects, covered with a rough rind, deeply ridged 
with lines running irregularly, and weighing about four pounds. 

“Why, Jack, what have you got now?” asked Nellie. 

“Just wait a little, Nellie, and you’ll have some fresh bread 
for dinner; won’t that be a treat?” said Jack. 

“Indeed it would, Jack, but how can you make bread out of 
these?” asked she. 

“It’s already made; all it wants is baking,” said Jack, “and 
as we have no oven connected with our range I’ll have to con- 
struct one outside, I guess,” he continued, and taking the spade, 
he made the proper excavation in the hillside. He then con- 
structed an oven out of large, smooth stones, with a fire-place 
underneath, and chimney at the back. He made up a good fire, 
and when the oven was good and hot he cut up the curious 
objects into quarters and placed them inside, and when they 
had baked he brought them in to Nellie, who had been prepar- 
ing the rest of the meal. They found the pulp white and mealy, 
and very nutritious, and very much resembled white bread. 

“Isn’t it good?” asked Jack. 

“Why, it’s just lovely, Jack. What is it?” 

“It’s bread-fruit,” said Jack. “You undoubtedly have often 
heard of it. It grows on trees forty or fifty feet high. There 
are quite a number on the island. I have been watching the 
ripening of the fruit for some time. I wanted to give you a 
pleasant surprise. It is better when it is picked just right. The 
13 193 


194 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

pulp is juicy and yellow when it is fully ripe, but it is in a better 
condition before it arrives at the stage of maturity. Then, when 
it is cooked, it is white and mealy, as you see.” 

“But we can’t have bread all the time then, Jack. It will soon 
be too ripe,” said she. 

“I guess most of the time, Nellie. I intend to pick it before 
if gets too ripe, and thus it will probably keep a good while. 
Then the trees bear two and three crops a year, so I think we 
can have bread most of the time,” said Jack. 

“Well, it’s a great acquisition to the table,” said she. “Per- 
haps, Jack, if you look you can find a butter tree, too,” she 
continued, laughing. “Or a gravy tree,” added she; “where 
the gravy grows in little shell-shaped bowls. I wouldn’t be 
very much surprised, Jack, really. Indeed, I think I’m getting 
beyond being surprised at anything.” 

“Well, there are always a great many surprising things to 
any one who happens to be, for the time, in a strange country,” 
said Jack, as he started for the spring. 

And so the days passed into weeks, and the weeks into 
months, until, one day, while marking the almanac, Jack asked 
Nellie if she had any idea what the day of the month was. 

“No,” said she, “I’m afraid I couldn’t even tell the month of 
the year.” 

“It’s the fifteenth of May,” said Jack; “It’s nearly a year,” 
he continued, “since I left civilization.” 

“And about eight months since I left home with my aunt 
to go with her to Australia. Dear Papa, I don’t expect he ever 
thinks to see me again,” she said, sadly. 

“Well, as I said before, you may have a very pleasant sur- 
prise for him some time,” said Jack. 

“Jack, do you really believe that we will ever get away from 
here ?” 

“Sometime, undoubtedly; there must be a ship pass near 
enough to sight our signal,” said Jack. 


l 9S 


Attacked by Pirates. 

“Fve got so used to this kind of a life that it would seem 
strange to go back to correct table manners, and especially to 
the etiquette of the drawing-room,” said she. 

“It would soon come natural to you though,” said Jack. 

They had been roaming over the hills, and were returning 
through the woods; Carlo, as usual, enjoying himself in his 
own way. 

“Oh, Jack, there is another beautiful bird,” said Nellie, 
“though not a very large one.” 

“Yes,” said Jack, “that is called the Star Throat, or Angel 
Hummer. The bill is very long, to enable it to reach the bot- 
tom of the flowers, for it is one of the honeysuckers, but it 
also eats insects.” 

“But, just see,” said Nellie, “what a beautiful color it is.” 

“Yes,” said Jack, “the plumage is very beautiful. The head, 
you see, is a metallic green, which changes to blue and gold. 
The back is of a golden sheen, and the wings and tail of a 
variable purple black, and seal brown. The center of the 
throat is a brilliant crimson, edged with feathers tipped with 
blue, and on each flank is a tuft of white feathers.” 

“And how beautifully they all harmonize,” said Nellie. 

“Yes, Nature is an adept at harmonizing colors,” said he; 
“she never makes mistakes, when she wants to please the eye.” 

“Oh, there are so many beautiful things in this world, Jack, 
that I could never tire of it,” said she. 

“Yes, it is certainly full of beautiful objects,” said Jack, “and 
some very curious ones too.” 

“Yes; now look at that parrot, Jack, with the curved bill; I 
never saw one like that before.” 

“That is what is called the Hyacinth Parrot,” said Jack. 
“He’s an unsociable kind of a fellow and never associates with 
others in flocks, like most of the species. Perhaps, though, it 
is only because they are so scarce, for they are rarely seen. 
Its peculiarity is found in its curved bill, as you have noticed, 


196 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

which, instead of curving and pointing downward, as in all the 
other members of the parrot family, the curve is continued 
until the point of the beak is directly under the throat, describ- 
ing nearly a half circle. 

“Then,” continued Jack, “there is another parrot sitting up 
on that limb above, looking so wondrously wise. That is 
called the owl parrot, and is a kind of combination of the owl 
and parrot. The head, especially about the eyes, is peculiarly 
owl like, and its habits largely nocturnal. The wings are small, 
so that its flight is restricted to short distances. In captivity it 
shows a kindly disposition, and all the playfulness of a young 
kitten.” 

They sauntered along through the forest, enjoying the re- 
freshing coolness after the heat of the day. Carlo had entirely 
disappeared, as he had been in the habit of doing occasionally ; 
and now, as they emerged from the forest, they were com- 
pletely dumfounded to see a ship standing off nearly a mile 
from the island, and apparently at anchor. 

“Oh, Jack,” said Nellie, “do you think we will be able to 
get away?” 

Jack had not taken his eyes off of the ship since he first 
sighted it. He did not immediately answer Nellie, but con- 
tinued to regard the ship intently. 

“Do you think we will be able to get away, Jack?” she re- 
peated. 

“I don’t know, Nellie,” said Jack. “Somehow I don’t just 
like the looks of that brig It’s painted black, for one thing, 
but that may not amount to anything. But somehow I don’t 
like its general appearance. They have probably sent a boat 
ashore, and we want to be careful, and find out if we can what 
kind of people they are before making ourselves known. We 
will slip around behind the rocks,” he continued, “and perhaps 
get a view through the windows.” 

The twilight was very short in this region, and it was grow- 


Attacked by Pirates. 197 

ing dark very fast. They waited until it was entirely so, and 
then slipped around to the nearest window and peeped in. 
This proved to be Nellie’s window, and all was dark inside. 
So they proceeded to the next one. This window was swung 
partly open, and they heard the sound of men’s voices before 
reaching it. Upon getting a view of the room, they saw that it 
contained four rough looking characters. A short, thick-set 
man with short, stubble whiskers, and a tall, slim man with a 
heavy mustache were sitting, each on an end of the table. The 
two others occupied the chairs. All had on heavy, red shirts, 
and looked like a disreputable lot. They had a bottle on the 
table and two lighted ship’s lanterns. They were at present 
engaged in testing the contents of the bottle, passing the liquor 
around in tin cups. 

“Well,” said the tall man, “we’ve had enough of this stuff; 
we came here for business.” 

“Well, haven’t we been attending to business?” asked one 
of those in the chair. 

“But we haven’t accomplished anything yet,” said the tall 
man. 

“Well, I don’t know what else we can do; we’ve looked 
everywhere for what we came for, and it isn’t here.” 

“I believe Pete here has been giving us a fairy tale,” said 
the tall man, “and I tell you what, Pete,” he continued, “if 
you go back to the captain without that secret cipher you 
promised him, he’ll skin you alive, man. He’s come hundreds 
of miles out of his course on your promise of securing this 
treasure, through the means of this cipher, and now it’s not 
here.” 

“Well, how can I help that?” said Pete. “You see,” he 
continued, “I was nothing but a kid when it all happened. I 
ran away from home and joined the pirates.” 

“That’s a likely story,” said the tall mam “Pirates don’t' 
take kids.” 


19S Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“Did I say I asked them to?” said Pete, angrily. “I went 
as a stowaway,” he continued, “and never showed up till way 
out at sea. They were going to make me walk the plank at 
first, but the captain happened to need a cabin boy, so he gave 
me the birth, with nothing for pay but knocks and cuffs. Well,” 
he still continued, “I remember it all well enough if I was 
only a kid. I had been with them for several months, when 
it all happened. This cave was a secret hiding place for things 
that were captured, and the captain lay up here sometimes, too, 
while he was changing his ship; repainting and changing sails, 
so that it would not be recognized.” 

“Well, get on with your story, don’t be so long-winded 
about it.” 

Nellie grasped Jack’s arm and whispered, “Are they the 
pirates, Jack? Isn’t there danger of them seeing us here?” 

“No,” he whispered softly, “it’s too dark, and we’re in the 
shadow of those big rocks above.” 

“Oh, I’m afraid of them, Jack.” 

“We’ll get away before there is any danger,” said Jack. “If 
we should have to run for it, go down through the passage 
through the rocks, and get into the boat, but don’t be afraid, 
Nellie ; I won’t let danger come to you.” 

Pete had continued his story, and was saying, as Jack turned 
to the window again : 

“Well, one day the captain was a good many hours writing 
out something on a piece of parchment. I didn’t know, of 
course, at the time, what he was doing, but found out after- 
ward he was writing this secret cipher. He had several papers 
with figures and some writing on them, and he was making 
strange looking marks upon the parchment.” 

“How do you know there was any treasure at all ?” asked the 
tall man. 

“Oh, as to that, I guess there was no secret about it,” said 
Pete. “Everybody aboard the ship knew the captain had a 


Attacked by Pirates. 190 

strong, Wotidetl b6x, filled with stones that he had been years 
in collecting. So one day, when the captain took this box, 
and got into a boat, with only one man with him, and was gone 
nearly all day, and came back without the box, nor the man 
neither, everybody knew just about what had happened.” 

“He did not bury it upon this island then?” 

“No, and that was what the cipher was for, to show where it 
was buried.” 

“How do you know the captain never dug it up again?” 

“I know it because I was with him until his death, and know 
that he never recovered it.” 

“How did he die?” asked the tall man. 

“He went ashore on an island one day, and was killed by 
some savages in hiding there.” 

“When the captain came back alone that day, did no one ask 
him what had become of the seaman who had went away with 
him?” asked the tall man. 

“Yes, one man, but he didn’t repeat the question.” 

“What did the captain answer?” 

“He turned and looked the man over from head to foot, and 
said, ‘If you want to find that man, I’ll send you where you can 
find him, quicker than you’ll ever return.’ But the man wasn’t 
at all anxious to find him.” 

“Well, how are you going to fix it with the captain? You 
know you can’t produce this cipher, and so can’t tell where to 
find this treasure, and you’ve brought him all this distance out 
of his way. It’ll be a pretty tough job to even things up with 
him, I’m thinking.” 

“I intend to even things up in a different way.” 

“How’s that?” 

“Well, whoever are the present occupants of this den, one of 
them is evidently a woman, and by the looks of the shoes she 
wears, and the dresses she’s used to, she is probably young and 
handsome, and I propose to take her back with me to the 


aoo 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

captain for a new wife. Pm going to have a look at her any- 
way. I know about what will suit the captain, and if she’s any- 
thing of a beauty I’ll take her along to appease him.” 

“That’s just the thing,” said the others. “A new wife would 
make things straight with him, when nothing else would.” 

“Well, I wonder how long we’ll have to wait before these 
present occupants arrive,” said the tall man. 

“Oh, Jack,” whispered Nellie, turning her terror-stricken 
face to him. 

Jack understood that she turned to him for the help she 
needed, and the best that was in him rose to the occasion. 

“Poor, little girl,” he whispered, tenderly. “They shall never 
take you, dear. Don’t be afraid, Nellie, but listen. Make your 
way, as quickly and quietly as you can, through the passage in 
the rocks, to the boat upon the beach, and IT1 follow, and we’ll 
get away in the darkness.” 

But, as ill-luck would have it, Carlo, who had been missing 
for hours, now returned, and, unnoticed by Jack in the dark- 
ness, made his way to the window, and when he saw the un- 
welcome visitors, emitted a low growl. 

Immediately all four were on their feet. Two of them 
grasped the lanterns, and all rushed out through the tunnel. 

Meantime, Jack had hurried Nellie on towards the passage in 
the rocks, and had just reached the entrance, when the foremost 
of the pirates appeared with a lantern, held high above his head. 

“There they go,” he shouted, “taking the path through the 
rocks. Shoot the man, but capture the girl. No harm to her, 
remember.” 

Jack had hurried Nellie on into this path, full of short turn- 
ings and crooked ways, and was following close behind her, 
with his revolver clutched in his right hand. 

“Keep right on, Nellie, as quick as you can, but don’t 
stumble in the darkness. Keep your nerve, little girl,” he thus 
encouraged her. 


Attacked by Pirates. 201 

Jack had one disadvantage in this mad race, as well as one 
great advantage. The pirates could make better progress be- 
cause they had the light from the lanterns to guide them. At 
the same time Jack could see them whenever the short turn- 
ings permitted, on account of this light, while he remained in 
darkness. He succeeded in keeping Carlo before him, thus 
far, although much against the dog’s will. But Jack did not 
want him killed needlessly, which he knew would be his fate, 
if left to attack these desperate men. They had not gone very 
far before Jack was satisfied that the pirates were gaining on 
them, and was satisfied that he and Nellie would never be able 
to reach the boat before being overtaken. Then he decided 
that if he had to fight these four men, which he would certainly 
have to do, this defile would be the best place to do so, because 
they could only approach him one at a time. So, sending Nellie 
on, he stopped at a sudden turn in the passage, and concealed 
himself behind an immense rock, and waited for the first man 
to show himself at the other end. And no sooner did he make 
his appearance, shouting for the others to hurry up and not let 
the prey escape, when Jack took deliberate aim and fired. The 
man threw up his hands, smashing the lantern, and fell forward 
on his face. 

Jack now ran forward to overtake Nellie and reassure her, 
knowing she would be terribly frightened at hearing the shot. 
He found her almost paralyzed with fear. 

“Oh, Jack, you aren’t shot, are you?” said she. 

“No, Nellie, but one of the pirates is. Courage, little girl. 
They shall never get you. Go on now, as fast as you can.” 

The killing of one of their number was only a slight check to 
the others, for Jack soon heard them again, close behind. 
After fully considering the matter, he determined the best thing 
to do was to make a stand, and kill them, one at a time, as 
they approached. He proceeded, however, until he could find 
the most suitable place to make the stand. He soon came to a 


202 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

place suitable for his purpose, where the path turned at almost 
right angles, with a large rock jutting out at the corner. He 
placed Nellie in behind this, and took his place in front of her, 
and waited for the pirates to appear. 

They soon made their appearance, and had make the previous 
turning before Jack was aware of it, for they had become more 
cautious, and the lantern was now carried by the one in the 
rear, so that all three were coming down upon Jack before he 
was hardly aware of it. He raised his pistol and fired at the 
foremost shadowy form that was approaching so rapidly, and 
was glad to see this shadow stop, topple over against the rocks 
at the side, and then fall backwards. Jack did not stop, but 
fired another shot at the next one in the rear, but missed him, 
and the two remaining pirates retreated behind the corner of 
the next turning. 

“This is a regular death-trap,” said one of the men. 

“Well, you wan’t to leave your lantern behind. You don’t 
wan’t to hunt a man in the dark with a light,” said the other. 

Jack, knowing they had received a check, immediately took 
advantage of it to reload his revolver with the cartridges he 
always carried loose in his pocket. 

“Now go ahead in the dark,” said one of the men, “or they’ll 
get away. They have probably got a boat down there on the 
beach, and they may be almost there by this time.” 

Jack could not see them now, but he heard them stumble 
into the passage, and fired another shot. He must have missed 
again, for he heard them swearing, as they stumbled back 
again. 

“This won’t do,” said one. “That fellow will kill us before 
;we can reach him.” 

There was a long silence now, but Jack knew they were still 
there, for he could see the rays of the lantern reflecting along 
the passage, and supposed they were holding a consultation in 
whispers. 


Attacked by Pirates. 203 

This silence had continued for several minutes, when Jack, 
peering around the corner of the rock, saw the light from the 
lantern growing gradually dimmer, and finally disappear up the 
passage. 

“I guess that must mean that one of them is going around 
to the other entrance and take me in the rear,” said he. 

In the meantime, Carlo, who had been worrying and fretting 
under Jack’s hand on his collar, now got loose and slipped up 
the passage, and Jack was first made aware of it by an oath from 
the man left in the passage, as the dog sprang at his throat. He 
immediately went to the dog’s assistance. Carlo’s weight, as 
he clutched the man’s throat, had borne him to the ground. 
But Carlo still kept his grip, and, as Jack approached, was hav- 
ing the fight all his own way, for the man was about helpless 
under the powerful grip of the huge mastiff. 

Jack could see the two shadows of the man and beast as 
they struggled for the mastery, and, by the motion the man was 
making with his arm, he concluded the man had succeeded in 
drawing a knife, and was about to plunge it into the dog. But 
as the arm descended, Jack gave the wrist a powerful kick, 
Which sent the knife rattling up the passage. 

-‘There, Carlo, old fellow, you shall have fair play. You 
haven’t got any knife,” said Jack. 

Carlo continued his grip on the man’s throat until he ceased 
to struggle. When he was satisfied that the man was- dead, 
Jack called Carlo off, and returned to Nellie. 

“There are three dead and one left, and, I think, he has gone 
around to enter the passage from the other end. I will go a 
little way and wait for him.” 

Jack proceeded down the passage, until he reached the last 
turning, and so commanded a view of the other entrance to the 
passage, and waited there, well protected by the rocks, for the 
man to make his appearance. He could see, from his position, 
any shadow that would come across the opening. 


204 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

He knew it would take some little time for the man to cover 
the distance in making the detour, and when he would make 
his appearance, would, probably, approach with caution. 

Jack waited in silence, with Nellie immediately behind him, 
whom he instructed to keep Carlo back. Carlo’s blood was up, 
and he wanted more of the battle, and it took all of Nellie’s 
coaxing and petting, as well as what strength she had, to keep 
him in check. 

Jack began to think that probably he had been mistaken, and 
that the man, who disappeared, had gone to summon help from 
the ship, when he saw a dark shadow creeping into the passage, 
on all fours. 

Jack immediately fired, and the shadow, with an oath, dis- 
appeared, after returning Jack’s fire, which scattered the flint 
from the rocks around Jack’s head. It now became a waiting 
game. All was silent, the pirate, probably waiting for his 
partner, up in the passage, to make some move, not knowing 
that he was already dead. After considering, Jack determined 
to end the matter. He knew it would be impossible for the 
man to see him in the darkness, while Jack would be able to see 
the man as soon as he should appear at the opening. After 
cautioning Nellie to keep herself and Carlo out of range, be- 
hind the rock, he got down on all fours, and began to crawl 
carefully towards the opening. As careful as he tried to be, 
however, he happened to dislodge a stone, which attracted the 
pirate’s attention, who suddenly appeared in the opening, and, 
at the same time, a shot came echoing up the passage, but, of 
course, over Jack’s head. Before the man could disappear 
again, Jack had returned the fire, this time with better success, 
for the man threw up his hands and fell across the entrance. 

Jack cautiously approached, not knowing whether the man 
was dead or only wounded. 

“Don’t shoot any more,” said the man, as Jack appeared. 
“I’m done for, and can only live a few moments.” 


205 


Attacked by Pirates. 

“Give me your revolver, then,” said Jack. 

He handed it over. 

“Have you got any more weapons?” asked Jack. 

“Only this knife,” said the man, handing it over. “But I’m 
not going to do you any damage,” he continued. 

“I don’t know,” said Jack. “Can’t trust you fellows very far.” 

“Well, you’ve got all the weapons I’ve got now, and I only 
ask to die in peace.” 

“Anything I can do for you?” asked Jack. 

“If you could give me some water, I’m burning up inside.” 

Nellie now came up with Carlo, who growled angrily when 
he saw the man lying there on the beach. 

Jack silenced the dog, and looked around. 

There was no water nearer than the spring near the den, 
and he didn’t like to leave Nellie alone with him, although 
apparently badly wounded ; neither did he like to take her 
with him, for she would have to pass over the dead bodies of 
the pirates in the passage. 

“Water! Can’t you give me a drink?” said the man. 

“Nellie, are you afraid to stay here with the dog, while I get 
this man some water?” asked Jack. 

“I won’t hurt the girl,” said the man. 

“He has no weapons, Nellie, and Carlo can take care of 
you,” said Jack. 

“I am not afraid, Jack. I will stay here with Carlo. Go 
and get him the water he craves,” said Nellie. 

“Thank you, Miss,” said the man, “I’ll do you no harm.” 

Jack took the lantern that the man had stuck in the crevices 
of the rocks and started up the passage for the water. He 
examined each pirate as he came to him and found them all 
dead. Going to the den for a bucket, he filled it at the spring 
and returned to the dying pirate as quickly as he could ; not that 
he was afraid that anything would happen to Nellie, but he 
knew that she had just passed through another great ordeal, 


20 6 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

and that she would be nervous, and worry a good deal during 
his absence. He found everything just as he had left it. 
He, lifted the man’s head and gave him what water he wanted, 
and then laid him back, and pulled enough of coarse grass to 
make him a comfortable pillow. 

“How do you feel?” asked Jack. 

“Oh, I’m going fast,” said the man. “A man can always tell 
when he’s shot to death ; and I know I can’t last long, but there 
is one thing I’d like to do before I go. Have you got some 
writing paper?” 

“I’ve got something that will do,” said Jack, taking out his 
memorandum book. 

“I did a great wrong to a man once,” said the man. “I mean 
before I took to this life, for I haven’t been in this business 
very long, but was leading a respectable life two short years 
ago, and had a good responsible position, and was getting a good 
salary. But I couldn’t let well enough alone, and commenced 
attending the races ; then I began betting in a small way, but not 
being satisfied I went deeper, and one day lost two thousand 
dollars on a horse that I had a sure tip on. Now this money 
did not belong to me, but to the company by which I was em- 
ployed. I had no way in which to make it up, and knew that 
ruin and disgrace was before me. I knew it would nearly kill 
my mother, for I had good parents, and had been well raised, 
and so I could not bear the thought of the disgrace before 
me. Please give me some more of that water.” 

Jack gave him what he wanted, then he continued. 

“My name is Charles Halpin Sheldon. Among my friends 
I generally go by my middle name, which is shortened to Hal. 
This is what I want you to write down, and if you will promise, 
if it ever comes in your power, to right the man I wronged, 
I will die easier.” 

“All right,” said Jack, “I promise.” 

“My name, as I said, is Hal Sheldon ; I am twenty-four years 


Attacked by Pirates. , 207 

of age. I was at one time employed by the New York Central 
Railroad as baggagemaster, and on certain runs had entire 
charge of the baggage-car. At a certain date, which I have 
forgotten, but it must have been about two years ago from the 
present time, I, at the instigation of James D. Seers, a member 
of the banking firm of Broughman, Seers & Co., did place in 
the trunk of John A. Haselton, who happened to be aboard 
the train that day, a package said to contain the sum of ten 
thousand dollars, said package being handed to me by George 
Hampton, a clerk, also employed by the said banking firm, 
this package being abstracted by him from the safe of said 
bank, where it had been placed by said Haselton, in his capacity 
as cashier. The object of such treachery was to ruin and 
disgrace said Haselton forever. I state, further, that George 
Hampton and myself received from said Seers, the sum of five 
thousand dollars, to be divided between us for our complicity in 
this treachery; that John D. Haselton was tried and convicted 
of the theft, and sentenced to ten years’ imprisonment; that 
he escaped after one year and disappeared. I make this my 
dying statement to right an awful wrong and to right an inno- 
cent man. 

“CHAS. HALPIN SHELDON.” 

He signed his name with evident difficulty, suffering much 
pain. 

“Do you know why Seers wanted to do this thing?” asked 
Jack. 

“Give me some more water,” said Hal. After drinking the 
water, he answered. 

“It was for some fancied wrong that he thought Haselton’s 
father had done him, somewhere in the west.” 

“Did he say wha:t the nature of this wrong was?” asked Jack. 

“Yes; it seems that he was once a clerk for Haselton in a 
store out west somewhere.” Here Hal writhed in pain, and 
fell back in a faint. 


2o8 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“Are you suffering ?” asked Jack. 

“The pain of the thing seems to be coming on now,” said Hal. 
After a little, he seemed to be resting more comfortably, and 
he continued. 

“It seems that Haselton accused him of appropriating money 
that did not belong to him.” 

“And, was he innocent?” asked Jack. 

“No, he was guilty beyond a doubt. I took the pains to 
investigate this thing, for I felt guilty in this business, and 
found that he even made a confession to Haselton, in the hope 
of saving himself from disgrace, promising to make it up. But 
Haselton said that he was afraid to trust him, and let him go. 
Seers was engaged to marry a nice girl in the town where they 
all lived, and somehow or other the whole thing leaked out, 
and she refused to marry him. Seers was very sore over it 
and swore revenge against Haselton, but Haselton died before 
Seers could carry it out. So Seers resolved to take it out of 
the son, and got him a position in the bank, for no other pur- 
pose than to ruin him.” 

“So that’s the way of it, was it?” said Jack. 

“Yes, that’t the whole story,” said Hal. 

“Well, how came you to lose your position, and come to this? 
You paid back this money you took from the company you 
worked for, didn’t you?” asked Jack. 

“Oh, yes ; I squared myself all right for that time, but I soon 
got into the same fix again. I had my lesson, but didn’t profit 
by it; and in a short time, through attending the races and 
gambling in other ways, I got in so deep I saw there was no 
help for me, so one day I took all I could lay my hands on, 
and disappeared. And then things went from bad to worse, 
until I think I touched bottom, when I joined the pirates.” 

“And now you’re dying,” said Jack. 

“Yes, I’m going fast now.” 


Attacked by Pirates. 209 

“Don’t you think,” said Jack, “that it is a kind of retribution, 
that you have been brought to your death, by the very man 
whom you tried to ruin?” 

Jack was not looking at Nellie, but he felt instinctively that 
she started, and looked at him. 

“What’s that you said?” said Hal, again writhing in pain. 

Jack waited until he was more at ease, and repeated the 
question. 

“What do you mean?” asked Hal. 

“My name is John A. Haselton,” said Jack. The man turned 
his head and studied Jack’s face closely. 

“Do you mean it?” asked he. 

“Certainly, I mean it; I am the man that you brought to 
ruin by your perfidy.” 

“And you’re Jack Haselton?” he said. He was like a man 
dazed, and could not take it in. 

Jack nodded, “I’m that very chap,” he said. 

“And after my causing your ruin, you are the cause of my 
death,” said Hal. “Well, there does seem to be some justice 
in the world,” he continued, “after all; and let me say, right 
here, Mr. Haselton, I’d rather die by your hand than in any 
other way. I kind of feel as though I’d been punished here, 
and maybe the punishment hereafter won’t be so great.” 

“It was either your life or mine,” said Jack. 

“Oh, I’m not blaming you, Mr. Haselton; you had right on 
your side before, and now you’re doubly right. But,” he said, 
hesitatingly, “Mr. Haselton, as I’m about to die, and can never 
do harm to anyone again, I would feel a good deal easier if 
you could bring yourself to forgive me for the great wrong I 
did you ; Pm really sorry I did it.” 

“All right,” said Jack, after hesitating a moment ; then hold- 
ing out his hand, “I’ll forgive you, if it’ll make it any easier for 
you.” 


U 


210 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

The man grasped the hand, and there were tears in his eyes, 
but it might have been from pain. “You have a kind heart,” 
he said. 

“But I don’t believe I could forgive Seers, if he was in your 
place,” said Jack. 

“Oh, he’s a snake in the grass,” said Hal. 

“I can forgive you your part, for I can see that you must have 
been sorely tempted,” said Jack, “and I could possibly forgive 
George Hampton, for he did his part, dastardly though it was, 
to help a friend out of trouble ; but Seers had no such excuse. 
He did his part from low down meanness, and had been harbor- 
ing this thing in his heart for years. No, I don’t believe that I 
can ever forgive him,” continued Jack. 

There was a long silence, while the man’s face was all drawn 
up in contortions from pain; after he got quiet, Jack continued. 

“Do you believe that George Hampton will acknowledge his 
part when I show him your confession, provided I ever get 
away from this place?” 

“He’ll have to do so ; he couldn’t get out of it.” 

“Well, I hope I may have the opportunity of settling this 
little matter with Seers,” said Jack. 

“Yes, he’s the one you want to go after,” said Hal. 

“Don’t you think,” said Jack, after another long silence, “that 
if we could get you up to the den we could do something for 
you ; perhaps you’re not hurt as bad as you think ?” 

“No, I’m done for; I’m getting weaker all the time. Noth- 
ing can ever help me in this world ; but let me give you a little 
advice,” he continued. “You want to get away from here as 
soon as possible. They will probably send another boat off 
from the ship before long, to see what has become of us ; and 
the captain must know nothing of this young lady,” he still 
continued, looking intently at Jack. 

“I’ll take good care of that,” said Jack. 

The man here lay back, again writhing in agony. After the 


an 


Attacked by Pirates. 

spasm passed, he asked for more water. After drinking it, he 
lay back again, breathing gently, and so quietly passed into 
eternity. 

“Poor fellow,” said Jack, sadly; “he might have been a better 
man, but his own weakness was his ruin. 

“Well, Nellie,” he continued, rousing up, “we must get away 
from here as soon as possible. As this man said, they are 
likely, at any moment, to send another boat from the ship ; and 
they must not find us here when it arrives.” 

“Well, Jack, Pm ready,” said she. 

“But we needn’t be so rushed as all that,” said Jack. “I’m 
going to take all our belongings, if possible, with us when we 
go.” 

“But aren’t you afraid of the delay?” asked she. 

“Well, you see, there is no danger if we watch. That ship 
must be a mile out, and by watching we can see the moment 
they put another boat in the water,” said Jack. 

“But how can we see in the dark, Jack?” 

“They’ll have a light in any boat they send ashore. They 
have no reason to suppose that they ought to be at all secret 
about it,” said Jack. 

“Don’t you believe they could have heard the firing?” asked 
Nellie. 

“No, I hardly think so ; the firing was all done in the pass, and 
the sound must have been directed upward by the rocks, and 
might have been heard a great distance above, but I don’t think 
it could have been heard from the ship. But the best proof of 
all is, that they have not already sent more boats, which they 
undoubtedly would have done immediately had they thought 
their men had been attacked.” 

While they had been talking they had gotten into the boat, 
and Jack was rowing along the north shore to the nearest 
point for him to load up their stores. He beached the boat, 
and leaving Nellie to watch for any lights that might appear 


212 


Haps and Mishaps of jack Haselton. 

low upon the water, he proceeded to load up their things. 
He worked hard and fast, being determined to get away with 
as much as possible. He took no pains to hide the light from 
the lantern, but carried it back and forth, or wherever he hap- 
pened to be in need of it, rightly supposing that if they should 
see it from the ship, they would naturally suppose that it was in 
the hands of their own comrades. In about two hours’ time he 
had loaded everything into the boat. He took everything that 
he thought they would need. He was especially careful to take 
everything that belonged to Nellie, taking along even an old 
pair of shoes ; not wanting even the pirates to know that there 
had been a woman on the island. He also cut down all the 
tarpaulin that had been used for partitions, and, folding it up, 
laid it into the bottom of the boat. 

“Well, I guess we’re about ready to start now, Nellie,” said 
he. “Poor, little girl, you must be very tired. See, I’ve fixed 
you’re bed for you again in the bow. Now, lie down, please, 
and try to get some rest. Our present danger is all over, I 
think. It does seem, however, we’re destined to move about 
a good deal.” 

“Yes, I had really begun to love this island and to feel at 
home here,” said she. 

“Well, it’s too bad, Nellie, but it can’t be helped; but there is 
one important thing that, in my hurry, I came wery near for- 
getting; that is water. We must have some fresh water.” He 
rolled a cask to the spring and filled it, bunged it, and rolled it 
back in an incredibly short time. 

“There, we’re all ready now, I guess.” 

He helped her in, and made her lie down; covered her with 
some bed-clothes ; called Carlo ; took up the oars, and started 
on another unknown voyage. 

A shot was now heard from the ship. 

Nellie started up in alarm, “Oh, Jack, do you think they can 
be shooting at us?” she said. 


Attacked by Pirates. 213 

“No, they are probably becoming impatient, and signalling 
for the return of their comrades.” 

Jack put out the light, and, when they reached the. western 
end of the island, put up the sail. The wind filled it, and carried 
them speedily on their course. It was a lovely night ; there was 
no moon, but the stars shone brightly, so that they were not 
in utter darkness. The wind came from the northeast, and, as 
they had no chart, or compass to steer by, they simply sailed 
before it, and so proceeded in a southwesterly direction. 

“Jack,” said Nellie, sitting up on the mattress, “you’ve made 
this bed for me, and made me lie down. Although I am awful 
tired and worn out, you must be just as much or more so, for 
you have done everything while I have done nothing, so you 
ought to lie down first and let me steer.” 

“Oh, I’m all right, Nellie. My muscles are used to fatigue, 
and my nerves, too; but you are much more delicately consti- 
tuted,” said Jack. 

“You’re always thinking of my comfort first, Jack.” 

“And, why shouldn’t I? You see I never had any one to 
take care of before, and I want to make the most of it while I’ve 
got the chance,” said he. 

Nellie lay down again and was soon fast asleep. 

And so they bowled along through the water, just like that 
other night, that Jack remembered so well. He loved to think 
of the little girl lying there sleeping so sweetly, as being under 
his protection, and felt very thankful for their escape from the 
pirates, and shuddered to think of the fate that would have 
fallen to that innocent little girl had she fallen into the hands 
of those desperate men. 

Then his mind went to his own affairs. He went over all 
the dying pirate had told him, and was glad that he would be 
at last able to vindicate his character, if he should ever be able 
to return to the civilized world. He was glad Nellie had 
heard it all, and then, with a thrill of joy, remembered that all 


214 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

barriers between them would now be removed, and he would 
have a right to gain her affections if he could. He then thought 
bitterly of Seers, and wondered how any one could carry revenge 
so long in his heart, simply for an imaginary wrong. He 
hoped he might be able in some day to even things up with 
him somehow, for his heart was very sore against Seers. So 
the hours of the night wore slowly away. He lit a match and 
looked at his watch. It was nearly four o’clock. 

“Daylight can’t be very far off now,” he said. Then his 
mind went back to the pirates. He wondered what the next 
boat load that landed would think when they found their com- 
rades all dead. Of course, they could tell that they had been 
shot; all except the one that Carlo mangled, but who would 
they suppose had done it. And thus his mind wandered from 
one theme to another, as he sat there guiding the boat through 
the silent night. Finally the stars disappeared one by one, 
and the gray began to appear in the east, and soon the sun made 
his appearance, coming up out of the sea and rested, apparently, 
upon the water like a great, red ball of fire; and still Nellie 
slept on. 

As the sun rose higher and the mists disappeared, Jack dis- 
covered, off to the right, a dim cloud-like form that hung low 
upon the water, which he at once decided was another island. 
He changed his course and proceeded in that direction. As 
he approached nearer he saw that he was right in his conclu- 
sions, and ran the bow upon the beach and stood up and looked 
around. 

“What is it, Jack?” asked Nellie, whom the shock of the 
boat upon the beach had awakened. 

“We’ve struck land again, Nellie,” said he, “and, no doubt, 
have arrived at what we may consider our future home.” 


CHAPTER XIV. 


TH£ HIDDEN TREASURE. 

Jack helped Nellie out of the boat; Carlo had jumped out the 
moment the boat struck. He was always glad at the sight of 
land. After beaching the boat, they proceeded to explore the 
new island. It was not so large as the island they had left, nor so 
well wooded. At the extreme eastern end was a great mass 
of granite boulders, piled many feet high, in some places, reach- 
ing as high as a hundred feet. They found a good spring near 
a small group of palm trees. There were no signs of inhabitants. 

“Well, Nellie, I expect we had better stay here, at least for 
the present,” said Jack. “We might go further and fare worse.” 

“All right, Jack. But we’ll miss those grand woods we left 
behind, and all of those beautiful birds,” said Nellie. 

“Yes,” said Jack. “It’s too bad to have to drag you around 
this way from pillar to post, but such seems our fate. We no 
sooner get comfortably fixed in a place, than we have to pull up 
stakes and get out. And, the worst of it is, there is always a 
good reason for it. Now, if we only moved around from place 
to place for our own pleasure and didn’t succeed in bettering our 
condition, we would have no one to blame but ourselves, but to 
be compelled to move when we are perfectly well satisfied with 
our condition, and then to find ourselves worsted, is either fate 
or bad luck,” continued he. 

Jack unloaded the stores on the beach, and proceeded to make 
a fire, while Nellie prepared the things for breakfast. 

“Nellie, you really look homesick,” said Jack. Nellie smiled. 

“Well, it does seem strange, perhaps, that we can become at- 

215 


2i 6 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

tached to a home on a deserted island, and that home, too, noth- 
ing but a den, made out of a cave, but I really was attached to 
it,” said she. 

“Poor little girl, it’s a shame/ ’said he. 

“Do you think that it would ever be safe for us to go back 
there, Jack?” 

“Well, it might be safe enough. We might never be dis- 
turbed there again, at least by pirates. But whether we would 
ever feel safe there again, is another question. We might 
awake at all hours of the night, and imagine we heard a boat 
out on the water, being rowed toward the shore,” said Jack. 

“I’m afraid that’s so,” said Nellie. “I suppose I shouldn’t 
feel safe.” 

“And then,” said Jack, “I doubt very much whether we could 
ever find it. You know we have no chart, or compass, to guide 
us. And so, if we should start out to find that island, the proba- 
bility is, we should land somewhere farther off than we are 
now.” 

“Yes, I suppose that it is lost to us forever,” said she. 

“Well, cheer up, little girl. You’ll like it here after a little 
while; perhaps you’ll even be glad of the change,” said Jack. 

“Oh, I can be satisfied anywhere, Jack,” she said, cheerfully. 
“I won’t appear dissatisfied, and be a drag to you, Jack, when 
you’re doing the very best you can in everything,” she con- 
tinued. 

“You’ve never been a drag to me, Nellie. Indeed, you’ve been 
to me a great source of joy and comfort,” said he. 

After breakfast, Jack looked for some place to build some 
kind of a shelter. 

By cutting away some intervening trees, he found about what 
he wanted. After cutting these away and cleaning out the 
underbrush, it left two rows, of three trees each, about ten feet 
apart, the rows being about fifteen feet apart. He selected, 
. from the trees he had cut out, some of the proper thickness, 


The Hidden Treasure. 


217 


and cut them to the right length for a frame-work to go all 
around these trees. These he nailed to the trees about ten feet 
from the ground, putting one, also, cross-wise between the two 
trees in the center. He then placed a ridge pole along the 
center lengthwise, about two feet above the frame. This he 
made fast with short pieces nailed to the frame already formed. 
Stretching a piece of tarpaulin over this ridge pole, and nailing 
it fast to the frame he had a good roof, with proper slope. He 
then nailed tarpaulin around the sides, and made a door and 
windows, like those in the house he first built. He stretched 
another piece of tarpaulin inside across the center, dividing it 
into two rooms. The rear room he again divided by stretching 
tarpaulin from the center piece to the rear wall, thus forming 
two bedrooms, and a sitting or dining-room in front. He made 
doors for the bedrooms, and windows in the rear. It was now 
almost noon, and they sat down to the dinner Nellie had 
prepared. 

“Well, little girl,” said Jack, “we’ve got a roof over us once 
more.” 

“You’ve fixed it awfully nice, Jack, and I begin to like my new 
home already.” 

“Oh, you’ll like it after a bit,” said he. “But we’ll miss some 
things. This good bread that we’ve become used to, for 
instance.” 

“We’ve got enough for a little while,” said she. “It’s a good 
thing you picked the fruit when you did.” 

After dinner, Jack brought in and assorted the stores. 

“They’re about half gone, Nellie,” said he. 

“How’ll we manage when they’re all gone, Jack?” 

“I don’t know; we’ll have to do the best we can, little girl, 
I wish I had come across some garden seed when I loaded up 
this raft. It would be a grand thing if we could cultivate a 
little piece of ground here, and have a nice garden. And then, 
if we only had a few chickens to start with, what a famous place 


2i 8 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

to raise them here. We could let them roam over the island, 
and pick up their own food. And they’d always be handy when 
we wanted them, for they couldn’t get away from the island. 
And then think of having fresh eggs every morning for break- 
fast. Nellie, do you remember how fresh eggs taste? Hen’s 
eggs I mean, not turtle eggs, although they do very well in a 
pinch.” 

“I could imagine they would taste pretty well, Jack,” said she, 
smiling up into his face. “But I don’t see any prospects of 
having any. I suppose,” she continued, “We’ll manage some- 
way. You always seem to have a way out , somehow, Jack; so 
I guess everything will come right.” 

As Jack picked up the axe, and proceeded to cut up some more 
of the limbs, he murmured to himself : 

“God grant, dear little girl, that the time may never come, 
when in the hour of your necessity, Jack should be unable to 
find a way out for you.” 

Jack spent the rest of the time before dark in putting 
up the two beds. He cut the short posts and drove them 
into the ground, and nailed on the rails. Then he carried in 
the mattress for Nellie, and made everything's comfortable for 
her as possible. For himself he made the same sort of cot-bed 
that he made before. Then, as he was very tired, and had had 
no sleep the night before, they had an early supper and soon 
after retired for the night. 

Jack made a new fish box the next morning, also another 
turtle trap, using up about all the extra fish hooks that he had. 

He then went out to sea a short distance and caught a few 
fish, some of which they had for dinner. After dinner, he and 
Nellie explored their new island, but found nothing especially 
interesting. There were several breeds of monkeys, and a 
number of different kinds of birds, some of very bright plumage, 
but having seen so many very beautiful ones, on the island which 


The Hidden Treasure. 


219 


they had left, these seemed rather tame in comparison. They 
spent most of the time on the western shore, where there was 
a long sloping beach of sand and gravel. Here were large num- 
bers of very beautiful shells, and curious shaped stones, of 
which Nellie gathered a large quantity, as many, or more than 
Jack could carry, and still there was always one more, more 
beautiful than any she had found. 

Jack laughed. “Well, if you’re so fond of these pretty things, 
Nellie, we’ll bring some boxes down, and fill them,” said he. 

“Oh, Jack, I should love to take some of them home with 
me, if we ever get away from here, as a sort of souvenir of our 
sojourn here, you know,” said she, laughing in return. 

“Well, there’s no reason why you shouldn’t,” said he, “there’s 
plenty of them.” 

“And to think, Jack, that each one of these shells was the 
beautiful home of some little animal at one time,” I wonder,” 
she continued, “where all of these little things are now?” 

“I wonder if any of them are homesick?” said he, looking at 
her slyly. 

“Jack, I’m not homesick,” said she, laughing gaily; “unless 
it’s for my real home,” she added more sadly. 

The next morning Jack spent in getting ready a new signal 
of distress, Nellie furnishing another shawl. 

“Nellie, what will we do for signals when you run out of 
shawls? If we have to move about so much, without having 
time to take in our signals, the time might come when we 
couldn’t put out one,” said Jack, smiling. 

“Those shawls were from the belongings of those other 
women, and that’s the last one I’ve got,” said she. “So use it 
freely, but at the same time be economical. That’s what the 
woman said, you know; or don’t you know, when she gave a 
penny to the poor beggar,” continued she, with her joyful laugh. 

“I wonder who’s playing in a new role now,” said Jack, 
“The idea of little Nellie getting off a pun.” 


220 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“Oh, it wasn’t original,” said she, still laughing. “I don’t be- 
lieve I could get off an original pun.” 

In the afternoon they climbed the great mass of boulders, at 
the eastern end of the island, going clean to the top ; for here it 
was Jack wanted to set out the signal. He wedged it in be- 
tween two large boulders at the highest point. / 

“There, that ought to be seen at a great distance,” said he^ 
“although the color is not so bright as the one we left behind.” 

“Do ships ever sight such signals, and pass them by?” she 
asked. 

“Scarcely ever,” said he. “There have been captains mean 
enough to ignore such signals, but, thank goodness, they are 
very few.” 

“The pirates must have known there was some one on that 
island, when they saw the flag,” said she. 

“I suppose so,” said Jack. 

“I hope no pirates will be attracted by this flag,” said she.. 

“Those pirates didn’t come ashore because they saw the flag. 
They came for another purpose altogether,” said Jack. “A 
pirate,” he continued, “would not be very likely to take any 
notice of such a signal, unless he was short of hands, or had 
some other selfish reason.” 

“Do they sometimes force people to join them, Jack?” 

“Sometimes, when they can’t persuade them ; but not often,” 
said Jack. 

They stayed up there on the rocks for hours, sometimes con- 
versing listlessly, and sometimes silently looking out over the 
ocean. 

As the shadows began to lengthen, they began to climb down 
over the great boulders, taking one at a time. 

“Oh, what a curious looking boulder!” said Nellie, looking 
down upon the one Jack had just helped her to jump. “It 
looks like a crown upon a king’s head,” she continued, 

“I can’t see any resemblance,” said Jack, 


The Hidden Treasure. 22 1 

“You have to get right on top of it before you can take in 
the whole shape of it,” said she. 

Jack came and stood alongside of her, and looked down, and 
it was just as Nellie had said. It was a perfect crown. There 
were the arched and pointed ornaments circling round it, as 
even and perfect, almost, as could have been done by an artist. 
It was, indeed, an immense crown, encircling the brow of an 
immense head. Jack looked around. This crowned rock was 
about half the distance from the top, and was partly buried in 
the earth. Immediately beyond was a sort of terrace, of a 
hundred feet or more, before the descent continued. This ter- 
race was nearly level, and covered with a thick, heavy moss. 
He looked overhead and tried to take in the shape of the rocks 
above, but was evidently disappointed. 

“What ever are you looking at, Jack? Are you trying to de- 
termine if this crown fell from the sky?” she asked, laughing. 

“No, Nellie; Fm looking for the shadow of the cross ,” said 
Jack. 

“Oh, the secret cipher, Jack,” she said. 

“Yes,” said he. “This is the first thing I’ve seen that 
resembles a crown; and the cross must be around here some- 
where, or, at least, the shadow of one.” 

“Oh, Jack,” said she, “do you really think you have found 
the crown referred to in the cipher?” 

“That’s just what I believe, Nellie. Of course, I may be 
mistaken, but nature could not duplicate that crown, or would 
not be apt to do so, at least. So I think that must be the 
crown,” said Jack. 

“And can’t you see anything that looks like a cross ?” said she, 
looking around. 

“Nary a thing,” said Jack, “nor anything that would make a 
shadow of one,” said he, still intently examining the stones 
above. 


222 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“There is one thing certain,” continued he. If there is any 
cross here, or any shadow of a cross as the cipher calls for, it 
must be within a radius of fifty feet of the crown, for that is the 
distance to be measured from the crown through the cross. 
But we must go, Nellie, it will soon be too late to get over the 
rest of these stones safely/’ continued he. So they proceeded 
to climb down over the balance of the boulders, to the level 
below. They were both naturally a little excited over the dis- 
covery of what they supposed to be the crown referred to in 
the cipher. 

After supper, Jack was stretched out at full length, on the 
beach, with the analysis of the cipher in his hand, when Nellie 
was surprised to hear him burst out laughing. 

“What’s funny, Jack?” she asked. 

“I am laughing at the fool, Jack,” said he, continuing to 
laugh. 

“And what’s the fool, Jack, been doing now, that he ought 
to be laughed at?” said she, smiling. 

“He’s been looking for a shadow, at nearly dusk, when the 
cipher calls for it at high noon. Of course, it wouldn’t be the 
same,” he continued. “The sun changes the shape of a shadow 
every few minutes. And if that shadow’s there, and we expect 
to find it, we’ll find it at high noon tide.” 

“Read the whole analysis of the cipher, Jack,” said she. 

On the thirtieth of May, at high noon tide, from the center 
of the crown, through the center of the shadow of the cross, 
measure fifty feet, north twenty-five feet, dig. 

JOHN BLACKMORE, 
Captain of the Black Cross. 

“But, Jack,” said Nellie. “It does not only say at high noon, 
but it also says on the thirtieth of May.” 

“Yes, I know, Nellie,” said Jack. “The true position of the 
cross, as regards the cipher, cannot be ascertained until the 


The Hidden Treasure. 


223 

thirtieth of May, but the shape of the cross will be the same 
to-morrow at noon.” 

“I don’t believe I understand you, Jack.” 

“I mean,” said Jack, “that at noon to-morrow the shadow of 
the cross will be thrown somewhere upon the ground, but it 
will not be in its true position, as regards the cipher, until the 
thirtieth of May.” 

“But if the shadow’s there, I don’t see why it wouldn’t be in 
its true position, Jack.” 

“Let me try and make it plainer to you,” said Jack. “There 
is a certain formation of rocks somewhere above, where we 
found the crown, that, to-morrow at noon, will cast a shadow 
upon the earth, in the shape of a cross. Is that plain enough? 
little girl.” 

“Yes, that is plain enough, Jack.” 

“Well, now the sun is traveling north, as we call it, and every 
day is a little further north, so that, each day, in casting this 
shadow through the rocks, would necessarily cast it a little 
further south. Is that plain?” asked Jack. 

“No, I should think that the further north the sun traveled, 
the further north the shadow would appear upon the earth,” 
said she. 

“Come inside, Nellie, where it is dark, and I will show you 
what I mean,” said he. * 

They went into Nellie’s bedroom, and shut the door and the 
window, so that it was perfectly dark. Jack then lit a candle, 
and took a small square of tarpaulin, and cut a small hole in the 
center, and placed this over an empty box without a cover, after 
knocking in one end so that Nellie could look inside. 

“Now, you see,” he said, “where the light strikes the ground. 
Now, I move this candle to the right, which way does the light 
upon the ground move?” 

“To the right, also,” she said. 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

Jack laughed, “that’s because you’re facing me. Now, if you 
turn your face in the same direction as mine. Now, when I 
move the light to the right, the reflection on the ground goes 
to the left doesn’t it?” 

“Yes, I see how it is,” said she. “The light or reflection, 
shining through a crevice, must move in the opposite direction 
from its course.” 

“Yes, so every day the sun is a little further north, the 
shadow is a little further south.” 

- “But, Jack, I don’t see that a few inches, or even feet, would 
make so very much difference. When you dig for this treasure, 
you expect to dig a hole larger than the box is supposed to be 
anyhow,” said she. 

“Yes, but you haven’t got the geometrical figure of the thing 
well in your head. If the treasure was to be found in the center 
of the shadow of the cross, it would make no difference. But 
this is not so. The center of the crown and the center of the 
shadow of the cross are but two points for the establishment 
of a certain line, that is to be carried out some distance beyond, 
and the greater this distance the greater the divergence, if one 
or the other of these points is not true. Or, in other words, 
if you change the position of either of these points, even a few 
inches, and carry a line out beyond, the divergence increases 
rapidly with every foot you go.” 

“Yes, I see what you mean, and the closer the shadow is to the 
crown, the greater the divergence would be,” said she. 

“Exactly,” said Jack. “Now you understand. And so,” he 
continued, “although we may go and look for the shadow to- 
morrow, we must wait until May the thirtieth, before taking any 
measurements.” 

“And what day is this ?” said she. 

“This is May the eighteenth,” said Jack; “so that it will be 
nearly two weeks before we can really try to accomplish any- 
thing.” 


The Hidden Treasure. 


225 

“Just think, Nellie,” he continued, “what a sharp old fellow 
that pirate captain must have been. He buries his treasure and 
then makes a cipher, the conditions of which can only be carried 
out, with any certainty, on one day in the year.” 

“That was pretty shrewd, Jack.” 

“I should say so, but you had better get to bed, Nellie. I’ll 
go too pretty soon, but I want to take a smoke first; so I’ll 
stroll down the beach a piece,” said Jack. 

The next morning, just before noon, Jack and Nellie again 
climbed over the great boulders, to where they had discovered 
the crown, and took a position near, to await the appearance 
of the shadow of the cross, that they expected to see. The 
rocks above, at the height of perhaps fifty feet, projected out, 
and hung over the crowned stone. And Jack was trying again 
to find some shape among them, that might cast a shadow in the 
form of a cross, but could see nothing. 

“You see, Nellie, it’s this way,” he said, finally. 

“This shadow may not be produced by any single stone, or 
even two or three combined, but it may take quite a number of 
them, and they may be mixed up in a conglomerated mass, and 
some may be even quite a distance behind the others. Yet 
they may be so formed that when the sun strikes the mass from 
behind at a certain slanting of his rays, it will produce a solid 
shadow upon the earth that one might naturally suppose was 
produced by a single stone.” 

“I see,” said Nellie, “but it must be pretty near the time, Jack.” 

Jack looked at his watch. “I’ve got five minutes to twelve,” 
said he. “But then, of course, I have no way of knowing how 
near right I am, only by the sun, and, judging by that, I should 
say I was a little fast. It’s rather a poor joke, Nellie, for a 
man to carry a watch for the purpose of knowing the time of 
day, and, then after all, have to fall back on the sun.” 

They waited a little while in silence. The sun was nearly over- 
head now. Nellie, especially, was laboring under considerable 
15 


226 


Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

excitement. If Jack felt it to the same extent, he did not show 
it, but appeared a little anxious. 

“Oh, Jack,” finally said Nellie. “I believe that must be part 
of it, look.” 

She pointed down upon the terrace, about ten or twelve feet 
from the crowned stone. There was a deep, solid shadow form- 
ing, with almost straight edges. At the time Nellie first noticed 
it, it looked like a square block, about ten inches each way. But 
this was gradually growing in length, until it met another 
shadow at right angles with it, and this one grew in width until 
it, also, reached about ten inches, when the first shadow again 
began to increase in length as it formed itself into the arm of 
the cross. And soon all the other shadows fell away from it, 
leaving exposed there on the terrace a most perfect cross, the 
body being about eight feet long with arms extending on each 
side about three feet. 

“There’s the whole cross, Jack,” said Nellie. “And how per- 
fect it is,” she continued. 

“Yes, it is very clearly defined; almost as perfect as an artist 
could draw it,” said Jack. 

“It is something wonderful, Jack.” 

“It is certainly a strange freak of nature.” And then as they 
talked it began to lose its shape. One arm gradually dis- 
appeared, then the body narrowed down to nothing, then the 
other arm grew shorter and it also disappeared, and there was 
nothing but the sun’s scorching rays beating down upon the 
terrace. 

“But, isn’t it all very strange?” said Nellie, on their way back 
to the tent. 

“It is certainly very wonderful,” said Jack. “Not so much 
that nature took upon herself to form a perfect crown, nor that 
she should form the shadow of a perfect cross, but the great 
wonder is, that she should produce them both at the same place.” 


The Hidden Treasure. 


di7 

“I suppose,” said Jack, “that that cross had never been seen 
by mortal eyes before the captain discovered it,” said Jack. 

“Do you think so, Jack.” 

“Yes, just think a moment. In all the past ages how very 
few people must have even visited this island. There is nothing 
especially here to attract them, and, unless they happened to be 
shipwrecked, and stranded here, it isn’t very likely that very 
many have ever landed. Then out of that small number, how 
many have ever taken the trouble to climb these boulders? 
Then, out of that exceedingly small number, how many of them 
would be likely to pass over that terrace exactly at noon ? And 
I think most likely none at all,” said Jack. 

“How do you suppose the pirate captain discovered it, Jack?” 

“Just by accident,” said Jack. 

“And probably we’re the only ones who have ever seen it 
since,” said she. 

“Yes, I think so. There are probably only four people in the 
world who ever saw it,” said he. 

“Who could have been the fourth one, Jack?” 

“The sailor who accompanied the captain when he went to 
bury the treasure,” said he. 

“What do you think happened to him, Jack?” 

“The captain killed him,” said Jack, “because he knew where 
the treasure was buried.” 

“Oh, that’s horrible, Jack.” 

“Yes, but that’s just what happened, Nellie.” 

They had reached the tent by this time. Jack made a fire, 
and Nellie began to prepare the noon meal. 

“There is another thing, Nellie. We would not have dis- 
covered this cross if we had not been looking for it, and, so the 
captain’s secret would probably have died with him.” 

“Yes, we looked for the shadow of the cross, because we had 
found the crown,” said she. “But we would not have done so, 


228 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

after finding the crown, if we had not found the cipher,” said he. 

“And, even not then, if you had not been able to decipher it,” 
said she. 

“Exactly, and all this together would have availed nothing, if 
we had not accidentally landed on this island. So you see what 
very small prospects there were of anybody ever finding this 
treasure, and it might with surety be regarded as safely hid for 
all time to come. But after all,” continued Jack, “we may 
be altogether mistaken ; the captain might have recovered it long 
before his death. You see, it’s a long time since it was buried.” 

“Yes, Jack,” said she. “But wouldn’t he have been likely to 
have destroyed the cipher?” 

“He certainly had no especial reason for keeping it, if he had 
recovered the treasure,” said Jack. “But then again, Nellie, he 
had no especial reason for destroying it. He might have simply 
neglected to do so, for no reason whatever.” 

“Yes, that’s so, and we may have had all our trouble for 
nothing,” said she. 

“Oh, I don’t mind the trouble ; it’s getting your expectations 
raised to such a high pitch, if all is, at last, to end in 
disappointment.” 

“We can only wait and see, Jack.” 

“That’s so, Nellie, and, in the meantime, we won’t worry 
about it. We’ll forget there ever was such a thing as a pirate 
ever lived, or a treasure that was ever buried,” laughed Jack. 

The days passed slowly away. Jack roamed the island, some- 
times alone with Carlo, sometimes Nellie accompanied them. 
There was nothing especially to do, except the fishing that Jack 
did from time to time. 

Nellie employed part of the time in gathering shells, but she 
soon tired of this, for there were so many beautiful ones that 
it grew monotonous, and she lost interest in them. Carlo, per- 
haps, knew the island better than either of them, and, probably 


The Hidden Treasure. 


229 

was the only one of the three to whom the time did not drag. 
But the hours passed into days, and the days into weeks, until 
the thirtieth arrived. 

“Well, this is the morning, Nellie, that we are to make a try 
for the treasure,” said Jack, as they were eating breakfast. 

“Yes, Jack, it’ll be something off our minds anyway, no matter 
how it turns out.” 

Towards noon they started for the great mass of boulders to 
seek for the treasure. Jack took a fifty foot tape measure, 
which he found in the carpenter’s chest; also a hatchet, and a 
few pine stakes. Nellie carried a tin bucket filled with a cold 
lunch, for it was most too soon for dinner. 

They climbed over the boulders to the terrace where they 
knew the shadow would soon appear, and awaited. 

“Jack,” said Nellie. “What would you call the center of a 
cross ?” 

“I suppose,” said Jack, “it would be the center of the body 
where the arm crosses.” 

“I suppose so,” said Nellie. “The shadow is forming, Jack,” 
continued she, as the first outward end of the arm made its 
appearance. 

Jack waited until the entire shadow lay bare in the sunshine. 
Then he drove a stake right in the center of where the arm 
crossed the body. “There,” said he, “we’ve got that point 
established, now we can take our time about measurements.” 

“You haven’t got any compass, have you, Jack? How are 
you going to tell whether you are right, when you come to 
measure towards the north?” asked Nellie. 

' “We’ll have to come at that the nearest we can,” said he. “We 
have the direction of the east true enough from the sun, and 
from that we can tell pretty nearly just where the north should 
be. You see, Nellie, that measurement doesn’t have to be 
taken with the same nicety, as the center of the shadow. We 


230 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

will try and dig a hole large enough to cover any mistakes in 
that direction; so, if we should be a little off, in that measure- 
ment, it really will not make much difference.” 

The shadow had entirely disappeared by this time. Jack now 
commenced his measurements. He instructed Nellie to hold 
the end of the tape exactly in the center of the crown. 

“Oh, Jack,” she said. “Here is a little mark cut into 
the stone, so that it must be exactly right.” 

Jack examined it closely, and, sure enough, there was a little 
mark of a cross, cut into the stone, right under Nellie’s thumb. 

“Yes, and so I think we’re all right,” said Jack. 

He ran the line out fifty feet, and held it taut, and so it just 
touched the stake he had driven into the ground ; here he drove 
another stake. 

“That’s another point established,” said he. 

“Now, Nellie,” he continued. “If you’ll come here, we’ll try 
to take the other measurement.” 

He slipped the ring at the end of the tape, over the stake just 
driven, and placed Nellie at this point, with her feet close 
together, one on each side of this stake, and with her right 
shoulder square to the east. He now took the line and ran off 
twenty-five feet, and held it close to the ground, and tried to 
make as true a right angle with an imaginary line to the east as' 
possible, under the circumstances. 

“Nellie,” he said, laughing. “It’s really a pity that you’re 
little nose isn’t a mite longer, I might get this line nearer to 
being true.” 

“Well, I can’t stretch it, Jack,” she said, “or I would do so 
to oblige you. That is, I might do so under the excitement 
of these most interesting circumstances.” 

“Well, I guess we’ll not ask it of you, Nellie.” 

Jack drove another stake at the end of this measurement. 
He then described a circle around this stake of about six feet in 
diameter, 


The Hidden Treasure. 


231 


“Are you going to dig a hole that big, Jack?” 

“Yes, you see, as I said before, we want to make allowance 
for any little mistake in this last measurement. And besides, I 
don’t know how deep I will have to go, and so I want plenty 
of room to work,” said Jack. 

“Do you think the treasure is buried very deep, Jack?” said 
Nellie. 

“Probably not originally, but, you see, it’s been a good while 
ago, and there may have been new dirt formed, or washed down 
over the soil since it was buried, so that I may have to dig 
deeper than the pirate put it,” said Jack. 

Jack took off his coat and vest, and rolled up his sleeves, and 
prepared for a long, arduous afternoon’s work. Nellie sat in the 
shade of a projecting rock, and Jack dug a long while in silence, 
turning out the dirt, in great heaps, around the circle he had 
described. 

He dug to his knees, then to his waist, and, as the sun’s 
shadows lengthened out, he had dug so deep that his head just 
appeared above the excavation. Then he began to feel some 
disappointment. 

“It looks like our cake’s all dough, Nellie,” said he, as he 
rested on his spade. 

“Don’t you think there is any treasure after all, Jack?” asked 
she. 

“It certainly begins to look that way. If there was, it certainly 
couldn’t be so deep in the earth, even allowing for time, extra 
soil and all,” said Jack. 

Nellie came and stood over him, looking down into the hole. 

“It certainly seems so, Jack. It’s too bad after all your 
trouble,” said she. 

“Oh, the trouble is nothing,” said he, “we were probably 
expecting too much. Well, it’s nearly sundown, we can’t do 
any more to-day, at least. We’ll go an4 get supper and have a 
think over it,” continued he, 


232 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

They had eaten the lunch that Nellie brought long before. 
Jack had thrown his spade out before attempting to climb out of 
the hole, and he now looked around for a resting place for his 
foot, to aid him in getting out. He saw what he wanted in 
what looked like a stone projecting from the side of the excava- 
tion, and about three feet from the ground, so he. put his foot 
upon this, endeavored to climb out, but he had ho sooner rested 
his whole weight upon this, than this support gave way, and let 
him back into the hole. He looked down a moment in disgust 
at this thing that had played him false, and saw that it was a 
bone. He picked it up and examined it, and found it was the 
shin bone of a human being. 

“Give me the spade again, Nellie, please,” said he. 

He immediately began digging vigorously in the side of the 
excavation, where the bone had rested. Soon more bones ap- 
peared, then a human skull. 

“Why, Jack, whatever are you doing?” said Nellie, looking at 
the bones. 

“I think I’m getting ‘warm,’ Nellie, as the children say. Or, 
in other words, I’m digging out the bones of that sailor man, 
that went away that day in a boat, with the pirate captain, and 
never returned,” continued he. ; r / 'V 

He still kept digging away, bringing down great clods of 
earth, and more bones, but finally he struck something else, 
and, after digging carefully around it, unearthed a strong wooden 
box, bound with iron bands. This box was about eighteen or 
twenty inches long, and about a foot wide, and the same in 
depth. There was a strong lock to the box, but the wood 
around the hinges to the lid had rotted so that it would not 
hold the screws; so Jack lifted it and pulled it back, and stood 
back in utter amazement. There was a most brilliant array of 
all kinds of precious stones, Indeed, it was a conglomerated 
mass of brilliancy. There were diamonds, topazes, emeralds, 
rubies and sapphires, all contributing their scintillations to form 


The Hidden Treasure. 


2 33 


a great bulk of dazzling brightness. Jack stood looking at it in 
a sort of stupid wonder. Nellie was simply awe-struck; both 
were dumb and completely overcome by the grand display of 
the many precious stones, flashing their dazzling, changeable 
colors back and forth in bewildering brilliancy. 

“Well,” said Nellie, at last. “You’ve found it, Jack.” 

“Yes,” said Jack, “I’ve found it.” But he couldn’t realize yet 
just what he had found. He could not take it in. He simply 
stood and looked at it stupidly. 

Nellie was really the first to recover. 

“Oh, Jack,” she said, “Isn’t it wonderfully beautiful?” 

“Amazingly so,” said Jack, at last beginning to realize what 
it all meant. “Nellie,” he continued, “there’s millions and 
millions of dollars in that box. Hurrah,” he shouted, throwing 
up his cap, in his boyish glee. “We’re millionaires in earnest 
this time, little girl. No more make believe now.” 

“But, Jack, what are you going to do with it?” 

This practical question brought Jack completely to himself. 

“Well, the first thing to do, is to get it out of here, and carry 
it to the tent,” said he. 

Jack lifted it carefully, and set it down on the edge of the hole, 
at Nellie’s feet. 

“There, little girl,” he said, “are enough diamonds to com- 
pletely cover you up and bury you.” 

“Oh, aren’t they beautiful?” she said, stooping down, and 
running a few of them through her hands, watching the colors 
flash and change into many brilliant hues, as they caught the 
beams of the declining sun. 

“Oh, Jack, whatever can you do with so many of them?” she 
continued. 

“Oh, we’ll manage somehow to make use of them, little girl,” 
said he. 

“But come, Nellie,’ he continued. “We’ll go back to the tent 
^nd get some supper. Millionaires ought to have the privilege 


234 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

to pick and choose, but I suppose we’ll have to put up with the 
regular diet. That’s the disadvantage of being millionaires on a 
desert island/’ laughed Jack. 

“Now, Nellie,” he continued, “you remember your caution 
to me once ; so if any of the neighbors should happen in this 
evening, be sure you treat them as usual, and don’t look down 
on them.” 

“I won’t, Jack,” laughed she, “I’ll give them the chairs to 
sit on, as usual, while we sit on the bed.” 

The box was heavy, but Jack could manage it easily, after 
getting it on his shoulder. And so laughing in their joy, and 
talking a good deal of nonsense, they made their way to the tent. 
Jack carried in his treasure and put it under his bed, at which 
Nellie laughed. 

“Aren’t you afraid of burglars, Jack? You know when a man 
intends to burgle, he is always supposed to hide under the bed.” 

“I hardly know what I’m afraid of. I believe I’m more afraid 
than anything else, that I shall wake up and find it all a dream,” 
said he. 

“There are two of us dreaming the same dream then,” said 
she. 

“But how am I to know that? You may simply be a part of 
my dream,” said he. * 

“Well, Jack,” she said, coming up to him. “Shall I pinch you 
real hard to let you konw you are awake?” 

He laughed. “I don’t believe you could pinch me hard 
enough to awaken me if I were asleep.” 

“Better not let me try,” she said, threateningly. 

After they had had supper they were standing outside the 
tent still talking about the wonderful treasure. 

“Jack, how do you account for coming so near missing the 
place where it was buried?” 

“Well,” said Jack, “the trouble was probably in the last meas- 
urement, We did not strike a line due north,” 


The Hidden Treasure. 


2 35 


“Perhaps it was the pirate’s mistake, Jack?” 

No, I hardly think so; he probably used a compass, and got 
the true line. Now, you see,” continued Jack, “the last stake 
I drove was about three feet too far to the left. If I had put it 
three feet more to the right it would have been exactly over the 
treasure. Now, there is just one way that I can account for it, 
Nellie. You see, your right shoulder was turned squarely to- 
wards the east, consequently you were directly facing the north, 
and I was trying to draw a true line from the end of your nose, 
as you thus stood. Now, I diverged about three feet too far to 
the left, because, I think, your nose must be a little crooked,” 
added he mischieviously. 

She looked at him quickly, but Jack was looking down, de- 
murely. 

“You see,” he continued, “it might be only a slight crook, 
just enough to start the measurement a little off the true line, 
but the farther you run the line, the greater the line would 
diverge in the wrong direction.” 

“Jack,” said she, “I haven’t got a crooked nose,” pouting up 
her lips. 

Jack laughed heartily. 

She walked away a short distance and stood with her back’ 
to him. 

He watched her with a mischievious smile upon his face. 

Soon she turned her head, but still kept her back to him, and 
looked at him out of the corner of her eyes, and still pouting 
prettily. 

Jack laughed louder than ever. 

“Never mind, Nellie, we’re rich now, little girl, and can afford 
to have it attended to. Why, we can even call a specialist in, 
to put it straight ; just a little pull to the right would probably 
fix it, but he may have to put it in plaster-of-Paris. I wonder,” 
he continued, thoughtfully, “if Ihere are specialists for crooked 
noses/' 


236 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Heselton. 

“I am not going to have any specialist pull my nose,” she 
said, as she walked away with her hands behind her, and her 
head in the air. 

Jack laughed still louder at this, but his great, honest eyes 
were regarding her very kindly. “How fascinating she is, when 
she pouts so prettily,” thought he ; and, lighting a cigar, he lay 
back looking up into the sky. Nellie came back, presently, and 
sat down by him, very quietly. 

“You asked me once, Nellie,” said he, “what I would do when 
my cigars were all gone. Well, that time’s nearly come. I’ve 
only a part of a box left.” 

“Will it go hard to do without, Jack?” 

“Well, yes; especially at first, but a person can get used to 
most things ; at least when it’s a case of have to” 

As soon as Jack’s cigar was gone he said he thought he would 
go to bed, for he was very tired. 


CHAPTER XV. 


RESCUED. 

A EEw days after this Jack came in to where Nellie was pre- 
paring dinner. 

“I’ve got some more bread for you, Nellie/’ said he, “and also 
something to make you some lemonade, or at least a good 
substitute for it.” 

“What do you call it, Jack?” asked she. 

“This bread-fruit is plantain, and this other is citron, which, 
mixed with water, makes a delicious drink ; and then, here are 
some wild oranges, which taste very good, for I’ve tried them,” 
said Jack. 

“Jack,” said Nellie, laughing, “I wonder if you could ever 
be placed in a position where you couldn’t find something to 
eat and drink.” 

“Well, eating and drinking are some of the chief enjoyments 
of life, and, whether we live to eat, or eat to live, it’s all the same, 
for it’s something necessary to existence,” said he. 

“And does this plantain taste like bread, Jack?” 

“It is a very good substitute, Nellie, I assure you, but not as 
good as the real bread-fruit.” 

“Well, Jack, everything new in the way of eating makes a 
delightful change, for, no matter how good an appetite one may 
have, it is hard to eat the same things for breakfast, dinner and 
supper, day after day, and week after week,” said Nellie. 

“Yes, variety is the spice of life,” said Jack. 

That afternoon they were sitting out in front of the tent, in 
the shade of the trees. 


237 


23 8 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“How are you going to remove the treasure from here, Jack, 
if we should happen to signal a ship?” asked she. 

“I have been thinking of two or three ways, Nellie,” said he. 
“One way I thought of: we might gather a lot of cocoanuts, 
and open one of the eyes in the end of each, and, after pouring 
out the milk, fill the hollow with the stones and close the 
opening again with some dark-colored clay.” 

“And what is the objection to that plan?” asked she. 

“Well, for one thing, it would take so many nuts,” said he. 
“I’ve made a little calculation about it. The box containing 
the stones is about eighteen inches long, twelve inches wide, 
and twelve inches deep; therefore, the inside of the box con- 
tains twenty-five hundred and ninety-two cubic inches. Now, 
I don’t suppose the inside of an average cocoanut would con- 
tain more than eight cubic inches; therefore, to fill the nuts 
with the stones, it would require over three hundred nuts, and 
what excuse could we ever give for loading that many nuts into 
a ship?” continued he. 

“That’s true, Jack, but if we had some way of extracting the 
meat, too, it would not take near so many,” said she. 

“No, it would not take so many, but even if we could extract 
the meat (which, I must own, I know of no way of doing with- 
out breaking the shells), they would be too heavy, which would 
immediately lay them open to suspicion. Besides, did you 
ever see a pile of cocoanuts that wasn’t forever being disturbed 
by most every tomfool that came along, picking some of 
them up and shaking them to see if they had milk in them. 

Nellie laughed merrily, “I would not have thought of it, but 
I believe it is so,” said she. 

“I don’t know why people do such things. It just seems to 
come natural,” said Jack, “and people can no more keep their 
hands off of a pile of cocoanuts than they can from touching 
anything that’s newly painted, when it has a sign on it to caution 
people against it. Did you ever see anything, anywhere, at 


Rescued. 


*39 

any time, that had the sign of ‘paint’ on, but every last fellow 
that came along, would touch the end of his finger to it ? What 
does he do it for? It looks like he thought the owner hadn’t 
told the truth, and he was determined to catch him in a lie,” 
said Jack. 

Again Nellie laughed merrily. “And don’t you do these 
things, Jack?” she asked. 

“Yes,” said Jack, “that’s the trouble; I’m just as big a fool 
as the rest.” 

And Nellie laughed long and heartily, at the same time watch- 
ing the look of disgust on Jack’s face; until, finally, Jack, catch- 
ing the humor of the thing, laughed with her. After they had 
sobered down, Nellie asked : 

“Well, what other way did you think of?” 

“Well, I thought of taking a good-sized box; that is, one 
large enough for the purpose, and, putting the jewels in the 
bottom, and making a false bottom, and then filling it with pretty 
shells and curious stones, we could pose for relic or curiosity 
hunters,” said he. 

“And why not, Jack ; that don’t look so bad?” 

“No,” said he, “not on the face of it, but when you come to 
think it over, it wouldn’t work. You see, it’s this way,” Jack 
continued, “If we are ever taken away from this island by any 
ship, there will probably be passengers aboard, and some of 
them, lady passengers, and these will take you to their hearts, 
and they’ll want to hear your story, not once, but many times, 
and they’ll pet you, and talk over you, and, in fact, can’t get 
enough of you, and they’ll want to see everything you’ve got, 
and everything will be intensely interesting to them, especially 
anything brought from these islands ; and if you had a box of 
relics, they would never be satisfied until they had seen and 
handled everything in it, and then would want to know what else 
the box contained.” 

Again Nellie laughed merrily. “Well, that’s a good deal like 


240 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

a lot of women,” she said. “Well, haven't you decided on any- 
thing then?" she continued. 

“Yes, I think I will take just the simplest plan I can think of. 
The simplest ways of doing things are generally the best," 
said he. 

“And what is that?" asked she. 

“Well, I think I’ll put them into the lid of my trunk, and 
fasten up the opening and fill the trunk with my clothing, and 
lock it up. You see a trunk is considered one’s private prop- 
erty, and no one thinks of enquiring what you’ve got in it," 
said he. 

“I believe that is best, Jack," said Nellie. 

“Yes, that’s the best thing that I can think of," said he. 

And so Jack fixed it, and the jewels just about filled the 
aperture. Things became very monotonous for the next few 
weeks, and time hung heavy on their hands. One morning 
they had just finished breakfast, and were still sitting at the 
table, when their attention was attracted to the loud barking 
of Carlo, now and then interspersed with low, ominous growi- 
ngs. 

“I wonder what Carlo can have found now," said Jack, but 
paid no particular attention to the matter, until the low growls, 
and angry snarls, becoming nearer, he stood up and looked in 
the direction from whence they came. 

“Call off your dog here," were the words which greeted his 
ears. 

“Nellie! Nellie! Gee whilikins, we’re rescued, little girl," 
he shouted. “Down, Carlo ; come here, sir," he continued. 
Carlo obeyed, but still kept a wary eye upon the strangers, and 
still emitted low, gutterel sounds, as though not entirely satis- 
fied with the intrusion. 

“Hello; just at breakfast," repeated the voice, in a hearty 
manner, as a tall, muscular man in sailor dress made his ap- 
pearance, followed by three or four other seamen. 


Rescued. 


241 

“Yes’* said Jack, jumping forward with outstretched hand; 
“will you join us?” 

“No, thanks; we just had breakfast aboard ship.” 

“You fare pretty well for shipwrecked persons,” continued 
the man, letting his eye roam over the table, and then resting it 
with honest admiration upon Nellie’s blushing face. 

Nellie looked very fresh and sweet this morning, and was 
dressed in a pale pink dress, that Jack had only seen her wear 
a few times. 

“Oh, my little sister here and I have managed pretty well,” 
said Jack. 

“Your sister, is it?” said he, tipping his hat. “My name is 
Forbes,” he continued, “Samuel Forbes, and I’m first mate of 
the steamer Victoria, of Australia, bound from New York to 
Australia. We saw your signal, and so put in to see what was 
the trouble.” 

“Well, you’re exceedingly welcome, I assure you,” said Jack. 
“There were times when we almost lost hope of rescue.” 

“Have you been long here?” added Forbes. 

“About a year since we first struck these islands,” said Jack. 

“Well, I expect you must be pretty well sick of it by this 
time. May I look inside your tent, and satisfy my curiosity 
as to how you managed?” said Forbes. 

“Certainly; although it’s rather early in the morning, and 
the housemaids haven’t done their clearing up,” said Jack, 
laughing. 

“Oh, I’ll take all of that into consideration,” smilingly in 
reply. 

He looked around in the tent, and saw the pile of stores that 
were left. The chest of tools, the different utensils, both for 
working and cooking; then peeped into the bed-rooms, and 
saw how nicely everything was arranged, “especially for Nellie. 

“Why, you are pretty nicely fixed,” said he, as he reappeared. 

16 


24 - Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“But how came you to have so many stores left after all this 
time?” 

“I had a good many to start with; I just loaded a raft down 
with them,” said Jack. 

“Well,” said Forbes, “whenever you are ready to start we 
would be glad to take you and your sister aboard the ship.” 

“This is not really my sister; only by adoption,” said Jack. 
“We felt like two lonely orphans, and so adopted one another,” 
continued he, laughing. 

“I see,” said Forbes, again looking admiringly at Nellie, and 
tipping his hat. 

“Nellie, this is Mr. Forbes, — Miss Robinson, Mr. Forbes,” 
said Jack, with a flourish. 

Nellie acknowledged the introduction, with a graceful, little 
bow, and a pretty blush. She felt unusually shy, and timid this 
morning. 

“Well,” said Jack', “we can be ready to leave almost imme- 
diately; but what’ll we do with all these stores; there is quite 
a quantity of them left?” 

r4.“We’ll take whatever we think we can make use of on board 
the ship, and leave the rest to — oblivion,” said Forbes. 

While the men were carrying such things as Forbes selected 
to the boat, Jack and Nellie got together their few belongings, 
and soon all were ready to start for the ship. There was one 
thing Jack was not likely to forget, and that was the trunk, 
which he saw carefully deposited in the bottom of the boat. 
Then taking Nellie and calling Carlo, who had by this time made 
friends with the strangers, they took their places in the boat, 
and were soon bounding over the waves toward the ship, leav- 
ing, forever, behind them, the land that had proved to them 
both a refuge and a blessing. 

Nellie was received with open arms by the ladies of the cabin, 
and made a veritable pet of, and made to relate again and aeain 


Rescued. 


*4 3 

her wonderful experience, which, of course, transformed Jack 
into the hero of the hour. Jack was introduced to the captain 
by Mr. Forbes, and taken into the cabin, where he gave a 
minute and detailed account of all his adventures, commenc- 
ing with Seers’ perfidy, and his imprisonment, keeping back 
nothing except the finding of the jewels. 

“Well, you’ve had a wonderful experience, Mr. Haselton,” 
said he. 

“Yes, more wonderful than altogether agreeable,” laughed 
Jack. 

“Well, I guess you’re well out of your trouble now, but what 
do you intend to do with this Sears, when you meet him ? Seems 
to me a man like that isn’t fit to live among decent people,” 
said the captain. 

“No,” said Jack, “and yet I shall not take his life, but will 
find some better way to settle with him. Someway,” he con- 
tinued, “that will not bring me into any more trouble either.” 

“Yes, I suppose that is best,” said the captain. “No matter 
how mean a man is, according to law, he’s entitled to his life, 
and you would only get yourself into more trouble by attempt- 
ing to take it from him.” 

“Oh, I shall not attempt anything of that kind. I think I’ll 
be able to reach him in a way that will hurt him more, and do 
him more harm, than to do him any bodily injury,” said Jack. 

“Well,” said the captain, rising to go on deck, “I wish you 
all the success in the world ; anything that I can do for you in 
the meantime, don’t hesitate to let me know. Everything here 
is at your disposal, you know,” continued he, as he made for 
the companion way. 

Even Carlo was made much of, and soon became the pet of 
all the sailors, and would have been kept very busy, no doubt, 
could he have told all the experiences he had been through. 
They had been on board the ship for about a week, and Jack 


244 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haseiton. 

had not seen much of Nellie, for the ladies had taken complete 
possession of her. But one evening she appeared on deck, 
looking very sweet and pretty, in some new gown that Jack 
had never seen before. 

“How do I look, Jack, in my borrowed finery?” said she, 
standing before him for inspection, but blushing rosy red as 
she saw the admiration in Jack’s eyes, as he took in the beauty 
of the little figure. 

“Come and take a stroll, Nellie,” said he, without answering 
her question. “We will have the deck pretty much to our- 
selves, I guess. The moon is just coming up, and it will be a 
delightful evening on deck.” And taking the little hand, browned 
somewhat by the tropical sun, he placed it within his arm, and 
proceeded to pace the deck with her in silence. And the silence 
continued so long that Nellie wondered at it, and now and 
then cast little, shy glances at him. 

“Nellie,” said Jack, at last, “we’ll soon reach Australia now, 
and all our adventures will be at an end.” 

Nellie looked up at him, a little frightened, and turned slightly 
pale. 

“Yes, Jack,” she said softly. 

“And I have been wondering, the last few days, that when I 
leave you in the care of your aunt, providing she has survived 
the wreck, and return to New York, whether the parting is' 
to be forever, and if I shall never see the little companion of 
my adventures again.” 

Nellie’s hand trembled on Jack’s arm a little, and she went 
very white, but he did not notice. They were both standing 
now in a quiet place, and he was looking out at sea. 

“You see,” he continued, “I have become so used to you, 
Nellie, and to your sweet companionship, that it would go very 
hard with me if I had to part with you.” 

Nellie looked at him a moment; her eyes were full of tears, 
but still he did not see, and she unconsciously drew nearer to 


Rescued. 


245 


him. Jack was conscious of the little form drawing nearer, and 
felt the little, brown hand bearing a mite heavier on his arm, 
and he put his arm around her, and drew her still nearer. 

“Must the parting be forever, dear?” whispered he. 

Her long lashes covered the pretty, brown eyes, and she kept 
them on the deck. 

“Nellie, little darling, I love you; you are dearer to me than 
life itself. I have loved you, little sweetheart, almost from the 
first, and if this parting is to be forever and we are to meet no 
more, life would not be worth the living. Say, Nellie, dear, 
haven’t you got a little love for Jack in that dear little breast? 
Would the parting mean nothing to you, dear? Could you let 
Jack go away from you, and then forget; and would your life 
go on just as before?” 

“No, no, Jack ; please don’t,” she pleaded, and the little head 
went down on Jack’s shoulder, and the little form was shaken 
with sobs. 

“There, there, dear; don’t take it so hard, darling; Jack’ll 
never leave you, Nellie, unless you send him away. Dear, little 
sweetheart, so you do love Jack a little then,” and he kissed 
her hair, her forehead, her eyes, which she could not raise, and 
then her lips, and he petted her and coaxed her, and, holding her 
close, told her all she was to him again and again. Finally the 
sobs grew less and less violent ; the little form ceased its tremb- 
ling, and she grew very still, and thus they stood in silence for 
a long time, in bliss only known to loving hearts. 

At last she struggled a little, and looked up. “Jack,” she 
said, softly. 

“What is it, darling?” he asked. 

“Is my — is my nose crooked?” 

Jack burst into a hearty laugh, but he drew her closer while 
he did so. 

“No, darling,” said he; “you’ve the prettiest little nose that 
I ever saw,” 


246 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“And you won’t let any specialist pull it?” she asked. 

“I’d like to see him try. I’d punch his head for him.” 

And then they both laughed. Soon they commenced their 
promenade again, but with altogether different feelings. Where 
there was happiness before, there was now bliss. They talked 
of many things, going over all the past, viewed in the new light 
of love, as lovers will. They tried to lay plans for the future. I 
Jack insisted upon an immediate marriage, at Australia; but- 
it all was so sudden, Nellie wanted to wait. 

“But, Nellie, dear,” said Jack, “how much nicer it would be 
for you to return on the next steamer to New York as my dear, 
little wife. But then, we won’t decide that now, dear ; we’ll let 
you think it over, and get used to the idea,” he continued. 

And, finally, Jack took her in his arms, and kissing her tenderly 
many times, led her to her stateroom and bade her good-night ; 
and, then, lighting a cigar, paced the deck far into the night, 
building air castles of perfect bliss, and dreaming dreams of 
future happiness, as lovers only can. 


CHAPTER XVI. 


JACK AND NEEUE ARE MARRIED. 

Jack and Nellie now spent most of the time together on 
deck. The weather continued fine from day to day, and Jack 
was always waiting for her, and, as soon as she appeared, he 
would take charge of her, with a certain fond proprietorship, 
and lead her to the coolest spot beneath the awning, where he 
would find a comfortable chair for her; and then, sometimes, 
they would talk of the past, present and future, and sometimes, 
sit in utter silence, which is often more eloquent than words. 

Jack had persuaded her to his way of thinking, and she had 
agreed that the wedding should take place at her aunt’s house 
in Australia, providing that her aunt had survived the wreck, 
and was at home. And so the days passed quickly, and the ship 
plowed nobly through the waves and brought them day by day 
nearer to their destination. 

One day the captain told them that they would reach Sydney 
early the next morning. That evening Jack and Nellie were 
spending on deck the last night on board the ship. They had 
been promenading for an hour, and were now standing looking 
out over the water, as they had so often done before. There 
had been a long silence, broken only by the chug, chug of the 
ship’s engines, and an order now and then from some officer. 

“Nellie,” said Jack, “that great body of water is capricious. 
Sometimes it carries upon its broad bosom peace, joy and hap- 
piness, to all mankind ; then, in a moment, as it were, it will turn 
a frowning face, and bring ruin, death and hopeless despair.” 

247 


248 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

*‘And what has it brought to you, Jack?” she asked, softly. 

Jack looked thoughtful, and then replied, “It brought me 
first, ruin and despair, all but death, and then it turned to me 
its smiling face, and brought me peace, joy, wealth and the 
crowning happiness of my life,” said he, putting his arm around 
Nellie and drawing her close to him. 

“And are you sorry, Jeck, for the ruin, despair, the all but 
death?” she asked, softly. 

“To be crowned with my present joy and happiness ; no, 
Nellie, dear, a thousand times no ! Gladly would I go through 
it all again. Yes, many, many times over, if at the last I could 
have but one short hour of the joy and happiness of the present. 
Darling, little Nellie, you are my life, my joy, my all; without 
thee life would be void indeed ; with thee, living is a paradise,” 
said Jack, earnestly. 

And Nellie, looking up, with a pretty blush and a sweet 
shyness, put her two hands on his great shoulders, and 
whispered softly, “Jack, just so do I love you, too.” 

And Jack took her in his arms and held her close. There 
was a long silence, for what was their need of words? 

The next morning they arrived at Sydney, and Jack, after 
shaking hands with the captain, and thanking him for all his 
kindness, put Nellie into a carriage and, taking the valuable 
trunk with them, drove to her aunt’s house. Carlo bounded 
along the road beside the carriage. Her aunt Had survived the 
wreck, and was at home, but had long since given Nellie up for 
lost, and Jack left her and Nellie in each other’s arms, sobbing 
and laughing, alternately, and drove to a hotel and was given a 
room. He was in need of ready cash ; so, taking a few of the 
diamonds, he disposed of them to a jeweler. He then went to 
a barber-shop and had his hair cut and whiskers trimmed, for 
he had grown a full beard by this time. He went to a tailor 
next, and ordered several suits of clothes, for he realized that 
he had returned to civilization, and must dress accordingly. He 


Jack and Nellie are Married. 249 

did not call upon Nellie for a day or two, but he had got her 
father’s address while on board the ship, and sent a message to 
him of Nellie’s safe arrival in Australia; also telling him that a 
letter would follow the message. 

Then next day he made enquiries for the most responsible 
diamond merchant in the city, and was referred by every one 
to one broker of undoubted integrity, who made that his special 
business, and who had agents in all the best markets in the 
world. After satisfying himself thoroughly in regard to this 
man’s reliability, Jack called upon him and made arrange- 
ments with him to sell the jewels, and make returns to Jack 
in New York. He also advanced Jack ten thousand dollars 
for present use. 

Jack called on Nellie that evening, and she hardly knew him 
in his metamorphosed state. She blushed painfully, as though 
meeting an entire stranger, but Jack soon laughed her out 
of her shyness. 

"I didn’t know you were so handsome, Jack,” she whispered, 
shyly, as he stood with his arm around her. 

Jack laughed and kissed her tenderly. Then the aunt ap- 
peared, and approached Jack with both hands extended, which 
Jack took into his, and, as he looked into the kind, blue eyes, 
he saw that they were filled with tears. 

“Nellie has told me everything, Mr. Haselton, and I most 
sincerely thank God that she fell into the hands of such an 
honorable gentleman.” 

“Oh, that,” said Jack; “I did nothing but what any other 
man would have done under the same conditions.” 

“Oh, but I can appreciate your conduct,” said she ; “so you 
needn’t try to deprecate it. Besides,” she continued, laughing, 
“you might have a little more appreciation of yourself if you 
had seen the long letter Nellie wrote to her father, covering 
ten pages of foolscap paper. She tried to give him a correct 
account of everything, but I really believe the name of Jack 


250 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

not only appeared upon every page, but almost upon every line 
of every page.” 

Jack laughed merrily, and glanced at Nellie. 

“I don’t care,” she said, with a pretty pout. “How could I 
tell papa all about it without telling him about Jack, too?” 

“Oh, she lauded her Jack up to the skies,” her aunt said. 

“I expect,” said Jack, “if I were to write an account of every- 
thing, Nellie’s name would appear still oftener, for I could never 
begin to tell how bravely she bore all her troubles, and how 
sweet and patient she was through it all,” and he drew the shy, 
blushing little form to him, tenderly. 

“Well,” said the aunt, “I see that you two are desperately 
and irretrievably in love with each other, and anything an old 
maid of an aunt would say would have no effect,” but she 
regarded them very kindly. 

“But, about this marriage,” she continued, “to take place 
here; that is all very sudden, and I hardly know what to say. 
Of course her father ought to be consulted, but I suppose he 
will think of the matter about as I do.” 

“And how is that?” asked Jack. 

“Well,” she said, “among all the other things I am thank- 
ful for, I am very glad indeed that you happened to fall so 
desperately in love with Nellie. Under the circumstances, it 
is the very best thing that could have happened.” 

“But how could I have helped it?” asked Jack. 

“I know,” said the aunt, “just how nice and sweet she is ; yes, 
and pretty, too, but other girls are nice and sweet, and pretty, 
too, and if, for instance, you had already loved one of these 
others, and so, had no love to give to Nellie, it would have 
gone hard with the little girl. And so,” she continued, “I am 
glad that it turned out so ; but why this unnecessary haste, Jack ? 
You see you must be ‘J ac k’ to me too, if you are to be my 
nephew.” 

“I shall certainly be pleased to be considered in that relation,” 


Jack and Nellie are Married. 251 

said Jack; “but you ask, why this haste? What’s the good of 
waiting?” continued he. 

“How like a man,” laughed the aunt, “especially a man who 
has never been married, and has no conception of a woman’s 
wardrobe. You must give her time to get a suitable trousseau.” 

“Oh, she can have everything in that line that she wants, 
after she is married,” said Jack. “What’s the good of making 
up a great pile of stuff, simply to carry to New York? She 
can buy everything when she gets there,” he continued. 

“Well,” said the aunt, “I do not think, myself, that it is neces- 
sary to buy a great pile of stuff, as you call it, but it is neces- 
sary for her to have a few nice gowns, to make a change with. 
Has not your masculine eye penetration enough to have noticed, 
during your exile together, that she is nearly destitute of 
clothing?” 

“I never knew how many clothes she had. I only noticed 
that somehow she always managed to look fresh and sweet,” 
said Jack, looking at Nellie tenderly. 

“Just like a man in love,” laughed the aunt. “No, Jack, you 
will have to wait a few weeks, until I can have an opportunity 
of doing something in this matter for Nellie. Besides, we must 
hear from her father first, and get his consent. Although I 
have not much doubt in that regard, for he is a sensible man, 
and will see things in their true light. And now,” she con- 
tinued, as she arose, mischief beaming in her kind, blue eyes, “I 
will leave you two together, as you have been separated so 
long, and haven’t seen much of each other during the past 
year ; you must have a good deal to tell,” and laughing merrily, 
she left the room. 

Jack looked at Nellie and smiled. “I like your aunt, Nellie,” 
he said. 

“Oh, she’s a perfect dear, Jack.” 

“Thank you, Nellie,” said Jack, soberly. 

“What for?” said she, wonderingly. 


252 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“For calling me, dear Jack,” he said. 

“Oh, but I didn’t, — I mean — I meant — ” 

“Oh, yes ; I mean — I meant,” mimicked he, drawing her to 
him and kissing the pouting lips again and again. “Now, dare 
you say that I’m not dear to you?” 

“No, Jack, I—” 

“What’s that?” said Jack, kissing her again. 

“I mean — I meant,” said she. 

“What do you mean, anyhow, little darling; do you really 
know what you mean ?” kissing her again. 

“Oh, Jack, how can I tell you what I mean when you won’t 
give me a chance ?” looking up at him with a very rosy face. 

But it is not necessary to intrude further upon this happy 
pair. That they enjoyed the time allotted to them we may be 
sure, and it was a late hour when Jack took his departure. 

During the next few weeks Jack found the hours, during the 
day, hang heavily upon his hands. He was entirely tabooed 
the aunt’s house during the daytime. “For how can we ac- 
complish anything with a man hanging around ?” she laughingly 
exclaimed. But she allowed him the evenings with Nellie. 
So Jack had to put through the long hours of the day the best 
he could. 

He received a kind letter from Nellie’s father, thanking him 
for the excellent care of the little girl for whom the father had 
mourned for so many, weary months as lost to him forever, and 
giving his hearty approval of the wedding. And, in another 
letter, to the aunt, he asked her to “hurry up things, and get the 
wedding over, for he was anxious again to see his little girl.” 

He also wrote a long letter to Nellie, full of the love and 
tenderness of a father’s heart, and also of thankfulness for her 
wonderful preservation from all harm. In this letter he spoke 
very highly of Jack, and the part he had acted towards her, and 
approved of him in every way. 

Nellie cried a little over this letter. She saw even greater 


Jack and Nellie are Married. 253 

depths of love in her father’s heart than she had ever known 
before. And so the time passed until the day of the wedding 
arrived. It was a very simple affair, Nellie being almost a 
stranger in the place ; only a few intimate friends of her aunt 
were present. 

Nellie looked very sweet indeed in her white bridal robes, 
as she stood up with Jack, and the “twain were made one flesh,, 
until death do us part,” and blushed shyly when congratulated 
by the few present as Mrs. Haselton. 

Nellie’s parting with her aunt was rather a tearful ceremony, 
for the tears seem to lie very near the surface, although the 
happy, bounding heart was full of joy. After releasing Nellie, 
the aunt turned to Jack, and he put his arm around her, and 
kissed her, first on one cheek, and then on the lips, and, when 
he released her, the kind, blue eyes were filled to overflowing. 

“Be good to her, Jack,” she said softly. 

Jack only nodded the reply that his lips did not utter. 

They were hurried down the steps, into the carriage, and off 
to the steamer, Carlo keeping up with easy bounds along-side. 

The steamer sailed the same night for New York. 


254 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 


CHAPTER XVII. 

JACK “EVENS UP” THINGS WITH SEERS. 

It was the last night aboard the ship. They would enter New 
York harbor the next morning. Jack and Nellie were standing 
upon the deck. They had made the voyage without special 
incident, and now it was nearly over, and they would soon reach 
home. At least Nellie would; as for Jack, he had no home as 
yet, but intended to make a very handsome one as soon as 
possible for his sweet little wife, standing now so quietly by his 
side. 

“Well, Nellie,” said he. “This is our last night aboard ship, 
and soon all our wanderings will be ever, and we will have 
reached our haven of rest, the haven looked to so often with 
longing eyes, and hungering hearts, when cast like two poor 
waifs upon the desert isle.” 

“Yes, Jack,” said she. I can’t account for it, but, do you 
know that at times, I have a longing for the life on the isle 
again ?” 

“What, little girl? Getting homesick now for the rude cabin 
tent, and the turtles, and the fish and the hot baking sun?” 
asked Jack. 

“Yes, Jack. Sometimes I believe that I am really a little 
homesick for it all.” 

“And how about the savages? Wouldn’t you like to see the 
old chief again with his ugly mug, and pompous air?” laughed 
Jack. 

“Oh, dear! No, Jack, I never want to see another savage 
again, as long as I live,” said Nellie. 


Jack “Evens Up” Things With Seers. 255 

Jack laughed. “Well, supposing we buy a yacht, and take a 
trip back there some day?” 

“Well, Jack,” said she, thoughtfully. “That would hardly 
seem the same thing, you know. It wouldn’t exactly be the 
same life, in the same way.” 

“I think I understand your feeling, Nellie. It was the sort of 
Bohemian life, that you were first forced to live, and then to 
take a kind of liking to, and now you naturally miss the freedom 
of it, in all its unconventionality.” 

“I suppose it is something like that, Jack,” said she. 

“Well, I’m very glad that I was there to keep you company 
in your Bohemian life,” said he. 

“Oh, Jack, it would never have been the same without you. 
I could never have gotten along without you. I should have 
just died,” said she. 

“It was a rough life, and in many respects a happy one too,” 
said he. 

Nellie’s father was not on hand to meet them. The captain 
said that the steamer was ahead of her schedule time, so they 
took a carriage and drove to Nellie’s home, with Carlo 
following. 

The father was at his lonely breakfast, but no sooner did he 
hear Nellie’s voice in the hall than he jumped up, upsetting his 
chair, and dropping his napkin half way to the door. He ap- 
proached with arms extended, and Nellie’s quivering little “dear 
papa,” was almost entirely drowned in the deep thankful utter- 
ance of “Nellie, my darling little girl,” and Nellie lay sobbing 
in her father’s arms. Her father petted and soothed her, and 
patted her little head, then held out his hand to Jack. “I 
suppose this is Jack, of whom I’ve heard so much,” said he. 
“I want to thank you again, my boy, for your kindness to my 
little girl here. She has told me all about it in her letters, and I 
shall never feel able to thank you sufficiently for all you did, and 
the way you did it.” 


256 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“Oh, I deserve no thanks for what I did for Nellie,” said 
Jack, “who could have helped doing for the dear, patient, little 
darling, who bore all her trials so bravely?” 

Nellie now looked up with her April face full of smiles. Her 
father kissed her tenderly, and led the way into breakfast. 

After breakfast, Jack had a long talk with Nellie’s father. He 
told Mr. Robinson everything that had happened to him, and 
showed him the confession of Hal Sheldon. 

“The first thing you want to do, Jack, I should think, is to see 
your lawyer, and get a pardon from the governor of your 
state. According to law, you are still an escaped convict, you 
know. The governor would not hesitate about it in the light of 
this new evidence.” 

“But it don’t seem right,” said Jack, “to have to apply for a 
pardon for a crime that I did not commit. What I want is a 
vindication of my character. I ought never to have been 
convicted.” 

“Yes, I know,” said Mr. Robinson. “But the jury found you 
guilty, and you will still stand guilty, until pardoned by the 
governor of your state. Then afterwards the whole matter can 
be explained in the papers, showing up the perfidy of Seers, and 
his accomplices, and thus will your character be vindicated.” 

“Well, perhaps, that is the only way,” said Jack. “But I 
would like to have this done quietly. I don’t want Seers to 
know that I have returned, until I even up things with him.” 

“This Seers I happen to know has left your state and is in 
business here in New York. He has opened a broker’s office 
here,” said Mr. Robinson. 

“So much the better/’ said Jack, “I can work out my plans 
against him to better advantage in a large metropolis, than I 
could in a smaller place.” 

As they arose Mr. Robinson put his hand on Jack’s shoulder. 
“Jack, m y boy,” said he. “I don’t blame you for feeling this 
way about this man. But don’t do anything that will bring you 


Jack Evens Up” Things With Seers. 257 

into trouble. If you don’t think of yourself, remember Nellie. 
It would go very hard with her if you got into more trouble.” 

“I'll not do anything that will make me amenable to the law,” 
said Jack. 

“Well, then, that’s all right,” said Mr. Robinson. 

The next thing Jack did was to call upon Geo. Hampton, the 
other accomplice of Seers. He found him that evening at his 
boarding house. 

“Good evening, Mr. Hampton,” said Jack. “Do you recognize 
me?” 

Hampton looked up from a paper he had been perusing when 
Jack entered, and scanned him a moment. 

“No, I don’t believe I do,” said he. 

“Look again,” said Jack. 

Hampton looked at him intently. 

“There is something familiar about you, but I can’t place 
you,” said he. 

“Imagine, if you can, what I would look like without the 
whiskers,” said Jack. 

Again he looked long and earnestly at Jack, and turned 
slightly pale. 

“It can’t me — no — it’s not — Haselton,” stammed he. 

“Yes, but it is Haselton, Jack Haselton, the man whom you 
helped to condemn to a prison cell,” said Jack. 

“Who says I had anything to do with it?” said Hampton. 

“I say so,” said Jack. “And I have the proof here in my 
pocket.” 

“What proof?” asked Hampton. 

“Well, I’ve got the proof straight enough. I got the con- 
fession of your accomplice, the one who put that package in my 
trunk,” said Jack. 

“Hal Sheldon?” said Hampton, unguardedly. 

“Yes, you acknowledge your dastardly connection with it 
now, don’t you?” 

17 


) 


258 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“Well, what do you intend to do about it?” asked he. 

“What do you think I ought to do about it?” asked Jack. 

“I don’t know,” said Hampton, weakly. 

“Will you verify the confession of Hal Sheldon, and sign 
your name to it,” said Jack. 

“To what purpose?” said he. 

“I’m going after Seers,” said Jack. 

“He ought to be the one made to suffer,” said Hamilton. 
“He instigated the whole thing.” 

“I know,” said Jack. 

“But my part was a dirty piece o{,business too, Haselton, and 
I’ve always been sorry for it,” said Hampton. 

“Well, we’ll let that pass. I’m going to make Seers suffer 
for it in some way before I’m through with him. Come, will you 
do what I ask?” 

“Yes,” said Hampton. 

Jack took the confession that Sheldon had made and signed, 
and wrote underneath, these words : 

“I verify the above confession to be true in every part, and 
hereby acknowledge my part in the conspiracy.” 

He gave it to Hampton to sign, who, after reading it over, 
signed his name to it. 

“There,” he said, “that may be the means of getting me into 
trouble, but I’m willing to swear to it. But, where is Hal ?” he 
asked. 

“Dead,” said Jack. 

“Dead?” 

“Yes, I killed him,” said Jack. 

Hampton drew back and looked at Jack intently. 

“Yes,” continued Jack. “I killed him, but I didn’t kill him for 
this. In fact, I didn’t know anything of this conspiracy until 
he lay dying where he made this confession.” 

“Where did it all happen then ?” asked Hampton. 


Jack “Evens Up” Things With Seers. 259 

“On a desert isle in mid-ocean,” said Jack; “he belonged to a 
piratical crew, and had attacked me.” 

“Hal a pirate?” asked he, in surprise. 

“That’s what he was when he died,” said Jack, “brought to 
it by horse racing and gambling.” 

“Poor Hal,” said Hampton. “He didn’t mean to go wrong. 
He and I were chums at one time, but he got to going it too 
fast for me, and I had to let up.” 

“Well, he’s dead now,” said Jack, as he took his leave. 

The next morning Jack explained things to Nellie, and bade 
her good-bye for a few days, and went to see the lawyer who 
had defended him in his trial. When Jack explained things 
to him, and showed him the confession of Sheldon, verified 
by Hampton, he thought there would be no trouble in getting 
a pardon from the governor, and said he would immediately 
attend to it. Jack left him with that understanding. 

Jack was very busy for the next few weeks. He had a good 
deal of business on Wall street, and was continually dropping 
in on different stock brokers, making definite enquiries about 
all kinds of stock, and making a good many quiet enquiries 
about Mr. Seers, and what he was dealing mostly in. He 
found Seers was buying largely gold mining stock. This mine 
was situated in Colorado, and was called the Continental. He 
found that Seers had a good deal of faith in this stock, and was 
putting everything into it that he could turn into money, and 
that he had also put upon the market a good deal of his own 
paper to raise more funds to put into this stock. Jack im- 
mediately sent a reliable man out to Colorado with secret in- 
structions, and, in the meantime, commenced buying in this 
stock. 

The first he bought he paid one forty-five for. His man 
from Colorado reported the mine A No. 1. The mine was in 
good working order, and getting out very rich ore, and 
the vein was getting richer every day. Jack immediately set 


260 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

half a dozen brokers to work buying in this stock, getting hold 
of all they could of it without regard to the price. Under this 
demand the stock gradually and steadily rose, until Jack paid as 
high as one sixty for the last he bought. He now found that 
he had a controlling interest of the mine, which was what he 
had been working for, and that he and Sears together owned 
very nearly the whole mine. His man in Colorado telegraphed 
for instructions. Jack sent him secret instructions in cipher, 
and soon the mine unexpectedly to everyone stopped working. 
Soon a report spread somehow'that the vein had given out, 
and the stock began to go down. It went down very rapidly 
as the reports from Colorado continued bad. It soon fell 
below one hundred, and when no dividend was paid when due, 
it went down in jumps, and, in a very short time, was only worth 
twenty-five cents on the dollar, and there it seemed to hang. 
Jack now began to buy up Seers’ paper, with which the street 
was flooded. 

Everybody was anxious to get rid of this, for Seers’ prospects 
of ever paying it looked very slim. Jack bought all this up at 
an average cost of fifty cents on the dollar. He found he had one 
hundred and twenty thousand dollars’ worth of this paper, 
which cost him about sixty thousand dollars. He now called on 
Seers, who failed to recognize him, and demanded payment for 
this paper. Seers had nothing to pay with, unless he would take 
the Continental gold stock. Jack took this in payment at 
twenty-five cents on a dollar, receiving thereby four hundred 
and eighty thousand dollars in this stock. 

“That pays* my debts,” said Seers, “but it don’t leave me a 
dollar to my name.” 

“Well, I anTvery glad to hear it, Mr. Seers, for that is just 
what I have been working for. I would like you to know, also, 
that there is nothing the matter with this Continental mine, and 
that this nearly half a million of stock that you have just turned 
over to me will soon be worth as much as it ever was, and that 


26 1 


Jack “Evens Up” Things With Seers. 

all of it only cost me about sixty thousand dollars. A pretty 
good investment, don’t you think? Nearly three quarters of 
a million for sixty thousand invested. To prove what I 
say, if you want to make enquiries, you will find the 
mine putting out as rich pay dirt as ever by day after 
to-morrow. It was stopped by instructions. It will be started 
again in the same way, and all the dividends will be promptly 
paid when they become due.” 

“Why have you done this ?” he asked. 

“Oh, just for a little affection I have for you. You were 
getting rich too fast, and I was afraid it wasn’t good for your 
general health,” said Jack. 

“Who are you anyway?” asked Seers. 

“Don’t you know me, Mr. Seers ? Strange you should forget 
me. You used to be a particular, a very particular friend of 
mine,” said Jack. “In fact, you though so much of me, that 
you were afraid I might leave you some day, and you couldn’t 
bear the thought of parting with me so, and so had me put into 
a little room, a nice little room it was, and it had strong iron 
bars to keep me in ; so that I could not go away and leave you.” 

“Jack Haselton?” said Seers. 

“Yes, Jack Haselton. Come back here to get even with you. 
You infernal scoundrel, I am only half through with you. To- 
morrow your perfidy will come out in all the daily papers, with 
the confession of Hal Sheldon, whom I killed on a desert island 
in mid-ocean. This confession is verified by Geo. Hampton, 
your other accomplice, and you will be held up to the public in 
your true character. Keep your hand away from that drawer,” 
continued Jack, pointing a revolver square at his head. “When 
1 call upon a dastardly villian like you, I come prepared.” 

Seers saw that Jack had him at a disadvantage and so tried to 
beg off. 

“I hope you won’t do this thing, Haselton. I’m going to be 
married soon, and it will ruin me,” said he, 


262 Haps and* Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 

“So much the better,” said Jack. “If I can save some nice 
girl from such a low, mean villain, I shall be glad of the chance. 
No, there is no hope for you. If this don’t completely ruin you, 
both financially and socially, I’ll find some other means of doing 
it. I pardoned your accomplices, but I would never pardon you 
for your dastardly part in this dirty business. I bid you good- 
day, Mr. Seers ; but, again, I warn you to keep your hand away 
from that drawer, or I’ll put a ball right through your head.” 

Jack kept his face to Seers all the way to the door, and then 
quietly opened it and left the office. 

All of the next day’s daily papers contained a full account of 
the whole conspiracy, vindicating Jack completely, and showing 
up the perfidy of Seers. 

The evening papers contained an account of the suicide of 
Seers. He was found dead in his office chair, with a bullet in 
his brain, and a revolver still grasped in his hand. 

The next morning Jack received notice, from his lawyer, that 
he had been pardoned by the governor of his state. 


CHAPTER XVIII. 


CONCLUSION. 

It was in the month of June. Nearly a year had passed since 
Jack and Nellie had arrived in New York, like two waifs cast 
up by the ocean. 

They were standing upon the portico of a palatial residence, 
on the banks of the picturesque Hudson. Extensive grounds 
surrounded the building. The lawn stretched far out before 
them, like bright green shades of soft velvet, interspersed here 
and there, by beautiful plots of various exotic plants. Long, well 
kept drives, lined with tall elms, curved in beautiful symmetry 
towards the distant road. 

Jack and Nellie were standing at the head of the broad granite 
steps leading down into the grounds. Carlo, the other waif of 
the ocean, lay at their feet. 

“Well, Nellie, little girl. Do you still sometimes grow home- 
sick for the island life asked Jack. 

“Sometimes I do, Jack, really,” said she, laughing. “There 
are moments when I feel like I could give up all this splendor, 
and go back, at least for a little while, to the rude cabin-tent on 
the desert isle.” 

Carlo looked up and thumped his tail, as if he felt the same 
way. 

“I believe you are a regular little Bohemian, darling,” said 
he, drawing her fondly to him. “Perhaps I am, Jack, who 
know? Perhaps some of my great, great, great grand parents 
were real gypsies,” said she, laughing, 

263 


264 Haps and Mishaps of Jack Haselton. 


“Well,” said Jack. “I don’t know that I have any particular 
craving for the old island life. But, in looking back over the 
past, and the curious way in which I have been led, it certainly 
seems that there was a purpose in it all. That I must have been 
destined for my present joy and happiness, but that it was first 
necessary that I should go through the deepest, saddest trials 
of my life; perhaps that I might better appreciate, and more 
fully enjoy the bliss, and crowning happiness of my life, in the 
possession of the sweetest little wife the Creator ever made. 


THE END. 








. 









R ' 














■ 












- 


























































































; - 





i 





















* 

























\ 































v 





























v 




















































\ 



I 

l 


i 


* 



































































































































































. 





































✓ 



















